Digital Proportional R/C System

WEB FULL MANUAL

1M23Z09102

‫ڃ‬ŦƏƌƆƎŃƗƒŃƊƒŃƗƒŃƗƋƈŃƆƒƕƕƈƖƓƒƑƇƌƑƊŃƓƄƊƈ
ŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ
Introduction ・・・・・・・・ 6

Stick Control ・・・・・・・・ 24

Support and Service ・・・・・ 6

Stick Control: Airplane Example 25

Application, Export, andModiﬁcation ・・・・・・・・ 6

Stick Control: Helicopter Example
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 26

Compliance Information
Statement ・・・・・・・・・ 7

Stick Control: Multicopter Example
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 27

Deﬁnitions of Symbols ・・・・ 7

Stick Adjustment ・・・・・・28

Safety Precautions (do not operate
without reading) ・・・・・・ 8

Stick Mode ・・・・・・・・・29
microSD card ・・・・・・・・30

Features ・・・・・・・・・・12

Connector/Plug ・・・・・・・31

Contents and Technical
Speciﬁcations ・・・・・・・・12

Receiver Nomenclature ・・・32
Receiver's Antenna Installation 37

Transmitter Controls ・・・・・13
Transmitter's Antenna ・・・・15

Safety precautions when you
install receiver/servos ・・・・38

Transmitter Lipo Battery
LT2F2000B ・・・・・・・・・ 16

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation ・・39
S.BUS2 System ・・・・・・・40

How to turn transmitter power
ON/OFF・・・・・・・・・・・ 18

S.BUS2 Sdevice setting ・・・・41

Touch Display ・・・・・・・・19

Home Screen ・・・・・・・・42

HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON 19

Link Procedure ・・・・・・・43

Lock Display ・・・・・・・・20

After Setting ・・・・・・・・44

RF oﬀ mode ・・・・・・・・・20

Model ID ・・・・・・・・・・45

Switch (SA-SH) ・・・・・・・21

Range Testing Your R/C System 46

Volume ・・・・・・・・・・・22

Model basic setting procedure 47

Slider ・・・・・・・・・・・ 22

Servo Connection by Model Type・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 52

Digital Trims (T1-T4) ・・・・・23

Airplane/Glider ・・・・・・・52

Monitor LED display ・・・・・24
2 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

‫ڃ‬ŦƏƌƆƎŃƗƒŃƊƒŃƗƒŃƗƋƈŃƆƒƕƕƈƖƓƒƑƇƌƑƊŃƓƄƊƈ
Helicopter ・・・・・・・・・56

Idle down・・・・・・・・・・85

Multicopter ・・・・・・・・・ 56

Swash ring (Heli only) ・・・・86

SYSTEM MENU ・・・・・・・57

Swash (Heli only, except H-1) ・87

Display ・・・・・・・・・・・58

Stick alarm ・・・・・・・・・89

Sound volume ・・・・・・・59

Timer ・・・・・・・・・・・90

System timer ・・・・・・・・ 59

Function name ・・・・・・・92

H/W setting ・・・・・・・・・60

Telemetry system ・・・・・・93

Battery ・・・・・・・・・・・61

Sensor ・・・・・・・・・・・95

Range check ・・・・ 61( → 46)

Telemetry ・・・・・・・・・99

S.Bus servo ・・・・・・・・・62

Telemetry:Receiver [Battery] 100

Servo update ・・・・・・・・65

Telemetry:Receiver [Ext-batt] 101

Sensor update ・・・・・・・66

Telemetry:Temperature ・・ 102

Information ・・・・・・・・・67

Telemetry:RPM sensor ・・・ 103

LINKAGE MENU ・・・・・・・68

Telemetry:Altitude ・・・・ 104

Servo monitor・・・・・・・・69

Telemetry:Altitude [Variometer]
・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 105

Model select ・・・・・・・・70
Model type ・・・・・・・・・73
Servo reverse ・・・・・・・・75
End point ・・・・・・・・・・76
Servo speed ・・・・・・・・77
Sub-trim ・・・・・・・・・・77
Function ・・・・・・・・・・78
Fail safe ・・・・・・・・・・80
System type ・・・・・・・・81
Trim setting・・・・・・・・・83
Throttle cut ・・・・・・・・・84

Telemetry:Voltage [Battery]

108

Telemetry:Voltage [Ext-batt] 109
Telemetry:GPS [Distance] ・ 110
Telemetry:GPS [Speed] ・・・ 112
Telemetry:GPS [Altitude,
Variometer, Position] ・・・ 113
Telemetry:Servo sensor [Current]
・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 114
Telemetry:Servo sensor[Temperature, Angle] ・・・ 115
Telemetry:Current sensor[Current] ・・・・・・・・・ 116
3 ‫ ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

‫ڃ‬ŦƏƌƆƎŃƗƒŃƊƒŃƗƒŃƗƋƈŃƆƒƕƕƈƖƓƒƑƇƌƑƊŃƓƄƊƈ
Telemetry:Airspeed sensor[Airspeed] ・・・・・・・・ 117
Telemetry:Futaba ESC MC-980H/A,
MC-9130H/A, MC9200H/A ・ 118
Telemetry:SBS-01ML for Pixhawk®
・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 120

Rudder → Aileron ・・・・・ 147
Rudder → Elevator ・・・・ 148
Butterﬂy ・・・・・・・・・ 149
Trim mix 1/2 ・・・・・・・ 152
Snap roll (Airplane only) ・・ 153

Tele. setting (Telemetry setting)・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 122

Air brake (Airplane only) ・・ 154

Trainer ・・・・・・・・・・ 124

Ailevator ・・・・・・・・・ 157

Warning setting ・・・・・・ 127

Acceleration ・・・・・・・ 158

User menu setting ・・・・・ 128

Motor ・・・・・・・・・・ 159

Data reset ・・・・・・・・ 129

V-tail ・・・・・・・・・・・ 160

MODEL MENU (Airplane/Glider)・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 130

Winglet ・・・・・・・・・ 161

Gyro ・・・・・・・・・・・ 155

Gyro setting GYA553 ・・・・ 162
Condition select・・・・・ 131

AFR ・・・・・・・・・・・ 133

Connection T16IZ SUPER and
GYA553 ・・・・・・・・・ 162

Dual rate ・・・・・・・・・ 134

Home screen ・・・・・・・ 164

Program mixes ・・・・・・ 135

Conﬁg ・・・・・・・・・・ 165

Aileron diﬀerential ・・・・ 137

S.BUS Basic menu ・・・・・ 170

Flap setting ・・・・・・・・ 138

MODEL MENU (Helicopter) ・ 171

AIL → Camber ﬂap ・・・・・ 139

Condition select ・・・・・・ 172

AIL → Brake ﬂap・・・・・・ 140

AFR ・・・・・・・・・・・ 174

Aileron → Rudder ・・・・・ 141

Dual rate ・・・・・・・・・ 175

Elevator → Camber ・・・・ 142

Program mixes ・・・・・・ 176

Camber mixing ・・・・・・ 143

Pitch curve ・・・・・・・・ 178

Airbrake → ELE ・・・・・・ 145

Throttle curve ・・・・・・・ 181

Camber ﬂap → ELE ・・・・ 146

Acceleration ・・・・・・・ 183‫ڃ‬ŦƏƌƆƎŃƗƒŃƊƒŃƗƒŃƗƋƈŃƆƒƕƕƈƖƓƒƑƇƌƑƊŃƓƄƊƈ
Throttle hold ・・・・・・・ 184

MODEL MENU (Multicopter)

Swash mixing

・・・・・・ 185

Condition select ・・・・・・ 222

Throttle mixing ・・・・・・ 186

AFR ・・・・・・・・・・・ 224

Pitch → Needle ・・・・・・ 187

Dual rate ・・・・・・・・・ 225

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution
mixing) ・・・・・・・・・・ 188

Program mixes ・・・・・・ 226

Gyro (Helicopter) ・・・・・ 189

221

Gyro ・・・・・・・・・・・ 228

Governor ・・・・・・・・・ 191

Common Operations used infunction setup screen ・・・ 229

Gyro setting CGY755 CGY760R 193

Operations value setting ・・ 229

Wired connection:Advanced
setting ・・・・・・・・・・ 194

Operations related to ﬂight
conditions ・・・・・・・・ 229

Wireless tunings ・・・・・ 195

Operations related to ﬁne tuning
VR ・・・・・・・・・・・・ 230

Home Screen ・・・・・・・ 196
Basic Menu ・・・・・・・・ 198
S.BUS Basic Menu ・・・・・ 199
Swash Basic ・・・・・・・・ 200
Flight Tune (Aileron/Elevator Basicsettings) ・・・・・・・・・ 204
Rudder Basic ・・・・・・・ 207
Govenor Basic ・・・・・・・ 208
Expert Menu ・・・・・・・ 211
Rudder Expert ・・・・・・ 212
Flight Tune Expert (Aileron/
Elevator Expert settings) ・・ 215
Swash Detail ・・・・・・・ 216
Govenor Expert ・・・・・・ 219

Operations related to servo speed
・・・・・・・・・・・・・ 231
Curve setting operation ・・ 232
Switch selection method ・・ 236
PC Port ・・・・・・・・・・ 240
RealFlight Connection method 240
Updating ・・・・・・・・・ 242
T14SG/FX-22/T12K ⇒ T16IZ SUPERCONVERSION ・・・・・・・ 244

ŬűŷŵŲŧŸŦŷŬŲű
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba® FASSTest-2.4 GHz* T16IZ SUPER series digital proportional R/C system. Thissystem is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of\RXUV\VWHPDQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\,I\RXKDYHDQ\GL൶FXOWLHVZKLOHXVLQJ\RXUV\VWHPSOHDVHFRQVXOWWKHPDQXDORXURQOLQH)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQV RQWKHZHESDJHVUHIHUHQFHGEHORZ \RXUKREE\
GHDOHURUWKH)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHU
*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry'XH WR XQIRUHVHHQ FKDQJHV LQ SURGXFWLRQ SURFHGXUHV WKH LQIRUPDWLRQ FRQWDLQHG LQ WKLV PDQXDO LV VXEMHFW WR FKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH
6XSSRUW DQG 6HUYLFH ,W LV UHFRPPHQGHG WR KDYH \RXU )XWDED HTXLSPHQW VHUYLFHG DQQXDOO\ GXULQJ \RXU KREE\¶V ³R൵season” to ensure safe operation.

In North America
3OHDVHIHHOIUHHWRFRQWDFWWKH)XWDED6HUYLFH&HQWHUIRUDVVLVWDQFHLQRSHUDWLRQXVHDQGSURJUDPPLQJ3OHDVHEHVXUHWRUHJXODUO\YLVLWWKH7,=683(5)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVZHEVLWHDWZZZIXWDEDXVDFRP7KLVSDJHLQFOXGHV
H[WHQVLYHSURJUDPPLQJXVHVHWXSDQGVDIHW\LQIRUPDWLRQRQWKH7,=683(5UDGLRV\VWHPDQGLVXSGDWHGUHJXODUO\$Q\WHFKQLFDOXSGDWHVDQG86PDQXDOFRUUHFWLRQVZLOOEHDYDLODEOHRQWKLVZHESDJH,I\RXGRQRW¿QGWKHDQVZHUVWR\RXUTXHVWLRQVWKHUHSOHDVHVHHWKHHQGRIRXU)$4DUHDIRULQIRUPDWLRQRQFRQWDFWLQJXVYLDHPDLOIRUWKHPRVWUDSLG
and convenient response.
'RQ¶WKDYH,QWHUQHWDFFHVV",QWHUQHWDFFHVVLVDYDLODEOHDWQRFKDUJHDWPRVWSXEOLFOLEUDULHVVFKRROVDQGRWKHUSXEOLFUHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHDIDEXORXVUHIHUHQFHIRUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQEHSULQWHGDQGVDYHGIRUIXWXUHUHIHUHQFHDQGFDQEHDFFHVVHGDWDQ\KRXURIWKHGD\QLJKWZHHNHQGRUKROLGD\,I\RXGRQRWZLVKWRDFFHVVWKHLQWHUQHWIRULQIRUPDWLRQKRZHYHUGRQ¶WZRUU\2XUVXSSRUWWHDPVDUHDYDLODEOH0RQGD\WKURXJK)ULGD\&HQWUDO
time to assist you.
For Service :FUTABA Corporation of America:DOO7ULDQD+Z\+XQWVYLOOH$/86$
3KRQH)$;
KWWSVZZZIXWDEDXVDFRP
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com

Please visit www.futabausa.com to create and submit a service
ticket for warranty, repair, or check up work

Outside North America
3OHDVHFRQWDFW\RXU)XWDEDLPSRUWHULQ\RXUUHJLRQRIWKHZRUOGWRDVVLVW\RXZLWKDQ\TXHVWLRQVSUREOHPVRUVHUYLFHQHHGV 3OHDVH UHFRJQL]H WKDW DOO LQIRUPDWLRQ LQ WKLV PDQXDO DQG DOO VXSSRUW DYDLODELOLW\ LV EDVHG XSRQ WKH V\VWHPV
VROGLQ1RUWK$PHULFDRQO\3URGXFWVSXUFKDVHGHOVHZKHUHPD\YDU\$OZD\VFRQWDFW\RXUUHJLRQ¶VVXSSRUWFHQWHUIRU
assistance.

$SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ

1. This product may be used for unmanned aerial vehicle use. It is not intended for use in any application other than
XQPDQQHGDHULDOYHKLFOHFRQWURO7KHSURGXFWLVVXEMHFWWRUHJXODWLRQVRIWKH0LQLVWU\RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQV
DQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWRVXFKSXUSRVHV
2. Exportation precautions:
D :KHQWKLVSURGXFWLVH[SRUWHGIURPWKHFRXQWU\RIPDQXIDFWXUHLWVXVHLVWREHDSSURYHGE\WKHODZVJRYHUQLQJWKHFRXQWU\RIGHVWLQDWLRQZKLFKJRYHUQGHYLFHVWKDWHPLWUDGLRIUHTXHQFLHV,IWKLVSURGXFWLVWKHQUHH[SRUWHGWRRWKHUFRXQWULHVLWPD\EHVXEMHFWWRUHVWULFWLRQVRQVXFKH[SRUW3ULRUDSSURYDORIWKHDSSURSULDWHJRYHUQPHQWDXWKRULWLHVPD\
EHUHTXLUHG,I\RXKDYHSXUFKDVHGWKLVSURGXFWIURPDQH[SRUWHURXWVLGH\RXUFRXQWU\DQGQRWWKHDXWKRUL]HG)XWDEDGLVWULEXWRULQ\RXUFRXQWU\SOHDVHFRQWDFWWKHVHOOHULPPHGLDWHO\WRGHWHUPLQHLIVXFKH[SRUWUHJXODWLRQVKDYHEHHQPHWE 8VHRIWKLVSURGXFWZLWKDQ\WKLQJRWKHUWKDQPRGHOVPD\EHUHVWULFWHGE\([SRUWDQG7UDGH&RQWURO5HJXODWLRQV
DQGDQDSSOLFDWLRQIRUH[SRUWDSSURYDOPXVWEHVXEPLWWHG7KLVHTXLSPHQWPXVWQRWEHXWLOL]HGWRRSHUDWHHTXLSPHQW
other than radio controlled models.
 0RGLILFDWLRQ DGMXVWPHQW DQG UHSODFHPHQW RI SDUWV )XWDED LV QRW UHVSRQVLEOH IRU XQDXWKRUL]HG PRGLILFDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWVRQWKLVSURGXFW$Q\VXFKFKDQJHVPD\YRLGWKHZDUUDQW\

6 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶCompliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)
7KLVGHYLFHFRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV2SHUDWLRQLVVXEMHFWWRWKHIROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV  7KLV GHYLFH PD\ QRW FDXVH KDUPIXO LQWHUIHUHQFH DQG   7KLV GHYLFH PXVW DFFHSW DQ\ LQWHUIHUHQFH UHFHLYHG
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
 5)5DGLDWLRQ([SRVXUH6WDWHPHQW )RU7,=683(57KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&UDGLDWLRQH[SRVXUHOLPLWVVHWIRUWKIRUDQXQFRQWUROOHGHQYLURQPHQW7KLVWUDQVPLWWHUPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
5)5DGLDWLRQ([SRVXUH6WDWHPHQW )RU5656%
7KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK)&&UDGLDWLRQH[SRVXUHOLPLWVVHWIRUWKIRUDQXQFRQWUROOHGHQYLURQPHQW7KLVHTXLSPHQWVKRXOGEHLQVWDOOHGDQGRSHUDWHGZLWKPLQLPXPGLVWDQFHFPEHWZHHQWKHUDGLDWRU \RXUERG\
The responsible party for the compliance of this device is:
FUTABA Corporation of America:DOO7ULDQD+Z\+XQWVYLOOH$/86$
3KRQH)$;
KWWSVZZZIXWDEDXVDFRP
E-mail: service@futabaUSA.com&$87,21
To assure continued FCC compliance:$Q\FKDQJHVRUPRGL¿FDWLRQVQRWH[SUHVVO\DSSURYHGE\WKHJUDQWHHRIWKLVGHYLFHFRXOGYRLGWKHXVHU¶VDXWKRULW\WR
RSHUDWHWKHHTXLSPHQW

Compliance Information Statement (for Canada)
7KLV GHYLFH FRPSOLHV ZLWK ,QGXVWU\ &DQDGD OLFHQVHH[HPSW 566 VWDQGDUG V  2SHUDWLRQ LV VXEMHFW WR WKH IROORZLQJWZRFRQGLWLRQV  WKLVGHYLFHPD\QRWFDXVHLQWHUIHUHQFHDQG  WKLVGHYLFHPXVWDFFHSWDQ\LQWHUIHUHQFHLQFOXGLQJ
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
7KLVHTXLSPHQWFRPSOLHVZLWK,&UDGLDWLRQH[SRVXUHOLPLWVVHWIRUWKIRUDQXQFRQWUROOHGHQYLURQPHQW7KLVWUDQVPLWWHUPXVWQRWEHFRORFDWHGRURSHUDWLQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUDQWHQQDRUWUDQVPLWWHU
French:&HWDSSDUHLOUDGLRHVWFRQIRUPHDX&15G¶,QGXVWULH&DQDGD/¶XWLOLVDWLRQGHFHGLVSRVLWLIHVWDXWRULVpHVHXOHPHQWDX[GHX[ FRQGLWLRQV VXLYDQWHV    LO QH GRLW SDV SURGXLUH GH EURXLOODJH HW   O¶XWLOLVDWHXU GX GLVSRVLWLI GRLW rWUH SUrW j
DFFHSWHUWRXWEURXLOODJHUDGLRpOHFWULTXHUHoXPrPHVLFHEURXLOODJHHVWVXVFHSWLEOHGHFRPSURPHWWUHOHIRQFWLRQQHPHQW
du dispositif.
&HW pTXLSHPHQW HVW FRQIRUPH DX[ OLPLWHV G H[SRVLWLRQ DX UD\RQQHPHQW GX &, pWDEOLHV SRXU XQ HQYLURQQHPHQW QRQFRQWU{Op&HWpPHWWHXUQHGRLWSDVrWUHFRVLWXpRXIRQFWLRQQHUFRQMRLQWHPHQWDYHFXQHDXWUHDQWHQQHRXpPHWWHXU

Declaration of Conformity (for EU)+HUHE\)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQGHFODUHVWKDWWKHUDGLRHTXLSPHQWW\SHLVLQFRPSOLDQFHZLWK'LUHFWLYH(8
7KHIXOOWH[WRIWKH(8GHFODUDWLRQRIFRQIRUPLW\LVDYDLODEOHDWWKHIROORZLQJLQWHUQHWDGGUHVV

https://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/english/dl/declarations.html
https://www.rc.futaba.co.jp/support/manual/7 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flying Safety
Where to Fly:H UHFRPPHQG WKDW \RX À\ DW D UHFRJQL]HG PRGHO DLUSODQH À\LQJ ¿HOG<RX FDQ ¿QG PRGHO FOXEV DQG ¿HOGV E\
DVNLQJ\RXUQHDUHVWKREE\GHDOHURULQWKH86E\FRQWDFWLQJWKH$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV
7KH QDWLRQDO$FDGHP\ RI 0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV $0$  KDV PRUH WKDQ  FKDUWHUHG FOXEV DFURVV WKH FRXQWU\7KURXJK DQ\ RQH RI WKHP LQVWUXFWRU WUDLQLQJ SURJUDPV DQG LQVXUHG QHZFRPHU WUDLQLQJ DUH DYDLODEOH &RQWDFW WKH
$0$DWWKHDGGUHVVRUWROOIUHHSKRQHQXPEHUEHORZ
Academy of Model Aeronautics
(DVW0HPRULDO'ULYH
0XQFLH,1
7HOH  
)D[  
RUYLDWKH,QWHUQHWDWKWWS??ZZZPRGHODLUFUDIWRUJ$OZD\V SD\ SDUWLFXODU DWWHQWLRQ WR WKH À\LQJ ¿HOG¶V UXOHV DV ZHOO DV WKH SUHVHQFH DQGORFDWLRQ RI VSHFWDWRUV WKH ZLQG GLUHFWLRQ DQG DQ\ REVWDFOHV RQ WKH ¿HOG %H YHU\ FDUHIXOÀ\LQJLQDUHDVQHDUSRZHUOLQHVWDOOEXLOGLQJVRUFRPPXQLFDWLRQIDFLOLWLHVDVWKHUHPD\EH
radio interference in their vicinity.

ųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖ
Application, Export, and Modiﬁcation Precautions.
1. This product is only designed for use with radio control models. Use of the product described in this instruction manual is limited toradio control models.
2. Export precautions:a) When this product is exported, it cannot be used where prohibited by the laws governing radio waves of the destination country.
b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations.
3. Modiﬁcation, adjustment, and parts replacement:
Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modiﬁcation, adjustment, or replacement of parts on this product.
■ No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior permission.
■ The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
■ The contents of this manual should be complete, but if there are any unclear or missing parts please contact a Futaba Service
Center.
■ Futaba is not responsible for the use of this product by the customer.
■ Company and product names in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective company.

For safe use
Please observe the following precautions to ensure safe use of this product at all times.
Meaning of Special Markings:
The parts of this manual indicated by the following marks require special attention from the standpoint of safety.
DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.
WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not carried out properly,
RUSURFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSUREDELOLW\RIVXSHU¿FLDOLQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLVKLJKCAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or physical damage, if
not carried out properly.

= Prohibited= Mandatory

WARNING: Always keep electrical components away from small children.

8 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ũƏƜƌƑƊŃųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖWARNING

Never grasp the transmitter antenna while ﬂying.

For safety, ﬂy so that the aircraft is visible at all times.

■ The transmitter output may drop drastically.

Always make sure that all transmitter stick movements operate all servos properly in the model prior toflight. Also, make sure that all switches, etc. function
properly as well. If there are any diﬃculties, do not use
the system until all inputs are functioning properly.
Never ﬂy in range check mode.

■ Flying behind buildings or other large structures will not only
cause you to lose sight of the aircraft, but also degrade the RF
link performance and cause loss of control.

From the standpoint of safety, always set the fail safe
function.
■ In particular, normally set the throttle channel to idle. For ahelicopter, set the throttle channel to maintain a hover.

■ In the dedicated range test range check mode, the transmitter
output range is reduced and may cause a crash.

When flying, always return the transmitter setup
screen to the Home screen.

While operating, never touch the transmitter with, orbring the transmitter near, another transmitter, a cellphone, or other wireless devices.

■ Erroneous input during ﬂight is extremely dangerous.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not point the antenna directly toward the aircraft
during ﬂight.

Always check the remaining capacity of the transmitter and receiver batteries before each ﬂying session
prior to ﬂight.
■ Low battery capacity will cause loss of control and a crash.

■ The antenna is directional and the transmitter output isweakest. (The strength of the radio waves is greatest from thesides of the antenna.)

Always check operation of each control surface andperform a range test before each flying session. Also,
when using the trainer function, check the operation ofboth the teacher and student transmitter.

Never ﬂy on a rainy day, when the wind is strong, orat night.

■ Even one incorrect transmitter setting or aircraft abnormality
can cause a crash.

■ Water could lead to failure or improper functionality and poor
control of the aircraft which could lead to a crash.

Never turn the power switch oﬀ during ﬂight or while
the engine or motor is running.
■ Operation will become impossible and the aircraft will crash.
Even if the power switch is turned on, operation will not begin
until transmitter and receiver internal processing is complete.

Do not start the engine or motor while wearing theneck strap.
■ The neck strap may become entangled with the rotating
propeller, rotor, etc. and cause a serious injury.

Do not fly when you are physically impaired as it
could pose a safety hazard to yourself or others.
Do not ﬂy at the following places:■ Near another radio control ﬂying ﬁeld.
■ Near or above people.
■ Near homes, schools, hospitals or other places where people
congregate.
■ Near high voltage lines, high structures, or communication
facilities.

When setting the transmitter on the ground during
ﬂight preparations, do not stand it upright.

Before turning on the transmitter:
1. Always move the transmitter throttle stick position to theminimum (idle) position.
2. Turn on the transmitter ﬁrst and then the receiver.

When turning off the transmitterʼ s power switch
after the engine or motor has stopped (state in which it
will not rotate again):
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.
■ If the power switch is turned on/oﬀ in the opposite order, thepropeller may rotate unexpectedly and cause a serious injury.
■ Also always observe the above order when setting the fail safe
function.

When adjusting the transmitter, stop the engine except when necessary. In the case of a motor, disconnect
the wiring that allows it to continue operation. When
doing so, please exercise extreme caution. Ensure thatthe aircraft is secured and that it will not come into contact with anything or anyone. Ensure that the motor will
not rotate prior to making any adjustments.
■ Unexpected high speed rotation of the engine/motor may
cause a serious injury.

■ The transmitter may tip over, the sticks may move and thepropeller or rotor may rotate unexpectedly and cause injury.

Do not touch the engine, motor, or ESC during and
immediately after use.
■ These items may become hot during use.

9 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃƄƑƇŃŦƋƄƕƊƈƕŃūƄƑƇƏƌƑƊŃųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖDANGER

Do not recharge a battery that is damaged, deteriorated, leaking electrolyte, or wet.

Always use the charger with the specified power
supply voltage.

Do not allow the charger or battery to become wet.

If the battery liquid should get in your eyes, do not
rub your eyes, but immediately wash them with tap water or other clean water and get treated by a doctor.

■ Do not use the charger when it or your hands are wet. Do not
use the charger in humid places.

Do not short circuit the battery.
Do not solder, repair, deform, modify, or disassemble
the battery and/or battery charger.

■ The liquid can cause blindness.

Temperature protection for battery charge:

Do not drop the battery into a ﬁre or bring it near a ﬁre.
Do not charge and store the battery in direct sunlightor other hot places.
Do not charge the battery if it is covered with any object as it may become very hot.
Do not use the battery in a combustible environment.
■ The combustibles may could ignite ignite and cause an
explosion or ﬁre.

Always charge the battery before each ﬂying session.
■ If the battery goes dead during ﬂight, the aircraft will crash.

Low temp. protection
High temp. protection

Temperature-10 ± 5 ° C
60 ± 5 ° C

1. Replacement of a battery with an incorrect type that can defeat asafeguard.
2. Disposal of a battery into fire or a hot oven, or mechanicallycrushing or cutting of a battery, that can result in an explosion.
3. Leaving a battery in an extremely high temperature surrounding
environment that can result in an explosion or the leakage of
ﬂammable liquid or gas.
4. A battery subjected to extremely low air pressure that may resultin an explosion or the leakage of ﬂammable liquid or gas.

Insert the power cord plug ﬁrmly into the receptacle up to its base.
WARNING

Do not touch the charger and battery for any lengthof time during charging.

If the battery leaks liquid or generates an abnormalodor, immediately move it to a safe place for disposal.

■ Doing so may result in burns.

■ Not doing so may cause combustion.

Do not use a charger or battery that has been damaged.

If the battery liquid gets on your skin or clothing, immediately ﬂush the area with tap water or other cleanwater.

If any abnormalities such as smoke or discoloration
are noted with either the charger or the battery, remove
the battery from the transmitter or charger and disconnect the power cord plug and do not use the charger.
■ Continued use may cause ﬁre, combustion, generation of heat,or rupture.

Do not subject the batteries to impact.
■ Doing so may cause ﬁre, combustion, generation of heat,rupture, or liquid leakage.

■ Consult a doctor. The liquid can cause skin damage.

After charging, disconnect the charger from the receptacle.
When recycling or disposing of the battery, isolate
the terminals by covering them with tape.
■ Short circuit of the terminals may cause combustion,
generation of heat or rupture.

Use and store the battery and battery charger in a secure location away from children.
■ Not doing so may cause electric shock or injury.

CAUTION

Do not ﬂy with the USB AC adapter for charging connected.

■ Insert the power cord plug into the receptacle only after
eliminating the dust.

Do not use the battery with devices other than thecorresponding transmitter.

After the transmitter has been used for a long time,
the battery may become hot. Do not touch the battery
immediately.

Do not place heavy objects on top of the battery or
charger. Also, do not place the battery or charger in any
location where it may fall.
■ Doing so may cause damage or injury.

Do not store or use the battery where it is dusty or
humid.

■ Not doing so may cause a burn.

Do not bend or pull the cord unreasonably and do
not place heavy objects on the cord.
■ The power cord may be damaged and cause combustion,
generation of heat, or electric shock.

10 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ƐƌƆƕƒŃŶŧŃŦƄƕƇŃŋŦƒƐƐƈƕƆƌƄƏŃųƕƒƇƘƆƗŌŃūƄƑƇƏƌƑƊŃųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖ
5HDGWKHLQVWUXFWLRQPDQXDOVXSSOLHGZLWKWKHPLFUR6'FDUGIRUGHWDLOVWARNING

Never disassemble or modify the microSD card.

Do not use the microSD card where it may be exposed to water, chemicals, oil, or other ﬂuids.

Do not bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on
the microSD card.

■ Doing so may cause a ﬁre or electric shock by short circuiting.

If smoke or an abnormal odor emanates from the card,
immediately turn oﬀ the transmitter power.
CAUTION

Do not insert foreign matter into the transmitter card slot.

Since the microSD card is an electronic device, be
careful of static electricity.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

■ Static electricity may cause erroneous operation or othertrouble.

Do not expose the card to shock and vibration and do
not remove the card from the card slot while data is being written or read.

Do not use the microSD card near radio and television sets, audio equipment, motors and other equipment that generates noise.

■ The data may be damaged or lost.

■ Doing so may cause erroneous operation.

Do not store the microSD card in the following places:● Recorded data

・Where the humidity is high・Where the temperature diﬀerence is severe
・Where it is very dusty
・Where the card will be exposed to shock and vibration
・Near speakers and other magnetic devices

The data recorded on the microSD cardcannot be compensated regardless of thecontents or cause of the trouble or obstruction.
Futaba does not perform data restoration or
recovery work.

ŶƗƒƕƄƊƈŃƄƑƇŃŧƌƖƓƒƖƄƏŃųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖWARNING

Keep wireless equipment, batteries, aircraft, etc.
away from children.
CAUTION

Do not store wireless devices in the following places:
・Where it is extremely hot (40℃ [104 ℉ ] or higher) or
cold (-10℃ [14 ℉ ] or lower)
・Where the equipment will be exposed to direct sunlight・Where the humidity is high・Where vibration is prevalent・Where it is very dusty
・Where the device may be exposed to steam and heat

When the device will not be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the transmitter and aircraft andstore them in a dry place where the temperature is between 0℃ and 25℃ [32 ℉ and 77 ℉ ].
■ Leaving batteries inside your model and radio when they are notbeing used for long periods will result in battery deterioration,liquid leakage and other damage.

ŲƗƋƈƕŃųƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖCAUTION

Do not directly expose plastic parts to fuel, oil, exhaust gas, etc.

Always use genuine Futaba products such as transmitter, receiver, servo, ESC, etc.

■ If left in such an environment, the plastic may be damaged.

■ Futaba is not responsible for damage sustained by combination
with parts other than Futaba Genuine Parts. Use the parts
speciﬁed in the instruction manual and catalog.

■ Since the metal parts of the case may corrode, always keepthem clean.

Join the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
■ The Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA) provides guidelines
and liability protection should the need arise.

11 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ũƈƄƗƘƕƈƖŃFASSTest system
The T16IZ SUPER transmitter has adopted the bidirectional communication system "FASSTest". Data from the receiver can be
FKHFNHGLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHU)$667HVWLVDPD[LPXPFKDQQHOV*+]GHGLFDWHGV\VWHPColor touch screen LCD
7,=683(5KDVDQ+9*$LQFKIXOOFRORUEDFNOLW/&'WRXFKVFUHHQ7KHVFUHHQLVWUDQVÀHFWLYHZKLFKHQDEOHVERWKLQGRRU
and outdoor visibility.

S.BUS2 system%\XVLQJWKH6%86V\VWHPPXOWLSOHVHUYRVJ\URVDQGWHOHPHWU\VHQVRUVDUHHDVLO\LQVWDOOHGZLWKDPLQLPXPDPRXQWRIFDEOHV

Model types
0XOWLFRSWHUVZDVKW\SHVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUKHOLFRSWHUVZLQJW\SHVDQGWDLOW\SHVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUDLUSODQHVDQGJOLGHUVFunctions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in advance at the factory.

Lithium-ion polymer battery7,=683(5LVRSHUDWHGE\D9P$K/LWKLXPLRQSRO\PHUEDWWHU\microSD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)
0RGHOGDWDFDQEHVDYHGWRDPLFUR6'FDUG 6'0%*%6'+&*%*% :KHQ7,=683(5WUDQVPLWWHUVRIWZDUH¿OHVDUH
UHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHFDQEHXSGDWHGE\XVLQJDPLFUR6'FDUGXSGDWH

Edit button
7ZRHGLWEXWWRQVDUHSURYLGHGDQGWKHRSHUDWLQJVFUHHQFDQEHLPPHGLDWHO\³5HWXUQHG´WRWKH+20(VFUHHQGXULQJRSHUDWLRQ
6HWWLQJRSHUDWLRQFDQEHSHUIRUPHGHDVLO\E\FRPELQLQJWKLVEXWWRQZLWKDWRXFKVHQVRUVibration function
Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms by vibrating the transmitter in addition to sounding a buzzer.

Speech function$ IXQFWLRQ LV HTXLSSHG ZKLFK DOORZV WKH V\VWHP WR SURYLGH WHOHPHWU\ GDWD DXGLEO\ 7KLV IXQFWLRQ FDQ DOVR EH XWLOL]HG ZLWK
commercially available earphones.

ŦƒƑƗƈƑƗƖŃƄƑƇŃŷƈƆƋƑƌƆƄƏŃŶƓƈƆƌƲƆƄƗƌƒƑƖ

6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH

• T16IZ SUPER Transmitter• USB Cable• R7208SB or R7308SB Receiver • Hex Key• LT2F2000B LiPo Battery• Tx Strap• Short Manual*The contents may vary on the type of set.
6RPHSURGXFWVGRQRWLQFOXGHDUHFHLYHU

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃŷŔřŬŽŃŶŸųŨŵŃ
(2-stick, 18-channel, FASSTest-2.4 GHz system)

Transmitting frequency: 2.4 GHz band
System: FASSTest 18CH/FASSTest 12CH/S-FHSS/T-FHSS/FASST MULT(Europe is not supported)/FASST 7CH(Europe is not supported) switchable
Power supply: 7.4 V LT2F2000B LiPo battery
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz
RF power output : 100 mW EIRPŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃŵŚŕœśŶťŃŒŵŚŖœśŶť
(FASSTest-2.4 GHz system, Dual Antenna Diversity, S.BUS/S.BUS2 system)
Dual antenna diversity ( R7308SB Sleeve antenna)
Power requirement: 3.7 V-7.4 V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1)
Battery F/S Voltage: It sets up with a transmitter
Extra Voltage port: 0-70 V DC
Size: 0.98 x 1.53 x 0.56 in. (24.9 x 38.8 x 14.3 mm)
Weight: R7208SB 0.35 oz. (9.9 g) / R7308SB 0.39 oz. (11.0 g)
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz :KHQXVLQJ(6&VPDNHVXUHWKDWWKHUHJXODWHGRXWSXWFDSDFLW\PHHWV\RXUXVDJHDSSOLFDWLRQ  1HYHUXVHGU\EDWWHULHVIRUWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RIWKH56%56%DVWKH\PD\FDXVHGL൶FXOWLHV
Note: This set does not include a charger. Use a commercially available USB charger AC
adapter (USB-A type 5 V-2 A) or the Futaba optional USB AC adapter.
Note: The battery in the T16IZ SUPER transmitter does not arrive already attached to thebattery connector. Please connect the battery connector before use.

12 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃŦƒƑƗƕƒƏƖ
● SD card Slot

● Antenna● PC Port
The transmittercan be used as agame controller by
connecting it to acomputer with a USB
cable. (Some games
cannot be used.)Top● Monitor LED

Front● Right Dial (RD)● Left Dial (LD)● Switch
SA.SB.SE.SF● Switch
SC.SD.SG.SH● Stick● Stick

ŭŖ

ŭŕ
ŭŗ

ŭŔ
● Power Switch● Digital trim
T1-T4

● Hook● HOME/EXIT Button● Color LCD Touch Display

13 ‫ڀ‬● U.MENU/MON. Button（User menu/Servo monitor）

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

● Stick tension adjustment port

Back

● Right SliderRS● Left Slider
LS● Earpone
Jack● S.I/F Port（S.BUS setting）● Trainer port
● Battery cover● Kickstand● Charging Port

The angle when the transmitter isplaced can be changed by rotating
the swing handle and tightening
the screw.

Bottom● Charging LED

The LCD displays shown in this manual may vary from your own,
depending upon your model type. LCD displays may also vary as aresult of version upgrades or other changes.

14 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŊƖŃŤƑƗƈƑƑƄ
$VZLWKDOOUDGLRIUHTXHQF\WUDQVPLVVLRQVWKHVWURQJHVWDUHDRIVLJQDOWUDQVPLVVLRQLVIURPWKHVLGHVRI
WKHWUDQVPLWWHU VDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXUÀ\LQJ
VW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWLRQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQDWRFRUUHFWWKLVVLWXDWLRQŵƒƗƄƗƌƑƊŃƄƑƗƈƑƑƄ
7KHDQWHQQDFDQEHURWDWHGGHJUHHVDQGDQJOHVGHJUHHVForcing the antenna further than this can damage it. The
antenna is not removable.
Low power

1

High power

High power

If you ﬂy with yourtransmitter facing
the model at theangle shown in theillustration, bend theantenna 90 degrees.
Do not ﬂy your modelwith the antenna's
tip pointing in its
direction.

2

3

4

*Rotate ﬁrst

*Stand up next

5Stand up：1 ⇒ 5
Storage： 5 ⇒ 1

CAUTION
Do not grasp the transmitter antennaduring ﬂight.
Ŷ'RLQJ VR PD\ GHJUDGH WKH TXDOLW\ RI WKH 5)
transmission to the model.

Do not carry the transmitter by theantenna.
Ŷ7KH DQWHQQD ZLUH PD\ EUHDN PDNLQJ RSHUDWLRQ
impossible.

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.
Ŷ7KH DQWHQQD ZLUH PD\ EUHDN PDNLQJ RSHUDWLRQ
impossible.

15 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃůƌųƒŃťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃůŷŕũŕœœœť
ŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃůŷŕũŕœœœť
Connect the battery
connector

Press the tab toopen the battery
cover.

Tab

Remove thebattery cover
Close the battery cover completely

Battery coverFirst insert two tabs
Be careful not to pinch
the wiring

Install the battery into the transmitter
Click !
This connector connects tothe transmitter.

Click !

LT2F2000B
LiPo Battery

Press the tab toclose the battery
cover.

CAUTIONBe sure to lock the battery cover.
,IWKHEDWWHU\FRYHUFRPHVR൵GXULQJÀLJKWWKHEDWWHU\ZLOOIDOOR൵DQGFUDVK

16 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƋƄƕƊƌƑƊŃƄŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜ
This set is not equipped with an AC adapter
for charging. Must be purchased separately.
● AC adapter USB-A type 5 V - 2 Aor● Futaba option AC adapter USB type

Access the charge port byﬂipping the rubber coveron the bottom of thetransmitter.

Use a commercially available
USB charger AC adapter
USB-A type 5 V-2 A

USB Cable

Charging LED
Red: Charging
Green: Full

WARNINGWARNINGBe careful not to drop the battery.

Do not plug and unplug the charger
when your hands are wet.

Never disconnect the battery connector
from the T16IZ SUPER transmitter after
turning oﬀ the power until the screen iscompletely blank and the transmitter has
shut down completely.

*It may cause an electric shock.

* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.

Do not overcharge/overdischarge thebattery.
2YHUFKDUJLQJ2YHUGLVFKDUJLQJDEDWWHU\FDQUHVXOWLQ
EXUQV¿UHLQMXULHVRUORVVRIVLJKWGXHWRRYHUKHDWLQJ
EUHDNDJHRUHOHFWURO\WHOHDNDJH

,IWKHUHLVDQ\SUREOHPWKHPHVVDJH%DFNXS(UURUZLOOEHVKRZQWKHQH[WWLPHZKHQ\RXWXUQRQWKHSRZHURIWKH
transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as it is. Send it to the
Futaba service center.

CAUTION
When the charger is not in use,
disconnect it from the AC outlet.
* Do this to prevent accidents and to avoid overheating.

17 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƗƘƕƑŃƗƕƄƑƖƐƌƗƗƈƕŃƓƒƚƈƕŃŲűŒŲũũŃ
:KHQWXUQLQJRQWKHSRZHUWKH7,=683(5WUDQVPLWWHUZLOOEHJLQHPLWWLQJ5)DXWRPDWLFDOO\DIWHULW
FRQ¿UPVWKHVXUURXQGLQJ5)FRQGLWLRQV7KHVWDWXVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVGLVSOD\HGE\/('DWWKHXSSHUSDUW
of the front of a T16IZ SUPER.
,I7+5VWLFNLVKLJKD:$51,1*VFUHHQZLOODSSHDU$QRWKHUZDUQLQJZLOODSSHDULIDSRZHUVXSSO\LVDWWDFKHG ,Q0XOWLFRSWHUPRGHWKH7+5SRVLWLRQDODUPZLOOQRWDSSHDUųƒƚƈƕŃŲű

ųƒƚƈƕŃŲũũ

Throttle Stick Low
Power Switch

Power Switch

Long Push

PushŬƉŃƗƋƈŃŅŷƋƕŃƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑŅŃƄƏƄƕƐŃƇƌƖƓƏƄƜƖ
,IWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLVLQWKHKLJKSRVLWLRQZKHQWKH
SRZHULVWXUQHG21:KHQWKHDODUPDFWLYDWHVORZHUWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNEHIRUHWXUQLQJWKHUHFHLYHUSRZHU21
,IWKHSRZHULVWXUQHG21ZKHQWKHLGOHXSDLUEUDNH
HWFVZLWFKHVDUH21WKHDERYHZDUQLQJZLOOGLVSOD\(QVXUHWKHUHOHYDQWVZLWFKHVDUHWXUQHG2))

Tap this to stop the alarmand RF signal. Only panel
screen operation is active, thetransmitter will not link to any
receiver.

Warning alarm

If the power switches are turned oﬀ in the opposite order the model may unexpectedly run out of control andcause a very dangerous situation.

ŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒƑŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
1. Turn on the transmitter power switch.
2. Turn on the receiver or speed control power switch.

ONŷƘƕƑƌƑƊŃƒȭŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƈƖ
Always be sure the motor/engine is stopped.
1. Turn oﬀ the receiver or speed control power switch.
2. Then turn oﬀ the transmitter power switch.

OFF

ON

18 ‫ڀ‬

OFFŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƒƘƆƋŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ

Tapping the settings buttons foreach value on the settings screen
will cause value input buttons toappear at the top of the panel.

7DSWKHSDQHOZLWK\RXU¿QJHUWRQDYLJDWH
3ODVWLF¿OPLVDWWDFKHGWRWKH7RXFK'LVSOD\3OHDVH
EH FDUHIXO VR WKDW \RX GRQ W VFUDWFK WKH 7RXFK'LVSOD\ZLWKDQ\WKLQJKDUGVXFKDVDPHWDOREMHFW'RQ WSXVKWKH7RXFK'LVSOD\ZLWKH[FHVVLYHIRUFH
or drop anything on the panel.
$OWKRXJK\RXPD\¿QGVRPHDLUEXEEOHVXQGHUWKH
plastic panel due to environmental changes such
DVWHPSHUDWXUHLWLVQRWDGHIHFWDQGZLOOFDXVHQR
problems.
&RORU /&' LV PDGH IURP PDQ\ SL[HOV 6RPH
SL[HOVKROGOLJKWLQJ0RUHRYHUVRPHSL[HOVJRRXWAnd a screen may flicker. Such condition is the
FKDUDFWHULVWLFVRIFRORU/&',WLVQRWIDLOXUH

Pressing and holding a value will
return it to its default setting.
Value input buttons display at the
top of the display.

Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueūŲŰŨŒŨŻŬŷŃƄƑƇŃŸőŰŨűŸŒŰŲűőŃ

HOME/EXIT
Return to theprevious screen
Return to thePress and holdhome screen
Press

Press fromHOME screen.

U.MENU/MON.
To user menu
display
Press and To servo monitor
holddisplayPress

To Telemetry
display

Press and hold
Panel lock / Lockfrom HOME
releasescreen.

19 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ůƒƆƎŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ
Temporarily activating this function makes it impossible to change data by accidental input duringÀLJKW
How to lock1. With the home screen displayed.
2. Press the HOME/EXIT button for about 1
second. "Key Icon" is displayed and thekeys will be disabled.

ŃůƒƆƎŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ

HOME/EXIT Press and holdHow to unlock
1. Press the Home/Exit button for about 1
second, and the display will then become
unlocked.

CAUTION
The T16IZ SUPER's touch screen is very sensitive.
To avoid accidentally activating it during a flight,
it is suggested that it be locked. Due to the touch
screen's sensitivity, allowing it to be touchedduring flight by a neck strap hook, servo extension,or even your hand could be dangerous. Please use
the Touch Display lock for added safety during
flight.

Display unlock

HOME/EXIT Press and holdŵũŃƒȭŃƐƒƇƈ
0RGHORSHUDWLRQLVGLVDEOHGEXWGLVSOD\RSHUDWLRQZLWKRXW5)VLJQDORXWSXWLVDOORZHG 5HGXFHVEDWWHU\SRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQGXULQJVHWXS"RF oﬀ" Model
operation is notpossible, but only
panel operation is.

Restart the power
to transmit RF
signals.

U.MENU/MON.
Press andPower ON20 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃŋŶŤŐŶūŌŃ

SF : 2 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SH : 2 positions; Momentary;Long lever

SE : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

SG : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever

SA : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SB : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever

SD : 3 positions; Alternate;
Short lever
SC : 3 positions; Alternate;Long lever*Self retum

2 positions

3 positions

Alternate

21 ‫ڀ‬

MomentaryŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŹƒƏƘƐƈ
7KH YROXPH /' DQG 5' NQREV DOORZ
analog input.

LD

7KH7,=683(5WUDQVPLWWHUEHHSVZKHQWKH
volume knob reaches the center position.
<RXFDQXVHHDFKVHWWLQJVFUHHQRIWKHPL[LQJfunctions to select volumes and define thedirection of movement.

RDŶƏƌƇƈƕ

LS

RSůŶŃŋůƈƉƗŌŏŃŵŶŃŋŵƌƊƋƗŌŝ

7KH/LQHDU6OLGHU/6DQG56R൵HUDQDORJLQSXW
7KH7,=683(5WUDQVPLWWHUEHHSVZKHQWKHOHYHUFRPHVWRWKHFHQWHU<RXFDQVHOHFWDVOLGHOHYHUDQGVHWWKHPRYHPHQWGLUHFWLRQRQWKHVHWWLQJVFUHHQRIPL[LQJIXQFWLRQV

22 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŧƌƊƌƗƄƏŃŷƕƌƐƖŃŷŔŐŷŗ

T4

T3

T2

T1

7KLVWUDQVPLWWHULVHTXLSSHGZLWKGLJLWDOWULPV(DFKWLPH\RXSUHVVDWULPEXWWRQWKHWULPSRVLWLRQPRYHVRQHVWHS,I\RXFRQWLQXHSUHVVLQJLWWKHWULPSRVLWLRQVWDUWVWRPRYHIDVWHU,QDGGLWLRQZKHQ
WKHWULPSRVLWLRQUHWXUQVWRWKHFHQWHUWKHWRQHZLOOFKDQJH<RXFDQDOZD\VPRQLWRUWULPSRVLWLRQVE\
UHIHUHQFLQJWKH/&'VFUHHQ
<RX FDQ VHOHFW WKH WULP VWHS DPRXQW DQG WKH GLVSOD\ XQLWRQWKHKRPHVFUHHQRQWKH77VHWWLQJVFUHHQZLWKLQWKH
linkage menu.
1RWH7KHWULPSRVLWLRQV\RXKDYHVHWZLOOEHVWRUHGLQWKH
QRQYRODWLOHPHPRU\DQGZLOOUHPDLQWKHUH

Long push the trim as it
is to reset it to neutral.

ŧƌƊƌƗƄƏŃƗƕƌƐŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƄƏŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2◆When the airplane goes up while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆When the airplane dives while theelevator stick is neutral.

◆Elevator trim down

◆Elevator trim up

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Neutral

Elevator Down

Elevator Up◆Adjust so that the airplane ﬂies level.

23 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰƒƑƌƗƒƕŃůŨŧŃŧƌƖƓƏƄƜ
7KHVWDWXVRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVGLVSOD\HGE\/('LQGLFDWRUVRQWKHXSSHUSRUWRQRIWKH7,=683(5Red LED

Blue LED◆ ON At startup◆ ON

Radio waves are being transmitted.

◆ Blinking Power switch is turned on withthe throttle stick on the high
side.

◆ OFF

Radio waves are in the OFF state.

◆ Blinking (0.5 s)◆ Blinking (1 s)

Link mode
Range check mode

Power switch is turned on when
any condition switch is activated(in the ON state).

ŶƗƌƆƎŃŦƒƑƗƕƒƏ*Example Stick Mode2(OHYDWRUVWLFN
3LWFKD[LV$LOHURQVWLFN

5ROOD[LV(QJLQHPRWRU3RZHU

7KURWWOHVWLFN<DZD[LV

5XGGHUVWLFN

24 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll
Nose UpThe right aileronis up.

The left aileronis down.

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right
Level ﬂight(moved to the bottom)

Elevator isup.

Level ﬂight

NeutralNeutralElevator is
down.

Left roll

The left aileronis up.

The right
aileron is
down.

Aileron stickElevator stick

Nose Down

DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle Control

High throttle
Nose Right
Throttle stick

Rudder stick

HIGHT

To the right(moved to the top)

A rudder isright.

MiddleThrottle stick
NeutralStraight

Nose Left

MIDDLE(neutral)A rudder isleft.

Low throttle

Rudder stickThrottle stick

To the left

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)

25 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control

Right roll

Nose Up

Elevator stick

Aileron stickUP

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Level ﬂight
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralAileron stickElevator stick

Left roll

Nose Down

To the left

Nose Right

DOWN(moved to the top)

Yaw Axis Control

Throttle /Pitch Control

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGHT

To the right

Pitch UpHigh

(moved to the top)

Hovering
Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE
MiddleStraight(neutral)

Descent
Pitch Down

Rudder stick
Nose Left

Throttle stick

To the leftSlow

26 ‫ڀ‬

SLOW(moved to the bottom)

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƗƌƆƎŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃŝŃŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃŨƛƄƐƓƏƈ*Example Stick Mode2

A general model example. (There is also a diﬀerent operational model.)Pitch Axis Control

Roll Axis Control
Right roll

Nose Up

Right slide

Elevator stick

Aileron stick

Hovering
Level ﬂight

UP

Back slide

To the right(moved to the bottom)

Hovering
Level ﬂight
NeutralNeutralLeft roll
Nose Down
Left slide
Aileron stick

Front slide

Elevator stick
DOWN

To the left

(moved to the top)

Throttle Control

Yaw Axis Control
Nose Right

Rudder stickThrottle stick
Rise
HIGH

To the right(moved to the top)

Hovering

Hovering
Level ﬂight

Throttle stick
NeutralMIDDLE(neutral)

Descent

Throttle stick

Rudder stick
Nose Left

To the left

Stop

SLOW
(moved to the bottom)

27 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƗƌƆƎŃŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃ
ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃƏƈƑƊƗƋ

ŤƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗŃƒƉŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƏƈƙƈƕŃƗƈƑƖƌƒƑ

<RX FDQ DGMXVW WKH OHQJWK RI VWLFN OHYHUV DV \RX
OLNH,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWRDGMXVWWKHOHQJWKRIWKH
VWLFNVLQOLQHZLWK\RXUKDQGVL]HLever headA

You can adjust how quickly the
stick returns to neutral.

Lever headB

1. Hold the lever head "B" and turn the leverhead "A" counter-clockwise. The lock will be
released.
2. Turn the lever-head "A" clockwise as you holdthe lever-head "B" after placing it as you like.

The tension of the self-return type stick lever can
EHDGMXVWHG

J2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → SoftJ1 stickJ4 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → Soft

Back side
1. Use a screw driver to adjust the spring
strength as you prefer by turning theadjusting screw of the stick you want toadjust.

Turn screw counter-clockwise.
Turn screw clockwise.

7XUQLQJWKHVFUHZFORFNZLVHLQFUHDVHVWKHWHQVLRQCAUTION: Loosening the screw too much
can interfere with the internal stick operation.
The limit is 9 turns counterclockwise from the
maximum position.

Stick tension minimum
Stick tension maximum

28 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƗƌƆƎŃŰƒƇƈ

RUD

AIL

RUD

AIL

AIL

RUD

AIL

RUD

ELE THRTHR ELEELE THRTHR ELE

MODE1

MODE2

MODE3

MODE4

J3

J2

Default
J2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Hard

Spring → Hard

Spring → Soft

Spring → SoftJ2 stickJ3 stick

Spring → Free

Spring → Free

Spring → ACT

Spring → ACT

J2 stickJ3 stick

Ratchet → +Ratchet → +Ratchet → Free

EX: MODE2 → MODE1

Ratchet → Free

Back side● System menu ⇒ H/W setting

Calibrate after
changing stick mode

Select stick mode

WARNING● The changed stick mode will bereflected from the newly createdmodel data.

● Before the flight, make sure that theoperation of the stick matches themodel operation.

● Change stick mode before enteringmodel data.

29 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ƐƌƆƕƒŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃŋƖƈƆƘƕƈŃƇƌƊƌƗƄƏŃƐƈƐƒƕƜŃƆƄƕƇŌŃŋƑƒƗŃƌƑƆƏƘƇƈƇŌ
The T16IZ SUPER transmitter model data can be stored by using any
FRPPRQO\ IRXQG PLFUR6' FDUG:KHQ7,= 683(5 XSGDWH VRIWZDUH LV
UHOHDVHGWKHVRIWZDUHLVXSGDWHGXVLQJDPLFUR6'FDUG7KH7,=683(5LV
FDSDEOHRIXVLQJ6'DQG6'+&FDUGV 6'0%*%6'+&*%*% ƐƌƆƕƒŶŧŃƆƄƕƇŃƕƈƄƇƈƕŒƚƕƌƗƈƕ
6DYLQJPRGHOGDWDDQGXSGDWH¿OHV UHOHDVHGIURP)XWDED LQWRWKHPLFUR6'FDUG\RXFDQXVHWKRVH
¿OHVRQ\RXU7,=683(5WUDQVPLWWHU(TXLSPHQWIRUUHDGLQJDQGZULWLQJPLFUR6'FDUGVLVDYDLODEOH
at most electronics stores.

ŶƗƒƕƈƇŃƇƄƗƄ
When you have a problem of saving or reading
GDWD DIWHU D ORQJ SHULRG RI XVH SOHDVH JHW D QHZmicroSD card.
:HDUHQRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUDQGR൵HUQRFRPSHQVDWLRQIRU
memory card data that fails or is damaged for any reason.
Be sure to keep a backup of all important data stored in yourmicroSD card.

ŬƑƖƈƕƗƌƑƊŒƕƈƐƒƙƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƐƌƆƕƒŶŧŃƆƄƕƇ
1） Rotate the antenna.

1） Open the rubber cover and insert the
microSD card into the SD card slot.

Card slot

1） When the microSD card is pressed in once
again, the card will be released from thecard slot and can be removed.

SD card slot
*Pay attention to the proper
orientation of the SD card, as
shown here.

The SD card slot is shown in the next ﬁgure.

30 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

-When a microSD card is installed in the7,= 683(5 WUDQVPLWWHU D IROGHU FDOOHG)XWDED LV FUHDWHG )ROGHUV FDOOHG /2*
DQG 02'(/ DUH FUHDWHG LQ WKLV IROGHU
7KH02'(/IROGHUVWRUHVWKHPRGHOGDWD
DQG WKH /2* IROGHU VWRUHV WKH WHOHPHWU\log data.

CAUTIONBe sure to turn off the power tothe transmitter before inserting or
removing the microSD card.
As the microSD card is a precision
device, do not use excessive force wheninserting.

-The telemetry log data recorded on the
microSD card can be converted to CSV
format by the telemeter log converter released on our home page. When copying or
PRYLQJ D ORJ ¿OH DOZD\V VHOHFW ERWK )/,
DQG)/'¿OH
ŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŒųƏƘƊ

Earphone
PlugŨƄƕƓƋƒƑƈŃƓƏƘƊ
&RQQHFWLQJ D VWHUHR KHDGSKRQH WR WKLV SOXJ WKH
speech information of telemetry can be heard.

Open the rubber coverŶőťŸŶŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃŋŶőŬŒũŌ
:KHQXVLQJDQ6%86VHUYRDQGWHOHPHWU\VHQVRU
connect them both here.

TrainerConnector

S.BUS (S.I/F)
ConnectorŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƉƒƕŃƗƕƄƌƑƈƕŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑ
:KHQ \RX XVH WKH WUDLQHU IXQFWLRQ FRQQHFW WKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQHUFDEOHEHWZHHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVIRU
teacher and student.
<RX FDQ VHW WKH WUDLQHU IXQFWLRQ RQ WKH7UDLQHU )XQFWLRQ
screen in the System menu.

31 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃűƒƐƈƑƆƏƄƗƘƕƈ

Mode LED

Mode Switch%HIRUHXVLQJWKHUHFHLYHUEHVXUHWRUHDGWKH
SUHFDXWLRQVOLVWHGLQWKHIROORZLQJSDJHV&KDQQHOV

&KDQQHOVRU6%86
&KDQQHORU6%86ŰƒƇƈŃŶƚƌƗƆƋ
8VHWKHVPDOOSODVWLFVFUHZGULYHUWKDWZDVLQFOXGHGZLWK\RXUUHFHLYHU 7KHEXWWRQLVQRWXVHGWROLQNWKHWUDQVPLWWHUDQGUHFHLYHUWRJHWKHU

6%867HOHPHWU\VHQVRU
RU6%86HTXLSPHQWŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕ

* CH mode selection)$667HVW&+ WHOHPHWU\2)) PRGHVHWLQJ
'XDO5;/LQNPRGHVHWWLQJWKURXJKRXWSXWVIRUWKHFKDQQHOVWKURXJK
6%IRUWKHFKDQQHOVWKURXJKRU6%86SRUW
6%RXWSXWVRIFKDQQHOVRU6%86SRUW[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]6%865;RXWSXWVRI6%86SRUW[Telemetry Sensor ]＋*Connect the battery to the free port.
:KHQ XVLQJ QLQH RU PRUH FKDQQHOV XVH DQ 6%86
IXQFWLRQRUXVHDVHFRQG56%RU56%DQG
link both to your transmitter.
7KH56%6%KDVDSRUWVZLWFKLQJIXQFWLRQ,I
6%WR6%SRUWVDUHDOVRVHWWR6%86VHQVRUVFDQ
be connected.

−ŨƛƗƕƄŃŹƒƏƗƄƊƈŃŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕ
8VHWKLVFRQQHFWRUZKHQXVLQJDYROWDJHWHOHPHWU\GHYLFHWRVHQGWKHEDWWHU\YROWDJHLQIRUPDWLRQ '&a9 IURPWKHUHFHLYHUWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
Please use the External voltage input cable.
8%% 7KLV FRQQHFWV GLUHFWO\ WR \RXU PDLQ
motor batteries.

DANGER
Don't touch wiring.
* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

ŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƌƑƖƈƕƗƌƒƑŃ)LUPO\LQVHUWWKHFRQQHFWRULQWKHGLUHFWLRQVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH,QVHUWWKH6%86E\WXUQLQJLW
degrees.

Do not short-circuit the battery
terminals.
* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause
DEQRUPDOKHDWLQJ¿UHDQGEXUQVPlease double check your polarity (+ and-) when hooking up your connectors.

WARNING
S.BUS2 connectors

,IDQGRIZLULQJDUHPLVWDNHQLWZLOOGDPDJHLJQLWHDQG
explode.

Don't connect an S.BUS servo/gyro to
S.BUS2 connector.

Donʼ t connect to Extra Voltage before
turning on a receiver power supply.

ŰŲŧŨŃůŨŧŃŰƒƑƌƗƒƕŃ
This monitor is used to check the CH mode of thereceiver.

32 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƄŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƅƄƗƗƈƕƜŃWARNING
Please make sure that you use a battery
that can deliver enough capacity for thenumber and kind of servos used. Drybatteries cannot be used.

%DWWHU\ ‫ ع‬9

6ZLWFKDANGER

5HFHLYHU$EDWWHU\LVFRQQHFWDEOH
DOVRZLWKZKLFKSRUW:KHQDOOSRUWVDUHXVHG

6HUYR<KDUQHVV

Do not insert either a switch
or battery in this manner.

%DWWHU\ ‫ ع‬9

6ZLWFKŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈŃ

&+0RGH‫ڀ‬0RGH$
6ZLWFK

6ZLWFK

56%RU
56%

3:0

56%RU
56%

6%86

+8%

WR6%SRUW+8%

6%86VHUYRV&KDQQHOWARNING%DWWHU\%DWWHU\ &RQYHQWLRQDOVHUYRV&KDQQHOPower supply

Please make sure that you use a battery that can deliver enough capacity forthe number and kind of servos used. Alkaline batteries cannot be used.

33 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƋƄƑƑƈƏŃŰƒƇƈƖ

ůŨŧŃŬƑƇƌƆƄƗƌƒƑ
LED Indication
StatusNo signal reception
Receiving signals
Waiting for link
Unrecoverable error (EEPROM, etc.)

LINK LEDRed Solid
Green Solid
Start → 2second
later → Red Blink（3 second）
Red Green
Alternate blink

7KH 56%56% LV FDSDEOH RI FKDQJLQJ LWV FKDQQHODOORFDWLRQVDVGHVFULEHGLQWKHWDEOHEHORZ7KLVLVHVSHFLDOO\LPSRUWDQW ZKHQ XVLQJ WKH UHFHLYHU LQ D GXDO UHFHLYHU PRGH
See your transmitter operation manual for complete details on
operating in the dual receiver mode.
R7208SB/R7308SB CH Mode table
Outputconnector

In Dual RX Link Mode
Status
MODE LED
External receiver is receiving error or notconnected. S.BUS signal not received
S.BUS signal reception from external receiver(also received by external receiver)

Red Solid
Green Solid

In FASSTest12CH Telemetry OFF Mode
StatusLINK LED
Start

Orange Solid

ChannelMode A
CH 1-8Mode B
CH 1-7

Mode CCH 1-6

Mode DCH 1-3Mode E
CH 9-16

Mode FCH 9-15

Mode GCH 9-14

1

1

1

1

1

9

9

9

2

2

2

2

2

10

10

10

3

3

3

3

3

11

11

11

SB2 / 44

4

4S.BUS21212

12

SB2 / 55

5

5S.BUS213

13

13

SB2 / 66

6

6

S.BUS214

14

14

SB2 / 7

7

7

S.BUS2

S.BUS215

15

S.BUS2SB / 8

8

S.BUS

S.BUS

S.BUS

16

S.BUS

S.BUS

LED
blink

RED 1

RED 2

RED 3

RED 4

RED 5

GREEN 1 GREEN 2

Default

1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]2 Press and hold the SW for 5 seconds to 10 seconds.
3 When the LED of the receiver changes from blinking
red to blinking orange, SW is released.

4 The LED should now blink red two times in thepatterns described in the chart below.
5 Each press of the SW advances the receiver to thenext mode.

6 When you reach the mode that you wish to operatein, press and hold the SW for more than 2 seconds.
When LED blinks in orange, it is the completion of amode change, SW is released.

7 Cycle the receiver power off and back on again after
changing the Channel mode.

LINK LED

1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter isalways OFF]2 Receiver enters link waiting state

Red Solid
Start → 2second
later → Red Blink（3 second）

3 The LED will ﬂash for the current CH Current CH mode
output mode.

34 ‫ڀ‬

displayŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŧƘƄƏŃŵƛŃůƌƑƎŃŶƜƖƗƈƐ

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƆƋƄƑƊƈŃƗƒŃŧƘƄƏŃŵŻŃůƌƑƎŃƐƒƇƈŃŃŃŃŃŃ

%\ LQVWDOOLQJ WZR UHFHLYHUV LQ RQH DLUFUDIW LI RQH UHFHLYHUEHFRPHV XQDEOH WR FRPPXQLFDWH WKH RWKHU UHFHLYHU FDQ EH
operated.

1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]2 Press and hold the SW for 5 seconds or more.

Receiver : A

Receiver : B

Blinking switches every 5 seconds as follows.

Communicate with two receivers

RED ⇒ ORANGE ⇒ GREEN ⇒ ORANGE slow blink
If it is passed,
turn off theReleasethe3
power andswitch hererestartBlinks GREEN once
Even if there is a problem with
the B receiver, communication
will be performed with the A
receiver.

Dual RX Link
mode : OFF

Press SW once
more to return toﬂashing green once

4 Press switch
Even if there is a problem with
the A receiver, communication
will be performed with the B
receiver.

Blinks GREEN twice

Dual RX Link
mode : ON,Q'XDO5;OLQNPRGHWKH6%5;SRUWLVIRUUHFHSWLRQ
RQO\ VR XVH &+ PRGH % & ' ) * PRGH IRU 6%86
output and S.BUS2 input/output.

5 Press and hold the SW

Connection example

Blinks ORANGE
56%)$667HVW5HFHLYHU

6 Release SW
6%86

Solid ORANGE(6&

7 Turn off the receiver power:KHQXVLQJ(6&After restarting, the
MODE LED lights up.
StatusExternal receiver is receiving error or not connected.
S.BUS signal not received
S.BUS signal reception from external receiver(also received by external receiver)

35 ‫ڀ‬

MODE LEDRed Solid
Green SolidŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ũŤŶŶŷƈƖƗŔŕŦūŋŷƈƏƈƐƈƗƕƜŃŲũũ‫ك‬ƐƒƇƈūƒƚŃƗƒŃŧƘƄƏŃŵƛŃůƌƑƎ

This mode is forcibly turning off telemetry transmission
to prevent collision of telemetry signals from the receiverto the transmitter when using dual RX link mode in

1 Install two receivers on the aircraft as shown in theconnection example.

2 Link the two receivers using the dual receiver feature

FASSTest12ch mode.

of the transmitter.
For systems without dual receiver capability, linkeach receiver in turn.

1 Turn on the receiver. [Transmitter is always OFF]2 Press and hold the SW for 5 seconds or more.

Transmitter in link mode
For FASSTest 18CH Select dual mode and link primary*Follow the link procedure
for each receiver manual.

Blinking switches every 5 seconds as follows.

Turn on the main
receiver and link

RED ⇒ ORANGE ⇒ GREEN ⇒ ORANGE slow blink

Transmitter in link mode
For FASSTest 18CH Select dual modeand link secondary

3 Release theswitch here

FASSTest12CH
Blinks ORANGE once
(Telemetry OFF）
mode : INH

Turn on the sub
receiver and link
◆ About telemetry system

Press SW once more
to return to ﬂashingorange once

When using the dual receiver function

4 Press switch

・The telemetry function of the main receiver can be used
・Sub-receiver telemetry function is not availableŷƈƏƈƐƈƗƕƜŃƉƒƕŃũŤŶŶŷƈƖƗŔŕŦū

Blinks ORANGE twice

FASSTest12CH(Telemetry OFF）
mode : ACTIn FASSTest12CH mode, after linking R7208SB/R7308SB intelemetry OFF mode, link the receiver you want telemetry. (Thetransmitter will show the telemetry of the last linked transmitter.)＃1
First Link

Telemetry OFF
mode

5 Press and hold the SW＃2＃2

Blinks ORANGE＃1First Link

Change to thismode when using
FASSTest12CH in
dual RX link mode.

Display

Second Link＃2

6 Release SW

Telemetry

Telemetry OFF
mode
e.g.

Second Link

FASSTest receiver＃2

Display
Telemetry＃2 Telemetry display of second-linked receiver.
＃1 Telemetry OFF ﬁrst-Linked receiver.

Solid ORANGE

7 Turn off the receiver power
After restarting, the
LINK LED lights up.
In FASSTest12CH Telemetry OFF Mode
StatusLINK LED
Start

Orange Solid

36 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŵƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŊƖŃŤƑƗƈƑƑƄŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ
7KH 56% 56% KDV WZR DQWHQQDV ,Q RUGHU WR PD[LPL]H VLJQDO UHFHSWLRQ DQG SURPRWH VDIHPRGHOLQJ)XWDEDKDVDGRSWHGDGLYHUVLW\DQWHQQDV\VWHP7KLVDOORZVWKHUHFHLYHUWRREWDLQ5)VLJQDOVRQ
ERWKDQWHQQDVDQGÀ\SUREOHPIUHH
0XVWEHNHSWDVVWUDLJKWDVSRVVLEOH
$QWHQQD&RD[LDOFDEOH

7RREWDLQWKHEHVWUHVXOWVRIWKHGLYHUVLW\IXQFWLRQSOHDVHUHIHUWRWKHIROORZLQJLQVWUXFWLRQV
1. The two antennas must be kept as straight as
possible. Otherwise it will reduce the effective
range.
Do not bend the antenna part

Gently bend the coaxial
cable part.

Antennainstallation

90°&RD[LDOFDEOH

6OHHYH$QWHQQDSDUW([DPSOH56%5HFHLYHU

2. The two antennas should be placed at 90
degrees to each other.
This is not a critical figure, but the mostimportant thing is to keep the antennas
away from each other as much as possible.
Larger models can have large metal objects
that can attenuate the RF signal. In this casethe antennas should be placed at bothsides of the model. Then the best RF signal
FRQGLWLRQLVREWDLQHGDWDQ\Á\LQJDWWLWXGH
3. The antennas must be kept away fromconductive materials, such as metal, carbon
and fuel tank by at least a half inch. The
coaxial part of the antennas does not need
to follow these guidelines, but do not bend it
in a tight radius.
4. Keep the antennas away from the motor,
ESC, and other noise sources as much as
possible.

37 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃŶƈƕƙƒ
*Servo is not included in this set.

Wood screw

2.3-2.6mm nut
washerRubbergrommetBrass eyelet

RubbergrommetBrass eyeletŶƄƉƈƗƜŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖŃƚƋƈƑŃƜƒƘŃ
ƌƑƖƗƄƏƏŃƕƈƆƈƌƙƈƕŃƄƑƇŃƖƈƕƙƒƖőWARNING
Connecting connectors

Be sure to insert the connector until it
stops at the deepest point.

Servo mount
Servo mount2.3-2.6mm screw(Airplane/Glider)(Helicopter)ŶƈƕƙƒŃƏƈƄƇŃƚƌƕƈƖŃ
To prevent the servo lead cable from being
EURNHQ E\ YLEUDWLRQ GXULQJ IOLJKW SURYLGH D
little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable
points. Periodically check the cable during daily
maintenance.

How to protect the receiver from vibration andwater

Wrap the receiver with something
soft such as foam rubber to avoid
vibration. If there is a chance ofgetting wet, put the receiver in awaterproof bag or balloon.
Receiver's antenna

Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do
not bind the receiver's antenna withthe cables for servos.
Locate the receiver's antenna as far as
possible from metals or carbon fiber
components such as frames, cables,
etc.
Margin in the lead wire.

&XWWLQJRUELQGLQJWKHUHFHLYHU VDQWHQQDZLOOUHGXFHWKH
UDGLRUHFHSWLRQVHQVLWLYLW\DQGUDQJHDQGPD\FDXVHDcrash.

Fasten about 5-10cm
from the servo outlet sothat the lead wire is neatand secure.

Servo throw

Adjust your system so that pushrods
will not bind or sag when operating
the servos to the full extent.

ŰƒƘƑƗƌƑƊŃƗƋƈŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃ
 6ZLWFKLVQRWLQFOXGHGLQWKLVVHW

:KHQPRXQWLQJDSRZHUVZLWFKWRDQDLUIUDPH
make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than
WKHWRWDOVWURNHRIWKHVZLWFKVRWKDW\RXFDQWXUQWKHVZLWFK212))ZLWKRXWELQGLQJ$YRLG PRXQWLQJ WKH VZLWFK ZKHUH LW FDQ EH
FRYHUHGE\HQJLQHRLODQGGXVW,QJHQHUDOLWLV
UHFRPPHQGHGWRPRXQWWKHSRZHUVZLWFKRQWKH
VLGHRIWKHIXVHODJHWKDWLVRSSRVLWHWKHPX൷HU

Attached screw,IH[FHVVLYHIRUFHLVFRQWLQXRXVO\DSSOLHGWRDVHUYRWKH
servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train
DQGRUSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQFDXVLQJUDSLGEDWWHU\GUDLQMounting servos

Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as
rubber grommet) under a servo when
mounting the servo on a servo mount.
And be sure that the servo cases do
not touch directly to the metal parts
such as servo mount.
,IWKHVHUYRFDVHFRQWDFWVWKHDLUIUDPHGLUHFWO\YLEUDWLRQZLOOWUDYHOWRDQGSRVVLEO\GDPDJHWKHVHUYR

Less than 5 mm of
mounting plate

Switch cover

Switch38 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃŬƑƖƗƄƏƏƄƗƌƒƑ
7KLVVHWXVHVWKH6%866%86V\VWHP7KHZLULQJLVDVVLPSOLILHGDQGFOHDQPRXQWLQJDVSRVVLEOH
HYHQZLWKPRGHOVWKDWXVHDODUJHQXPEHURIVHUYRV,QDGGLWLRQWKHZLQJVFDQEHTXLFNO\LQVWDOOHGWRWKHIXVHODJHZLWKRXWDQ\HUURQHRXVZLULQJE\WKHXVHRIRQO\RQHVLPSOHZLUHHYHQZKHQWKHUHDUHDODUJH
number of servos used.
Ɣ:KHQXVLQJ6%866%86VSHFLDOVHWWLQJVDQGPL[HVLQ\RXUWUDQVPLWWHUPD\EHXQQHFHVVDU\Ɣ7KH 6%866%86 VHUYRV PHPRUL]H WKH QXPEHU RI FKDQQHOV WKHPVHOYHV VHWWDEOH ZLWK WKH7,=
683(5Ɣ7KH6%866%86V\VWHPDQGFRQYHQWLRQDOV\VWHP UHFHLYHUFRQYHQWLRQDO&+XVHG FDQEHPL[HG
S.BUS

Glider usage example
Receiver: R7208SB
Servo: S3174SV×9 ( Optional )HUB×4 ( Optional )Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example

Switch: HSW-L
Receiver: R7208SB
Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )HUB×3 ( Optional )Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )39 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶőťŸŶŕŃŶƜƖƗƈƐ
:KHQXVLQJWKH6%86SRUWDQLPSUHVVLYHDUUD\RIWHOHPHWU\VHQVRUVPD\EHXWLOL]HG

S.BUS2 TABLE
Receiver port

S.BUS Servo
S.BUS Gyro

S.BUS2 Servo
S.BUS2 Gyro

Telemetry sensor

S.BUS

○

○

×

S.BUS2

× （※）

○

○

（※）Don't connect S.BUS Servo, S.BUS
Gyro to S.BUS2 connector.

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the correct receiverports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure you connect to the correct one.

&+0RGHLVVHW
WR0RGH%&')*
7KHSRUWVWKDWFDQEHXVHG
DUHGLIIHUHQWIRUHDFKPRGH
6%863RUW
6%6%6%
6%6%
6%86
3RUW

+XE

+XE

6%866HUYR
0L[HGFRQQHFWLRQ
RI6%86DQG6%86
LVSRVVLEOH

6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH

+XE

+XE

7HOHPHWU\
6HQVRUV

6%866HUYR
6%86VHUYR&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

6%86J\UR&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH

6%86
*<52

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

ٔ

6HUYR

40 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶőťŸŶŒŶőťŸŶŕŃƇƈƙƌƆƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T16IZ SUPER. Channel
setting and other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors.
1. Connect the S.BUS device as shown in theÀJXUH
2. Turn on the transmitter power.
3. Call the setup screen.
Servo: System Menu ĺ S.BUS servo
Sensor: Linkage Menu ĺ Sensor
4. Perform setting in accordance with eachscreen.
5. This sets the channel and other data for each
S.BUS servo, or telemetry device to be usedwith the S.BUS device or receiver.

6%866%86
GHYLFH

6%866%86
GHYLFH

6%866%86VHUYR

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRUWARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter power OFF
while S.BUS servo and telemetry sensor data is
being saved.
■ S.BUS servo and sensor save data will be lost,
resulting in malfunction.

41 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ūƒƐƈŃŶƆƕƈƈƑ
7KLVLVWKH+RPHVFUHHQDQGGHVFULSWLRQVRILWVPHQXV8VH\RXU¿QJHUWRRSHUDWHWKHWRXFKVFUHHQ

Battery voltage for receivers

Condition nameBattery Indicator• In FASSTest/T-FHSS mode, thisdata displayed. RX voltage
and Ext voltage display• The condition namethat is currently used
is displayed here.

• When battery is low, the alarm
will beep. Land your aircraft
immediately.

→ (Menu)• Model menu
Tap the Icon to call Model
Menu screen.

System mode
• System(FASSTest18CH etc.)
Type is displayed here.

RF Indicator

The reception of the signal from thereceiver to the transmitter is shown.

Model Name

7KLVGRHVQRWDIIHFWÁLJKWTimer1, Timer2

User's name• Timer is displayed here.
Tap the time button to start/stop thetimer. (When the screen is tapped for
1 second, timer is reset to the initialvalue.)• The model name thatis currently used isdisplayed here.

→ (Menu)• System• Linkage• Model selectTap the button to call each Menu
screen.

System timer

Digital trim (T1 to T4)• This shows the accumulated timesince the latest reset. (Each model /Total)(Hour):(Minute):(Second)• Trim position is displayed
here.

WARNINGBe sure to conﬁrm the model name before ﬂying your aircraft.
Check the battery voltage as often as possible and try to charge the battery earlier.
If the battery alarm makes a sound, land your aircraft immediately.
<RXFDQDGMXVWWKH/&'FRQWUDVWE\WKHGLVSOD\VHWWLQJLQWKHV\VWHPPHQX

42 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

LINK
ŃůƌƑƎŃųƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈŃŋŷŔřŬŽŃŶŸųŨŵŒŵŚŕœśŶťŃƒƕŃŵŚŖœśŶťŌ
(DFKWUDQVPLWWHUKDVDQLQGLYLGXDOO\DVVLJQHGXQLTXH,'FRGH,QRUGHUWRVWDUWRSHUDWLRQWKHUHFHLYHUPXVWEHOLQNHGZLWKWKH,'FRGHRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUWRZKLFKLWLVEHLQJSDLUHG2QFHWKHOLQNLVPDGHWKH,'FRGH
LVVWRUHGLQWKHUHFHLYHUDQGQRIXUWKHUOLQNLQJLVQHFHVVDU\XQOHVVWKHUHFHLYHULVWREHXVHGZLWKDQRWKHUWUDQVPLWWHU:KHQ\RXSXUFKDVHDGGLWLRQDO56%RU56%UHFHLYHUVWKLVSURFHGXUHLVQHFHVVDU\
RWKHUZLVHWKHUHFHLYHUZLOOQRWZRUN
ůƌƑƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close
to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

6.[Link] is tapped. The transmitter will emit achime as it starts the linking process.

Less than 0.5 m

2. Turn on the transmitter.
3. Select [System type] at the Linkage menu
and access the setup screen shown below
by tapping the screen.

7. When the transmitter starts to chime, poweron the receiver. The receiver should link to
the transmitter within about 1 second.

4. When you use two receivers on one model,
you must change from [Single] to [Dual].
*Only two receivers can be used. In"Dual", two setting items come out. Input,
respectively.
ID of a primary
receiver displays.

ID of a secondary
receiver displays.

In "Link" ModeIn Dual, a primary receiver (Rx1) islinked first. Next, a secondary (Rx2)
receiver is linked.
5. Battery fail-safe voltage can be changed
from the initial value of 3.8V here.
* Only in FASSTest/T-FHSS Mode.

Receiver ON

8. If linking fails, an error message is displayed.
Bring the transmitter closer to the receiverand repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

43 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

LINK

9. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used.
It is INH when not using it.

:KHQ\RXXVHWZRUHFHLYHUVSOHDVHEHVXUHWR
setup a "Rx1" and "Rx2" in the "dual" mode.
*Telemetry function cannot be used for the 2ndreceiver. → )$667HVW&+*Telemetry function cannot be used for the dual
receiver. → 7)+66)$667HVW&+<RXPXVWOLQNRQHUHFHLYHUDWDWLPH,IERWKSRZHUVXSSOLHVWRWKHUHFHLYHUVDUHVZLWFKHGRQVLPXOWDQHRXVO\GDWDLVUHFHLYHGLQFRUUHFWO\E\
the transmitter.
<RXFDQQRWOLQNWKUHHUHFHLYHUV

10. When a telemetry function is enabled,
the receiving interval (down-link interval)of sensor data can be changed. If a D/
L interval is increased, the response of thesensor data display becomes slower, butstick response will improve.
Initial value: 1.0s
Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s/LQN LV UHTXLUHG ZKHQ D V\VWHP W\SH LV
changed.
/LQNLQJLVUHTXLUHGZKHQHYHUDQHZPRGHOLV
made.
)$667 08/7,)$667 &+ FDQQRW EH
selected for Europe.

WARNING
After the linking is done, please cycle
receiver power and check that thereceiver to be linked is really under thecontrol of the transmitter.
Do not perform the linking procedure
with motor's main wire connected orwith the engine operating as it may
result in serious injury.
,IWKHUHDUHPDQ\)$667HVW 7)+66 V\VWHPVWXUQHG RQ DURXQG \RXU UHFHLYHU LW PLJKW QRWOLQNWR\RXUWUDQVPLWWHU,QWKLVFDVHHYHQLIWKH
UHFHLYHU V/('VWD\VVROLGJUHHQXQIRUWXQDWHO\
the receiver might have established a link
to one of other transmitters. This is very
dangerous if you do not notice this situation.
,Q RUGHU WR DYRLG WKH SUREOHP ZH VWURQJO\UHFRPPHQG \RX WR GRXEOH FKHFN ZKHWKHU
your receiver is really under control by yourtransmitter by giving the stick input and thenchecking the servo response.

ŤƉƗƈƕŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

'R QRW SHUIRUP WKH OLQNLQJ RSHUDWLRQ ZKHQthe drive motor is connected or the engine isrunning.

After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button

44 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰƒƇƈƏŃŬŧŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃũŤŶŶŷƈƖƗŏŃŷŐũūŶŶ

For the sake of safety, this function does not operate the receiver if the model data of the model program
settings that does not match the aircraft is used by mistake.
Model ID

Conventional system
Operation

Rx 1

Not Operation

Rx 1

Operation

Rx 2

Operation

Rx 2

Operation

Rx 3

Not Operation

Rx 3

Select Model 2

Select Model 2

It works with diﬀerent model data.
There is a risk of ﬂying with diﬀerent model data !

Model 2 only works with Model 2 data.
There is no risk of ﬂying with diﬀerent model data.

ŃůƌƑƎŃƌƖŃƕƈƔƘƌƕƈƇŃƚƋƈƑŃƄŃƑƈƚŃƐƒƇƈƏŃƌƖŃƐƄƇƈŃƉƕƒƐŃƄŃƐƒƇƈƏŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑőŃ
Add new model data
Model 1 Receiver

1:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 31:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 31:Model 12:

Model 23:

Model 3

Link

Model 2 Receiver

Link

Model 3 Receiver

Link

Select a model in Model Select. Link with a receiver that matches the model.

Ŷ,QWKHV\VWHPW\SHV )$667HVW7)+66 FRPSDWLEOHZLWK WKH PRGHO ,' IXQFWLRQ D XQLTXH ,' QXPEHUPRGHO,' LVVHWWRHDFKPRGHOGDWD/LQNLQJZLWKD UHFHLYHU VWRUHV WKH PRGHO ,' RI WKH PRGHO GDWD
LQ WKDW UHFHLYHU7KH UHFHLYHU RSHUDWHV RQO\ ZKHQ
it receives radio waves transmitted using model
GDWDWKDWPDWFKHVWKHVWRUHGPRGHO,'$VDUHVXOWthe receiver does not operate even if model data ofan unintended setting is used by mistake, so it ispossible to prevent a malfunction due to a model
selection mistake.
Ŷ ,I \RX ZDQW WR XVH GLIIHUHQW PRGHO GDWD IURP WKHmodel data that you have been using, link again.

Ŷ )RU VDIHW\ UHDVRQV PRGHO ,' IXQFWLRQ FDQ QRW EH
disabled.
Ŷ0RGHOGDWDWKDWFDQEHVWRUHGLQLQWHUQDOPHPRU\LV
up to 30 models.
Ŷ 0RGHO ,' LV DXWRPDWLFDOO\ VHW ZKHQ FRS\LQJ RU
adding model data.
Ŷ 56% UHFHLYHU GRHV QRW VXSSRUW PRGHO ,'
IXQFWLRQ:KHQXVLQJWKH56%VHW³5HFHLYHU´
LQWKHV\VWHPW\SHVFUHHQ7)+66PRGHVHWWLQJWR
>56%@:KHQXVLQJRWKHU7)+66FRPSDWLEOH
UHFHLYHUVVHW5HFHLYHUWR>1RUPDO@Ŷ0RGHO,'IHDWXUHLVHQDEOHGRQO\LIWKHV\VWHPW\SH
LV)$667HVWRU7)+663OHDVHQRWHWKDWPRGHO,'function can not be used on other systems.

45 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŵƄƑƊƈŃŷƈƖƗƌƑƊŃżƒƘƕŃŵŒŦŃŶƜƖƗƈƐŃ
It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to ensure
WKDWHYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQMR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJ7KH7,=
683(5WUDQVPLWWHULQFRUSRUDWHVDV\VWHPWKDWUHGXFHVLWVSRZHURXWSXWDQGDOORZV\RXWRSHUIRUPVXFKDUDQJH
check.
ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƐƒƇƈŃ
1. While pushing "U.MENU/MON." button.

2. THR Stick Slow.

3. T16IZ SUPER Power ON.

'XULQJWKLVPRGHWKH5)SRZHURXWSXWLVUHGXFHGVRWKH
UDQJHWHVWFDQEHSHUIRUPHG,QDGGLWLRQZKHQWKLVPRGH
LVDFWLYDWHGWKHULJKW/('RQWKHIURQWRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVWDUWVEOLQNLQJDQGWKHWUDQVPLWWHUJLYHVXVHUVDZDUQLQJZLWKDEHHSLQJVRXQG
7KH5DQJHFKHFNPRGHFRQWLQXHVIRUVHFRQGVDQG
DIWHUWKDWWKHSRZHUZLOOUHWXUQWRWKHQRUPDOOHYHO7R
H[LW WKH 5DQJH FKHFN PRGH EHIRUH WKH  VHFRQGVSUHVV WKH +20((;,7 EXWWRQ 1(9(5 VWDUW IO\LQJ
ZKHQWKH5DQJHFKHFNPRGHLVDFWLYH
6KRXOG\RXUHTXLUHDGGLWLRQDOWLPHWRSHUIRUPDUDQJH
FKHFNKLJKOLJKW5HVWDUWEHIRUH\RXUWLPHH[SLUHVDQGWDS
the screen one time.

ŵƄƑƊƈŃƆƋƈƆƎŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ

4. Select "Range check" at the System menu.

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk away fromthe model while simultaneously operating thecontrols. Have an assistant stand by the model
to confirm that all controls are completely andcorrectly operational. You should be able towalk approximately 30-50 paces from the model
without losing control.
2. If everything operates correctly, return to themodel. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible,
location so it will be within reach after starting theengine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in
the low throttle position, then start the engine or
motor. Perform another range check with yourassistant holding the aircraft with the engine
running at various speeds. If the servos jitter ormove inadvertently, there may be a problem.
:HZRXOGVWURQJO\VXJJHVW\RXGRQRWÁ\XQWLOWKH
VRXUFHRIWKHGLIÀFXOW\KDVEHHQGHWHUPLQHG/RRN
for loose servo connections or binding pushrods.
Also, be certain that the battery has been fully
charged.

Range checking on
low power.

About 100 feet
5. "Start" tap.

Range check mode

WARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check mode.
6. The HOME/EXIT button is pressed
to end a range check.

6LQFHWKHUDQJHRIWKHUDGLRZDYHVLVVKRUWLIWKHPRGHOLVWRRIDUIURPWKHWUDQVPLWWHUFRQWUROZLOOEHORVWDQG
WKHPRGHOZLOOFUDVK

46 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰŲŧŨůŃťŤŶŬŦŃŶŨŷŷŬűŪŃųŵŲŦŨŧŸŵŨ
ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ

ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ
Initial setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ SUPERWUDQVPLWWHU7KH0RGHO6HOHFWIXQFWLRQLVXVHGWR
DGGPRGHOVDQGWRVHOHFWPRGHOVZKLFKDUHDOUHDG\set.
ŏ,IWKHGLUHFWLRQRIWKHVHUYRLVLQFRUUHFWDGMXVW
the direction with the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu.

7KH GDWD IRU XS WR  PRGHOV FDQ EH VDYHG
to the transmitter. Data can also be saved to theoptional microSD card.
The currently selected model name is displayed at the
WRSRIWKHVFUHHQ%HIRUHÀ\LQJDQGEHIRUHFKDQJLQJDQ\
VHWWLQJVDOZD\VFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPH

ŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃŃ
6HOHFWWKHPRGHOW\SHPDWFKHGWRWKHDLUFUDIWZLWKWKH
0RGHOW\SHVHOHFWIXQFWLRQRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQX)RUDQDLUSODQHVHOHFWWKHPRGHOW\SHIURPDPRQJWKHW\SHVDLUSODQHDQGJOLGHU$IWHUWKHZLQJW\SHLVVHOHFWHGWKH
tail type select screen is displayed. Select the tail typematched to the aircraft.
7KHUHDUHZLQJW\SHVDQGWDLOW\SHVIRUDLUSODQH
and glider.

ŖőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
&RQQHFWWKHDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVWKURWWOHUXGGHUHWF
LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHPRGHO VLQVWUXFWLRQPDQXDO)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHFRQQHFWLRQPHWKRGVHHWKH
"Servos connection by model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ SUPERis different from that of our existing systems. Notethat even for the same "airplane model", when thewing type and tail type are different, the channel
assignment may be different. (The channel assigned
to each function can be checked at the "Function"of the Linkage menu.)

ŏ$GMXVWWKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQDQGFRQWUROVXUIDFH
angle with the linkage, and fine tune themwith the Sub trim and End point functions(angle adjustment). To protect the linkage,a limit position can also be set with the End
point function. The End point function canadjust the amount of up/down and left/rightmovement, limit, and servo speed of eachchannel.

ŗőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
7KURWWOH FXW FDQ EH SHUIRUPHG ZLWK RQH WRXFK E\ D
VZLWFKZLWKRXWFKDQJLQJWKHWKURWWOHWULPSRVLWLRQ
6HWWKURWWOHFXWZLWKWKH7KURWWOHFXWIXQFWLRQRIWKH
/LQNDJHPHQX$IWHUDFWLYDWLQJWKHWKURWWOHFXWIXQFWLRQ
DQGVHOHFWLQJWKHVZLWFKDGMXVWWKHWKURWWOHSRVLWLRQVR
WKDWWKHFDUEXUHWRUEHFRPHVIXOO\FORVHG)RUVDIHW\WKH
WKURWWOHFXWIXQFWLRQRSHUDWHVWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLQWKH
RUOHVV VORZVLGH SRVLWLRQ

47 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŚőŃŤƌƕƅƕƄƎƈ
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGZKHQDQDLUEUDNHLVQHFHVVDU\ZKHQWDNLQJR൵RUGLYLQJHWF
7KHSUHVHWHOHYDWRUVDQGÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS 
R൵VHWDPRXQWFDQEHDFWLYDWHGE\DVZLWFKŘőŃŬƇƏƈŃƇƒƚƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
7KHLGOLQJVSHHGFDQEHORZHUHGZLWKRQHWRXFKE\
D VZLWFK ZLWKRXW FKDQJLQJ WKH WKURWWOH WULP SRVLWLRQ
3HUIRUPWKLVVHWWLQJZLWKWKH,GOHGRZQIXQFWLRQRIWKH
/LQNDJHPHQX$IWHUDFWLYDWLQJWKH,GOHGRZQIXQFWLRQ
DQGVHOHFWLQJWKHVZLWFKDGMXVWWKHLGOHGRZQVSHHG)RUVDIHW\WKHLGOHGRZQIXQFWLRQDFWVRQO\ZKHQWKHWKURWWOH
VWLFNLVVORZVLGH

7KH RIIVHW DPRXQW RI WKH DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU DQG IODSVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHGDVQHHGHG$OVRWKHVSHHGRIWKH
DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU DQG IODS VHUYRV FDQ EH DGMXVWHG ,Q
VLGH2XW VLGH $ GHOD\ FDQ EH VHW IRU HDFK FRQGLWLRQ
DQGDFXWVZLWFKZKLFKZLOOWXUQ2))WKHGHOD\FDQEH
FKRVHQ7ULPDPRXQWVFDQEH¿QHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95
<RXFDQDOVRVHWWKHDXWRPRGHZKLFKZLOOOLQN$LUEUDNH
WRDVWLFNVZLWFKRUGLDO$VHSDUDWHVWLFNVZLWFKRUGLDO
FDQDOVREHVHWDVWKH212))VZLWFK:KLOHWKH7KURWWOHFXWIXQFWLRQLVLQRSHUDWLRQWKH,GOHGRZQIXQFWLRQGRHVQRWZRUN

śőŃŤƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
The Condition select function automatically allocates
the Condition 1 for each model. Condition 1 is the
GHIDXOWFRQGLWLRQDQGLVWKHRQO\RQHDFWLYHZKHQDQHZPRGHOW\SHLVGH¿QHG

řőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
$)5IXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHWKURZDQGRSHUDWLRQFXUYHRIWKHVWLFNOHYHUDQGVZLWFKIXQFWLRQVIRUHDFKflight condition. This is normally used after End point
KDVGH¿QHGWKHPD[LPXPWKURZGLUHFWLRQV,I\RXZDQWWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVSOHDVHUHIHUWRD
description of the Condition select function.

7KH&RQGLWLRQLVDOZD\VRQDQGUHPDLQVRQXQWLORWKHUFRQGLWLRQVDUHDFWLYDWHGE\VZLWFKHV:KHQ D QHZ FRQGLWLRQ LV DGGHG WKH PRGHO GDWD RI WKH&RQGLWLRQLVDXWRPDWLFDOO\FRSLHGWRWKHQHZFRQGLWLRQ<RXFDQVHWWKHPRGHOGDWDRIQHZFRQGLWLRQLQWKHVZLWFK
21VWDWH+RZHYHULIWKHJURXSPRGH *U ZDVVHOHFWHGLQDGYDQFHWKHVDPHGDWDZLOOEHLQSXWDWDOOWKHFRQGLWLRQV
6HOHFWWKHVLQJOHPRGH 6QJO DQGDGMXVWRQO\WKHFRQGLWLRQ\RXZDQWWRFKDQJH)RU*URXS6LQJOHPRGHVZLWFKLQJUHIHU
to the description at the back of this manual.
*The Condition delay can be programmed for each channel.
7KH &RQGLWLRQ GHOD\ LV XVHG WR FKDQJH WKH VHUYR WKURZVPRRWKO\ZKHQVZLWFKLQJFRQGLWLRQV

48 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃƅƄƖƌƆŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
7KLVVHFWLRQRXWOLQHVH[DPSOHVRIXVHRIWKHKHOLFRSWHUIXQFWLRQVRIWKH7,=683(5$GMXVWWKHDFWXDOYDOXHVHWFWRPDWFKWKHIXVHODJHXVHG
ŔőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃƆƄƏƏ
Default setting assigns 1 model to the T16IZ SUPER.
7RDGGQHZPRGHOVRUWRFDOODPRGHODOUHDG\VHWXVHWKH
0RGHOVHOHFWIXQFWLRQ

7KLV LV FRQYHQLHQW ZKHQ FDOOLQJ D PRGHO DIWHUUHJLVWHULQJWKHPRGHOQDPHVLQDGYDQFH 7KHGDWDRIXSWRPRGHOVFDQEHVDYHGDWWKHWUDQVPLWWHU'DWDFDQ
DOVREHVDYHGWRWKHRSWLRQDOPLFUR6'FDUG
The currently called model is displayed at the topof the screen. Before flying and before changing any
VHWWLQJVDOZD\VFRQ¿UPWKHPRGHOQDPHŕőŃŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƄƑƇŃƖƚƄƖƋŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
,I D GLIIHUHQW PRGHO W\SH LV DOUHDG\ VHOHFWHG VHOHFWKHOLFRSWHUZLWKWKH0RGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQRIWKH/LQNDJH
PHQX DQG WKHQ VHOHFW WKH VZDVK W\SH PDWFKHG WR WKHhelicopter.

ŖőŃũƏƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑ
The transmitter can install up to eight flight
conditions per model.

The Condition select function automatically
DOORFDWHV¿YHFRQGLWLRQVIRUKHOLFRSWHU






(General setting)ŏ1RUPDOŏ,GOHXSŏ,GOHXSŏ,GOHXSŏ+ROG
Note: Delete conditions you have not set
up and will not use. Otherwise you may
DFFLGHQWDOO\DFWLYDWHWKHPGXULQJÁLJKWDQG
cause a crash.
)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FRQGLWLRQ GHOHWLRQ UHIHU WR WKH
Condition select function.

7KH1RUPDOFRQGLWLRQLVDOZD\VRQDQGUHPDLQVRQXQWLORWKHUFRQGLWLRQVDUHDFWLYDWHGE\VZLWFKHVThe priority is throttle hold/idle up 2/idle up 1/
normal. Throttle hold has the highest priority.
$GGRWKHUFRQGLWLRQVDVUHTXLUHG
The Condition delay can be programmed for eachchannel. The Condition delay is used to change the
VHUYRWKURZVPRRWKO\ZKHQVZLWFKLQJFRQGLWLRQV*HQHUDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVHWWLQJH[DPSOH
ŏ1RUPDO 8VHLQLWLDOVHWWLQJFRQGLWLRQVRSHUDWH
when switch OFF)Use from engine starting to hovering.

ŏ,GOHXS 2SHUDWHDW6:(FHQWHU

Use in 540º stall turn, loop, rolling stall turn, and othermaneuvers.

ŏ,GOHXS 2SHUDWHDW6:(IRUZDUGVLGH
Use in rolls.

7KH 0RGHO W\SH IXQFWLRQ DXWRPDWLFDOO\ VHOHFWV WKHDSSURSULDWHRXWSXWFKDQQHOVFRQWUROIXQFWLRQVDQGPL[LQJ
IXQFWLRQVIRUWKHFKRVHQPRGHOW\SH(LJKWVZDVKW\SHVDUH
available for helicopters.
)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVZDVKW\SHVHOHFWLRQUHIHUWRWKH
0RGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQŏ7KURWWOHKROG 2SHUDWHDW6:*IRUZDUGVLGH
Use in auto rotation.

49 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŗőŃũƘƖƈƏƄƊƈŃƏƌƑƎƄƊƈ
&RQQHFW WKH WKURWWOH UXGGHU DLOHURQ HOHYDWRUSLWFK DQG RWKHU VHUYRV LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH
kit instruction manual. For a description of the
FRQQHFWLRQ PHWKRG VHH 6HUYRV FRQQHFWLRQ E\model type".
Note: The channel assignment of the T16IZ
SUPER is different from that of our existing
systems. (The channel assigned to eachfunction can be checked at the Function
menu of the Linkage menu.)

ŏ6ZDVKSODWHFRUUHFWLRQ ([FHSW+PRGH,I DQ\ LQWHUDFWLRQV DUH QRWLFHG IRU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKHOLQNDJH FRUUHFWLRQ IXQFWLRQ SOHDVH UHIHU WR WKH 6:$6+
function.

ŘőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŒųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
7KLVIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHWKURWWOHRUSLWFKRSHUDWLRQ
curve in relation to the movement of the throttle
stick for each condition.

ŏ ,I WKH GLUHFWLRQ RI RSHUDWLRQ RI WKH VHUYR LV
incorrect, use the Reverse function of the
Linkage menu. Also use the swash AFR
function in other than the H-1 mode.
<Throttle curve setting example>&DOOWKHWKURWWOHFXUYHRIHDFKFRQGLWLRQZLWKWKH
FRQGLWLRQVHOHFWVZLWFK
ŏ1RUPDOFXUYHDGMXVWPHQW

Normal curve creates a basic throttle curve
centered near hovering. This curve is adjusted
together with the pitch curve (Normal) so that theengine speed is constant and up/down control iseasiest.

ŏ,GOHXSFXUYHDGMXVWPHQW

The low side Throttle curve creates a curve
matched for aerobatics (loop, roll, 3D, etc.).

ŏ7KURWWOHKROGFXUYHDGMXVWPHQW
ŏ$GMXVWWKHGLUHFWLRQRIRSHUDWLRQRIWKHJ\UR(Gyro side function)
ŏ &RQQHFW WKH WKURWWOH OLQNDJH VR WKDW WKHcarburetor can fully close at full trim throttlecut.
ŏ $GMXVW WKH QHXWUDO SRVLWLRQ DW WKH OLQNDJH
VLGHDQGÀQHWXQHZLWKWKH6XE7ULPIXQFWLRQ
and End point function (rudder angle
adjustment). To protect the linkage, a limit
position can also be set with the End point
function.

The curve is not used when performing auto rotation
dives.
&RQÀUPWKDWWKHUDWHRIWKHVORZHVWSRVLWLRQ  RIWKHVWLFNLV LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ <Example of pitch curve setting>&DOO WKH SLWFK FXUYH RI HDFK FRQGLWLRQ ZLWK WKHFRQGLWLRQVHOHFWVZLWFK
ŏ3LWFKFXUYH 1RUPDO

Make the pitch at hovering approximately +5º~6º.
Set the pitch at hovering with the stick position at
WKHSRLQWDVWKHVWDQGDUG
*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve.
$GMXVWPHQWLVHDV\E\XVLQJWKHKRYHULQJWKURWWOHIXQFWLRQ
and hovering pitch function together.

ŏ3LWFKFXUYH ,GOHXS

The idle up 1 pitch curve function creates a curve
PDWFKHGWRDLUERUQHÁLJKW
Set to -7º~+12º as standard.

50 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

śőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƋƒƏƇŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

ŏ3LWFKFXUYH ,GOHXSThe high side pitch setting is less than idle up 1.
The standard is +8º.

,IWKURWWOHKROGLVQHFHVVDU\SOHDVHUHIHUWRWKH7KURWWOHKROG
function.

ŏ3LWFKFXUYH +ROG

At auto rotation, use the maximum pitch at boththe high and low sides.
[Pitch angle setting example]
Throttle hold: -7º~+12ºřőŃŤũŵŃŋŧŒŵŌ
$)5 '5 IXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHWKURZDQG
RSHUDWLRQFXUYHRIDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGUXGGHUIRUHDFK
condition.

ŜőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
7KURWWOH FXW SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\ WR VWRS WKHHQJLQHE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDW
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
DYRLGDFFLGHQWDOGHDGVWLFNV7KHVZLWFK¶VORFDWLRQDQGGLUHFWLRQPXVWEHFKRVHQDVLWGHIDXOWVWR,1+

)RU WKURWWOH DQG SLWFK FXUYH VHWWLQJV UHIHU WR WKH DERYH
mentioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QGSRLQWKDVGH¿QHGWKH
PD[LPXPWKURZGLUHFWLRQV:LWK WKURWWOH VWLFN DW LGOH DGMXVW WKH FXW SRVLWLRQ XQWLO WKHHQJLQHFRQVLVWHQWO\VKXWVR൵EXWWKURWWOHOLQNDJHLVQRWELQGLQJ

ŔœőŃŶƚƄƖƋŃŰƌƛŃƆƒƕƕƈƆƗƖŃƄƌƏƈƕƒƑŏŃ
ƈƏƈƙƄƗƒƕŃƄƑƇŃƓƌƗƆƋŃƌƑƗƈƕƄƆƗƌƒƑ
7KHVZDVKPL[LQJIXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRFRUUHFWWKHVZDVK SODWH LQ WKH DLOHURQ /HIW5LJKW &\FOLF 
DQG HOHYDWRU )RUZDUG$IW &\FOLF  GLUHFWLRQ
corresponding to each operation of each condition.

ŚőŃŪƜƕƒŃƖƈƑƖƌƗƌƙƌƗƜŃƄƑƇŃƐƒƇƈŃƖƚƌƗƆƋƌƑƊ
7KHJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\DQGPRGHVZLWFKLQJIXQFWLRQ
LVGHGLFDWHGJ\URPL[LQJRIWKH0RGHOPHQXDQG
can be set for each condition.

ŔŔőŃŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƐƌƛƌƑƊŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
*If throttle mixing is necessary to compensate for engine
VORZLQJFDXVHGZKHQWKHVZDVKSODWHRSHUDWHVDWWKHVDPH
WLPH DV DLOHURQV RU HOHYDWRU SOHDVH UHIHU WR WKH7KURWWOH
mixing function.

ŔŕőŃŲƗƋƈƕŃƖƓƈƆƌƄƏŃƐƌƛƌƑƊƖ
ŏ3LWFKWR1HHGOHPL[LQJ

ŏ1RUPDO FRQGLWLRQ KRYHULQJ  *\UR VHQVLWLYLW\maximum
ŏ,GOH XS ,GOH XS 7KURWWOH KROG *\UR
sensitivity minimum
ŏ+RZHYHU DW DXWR URWDWLRQ RI D WDLOGULYHQ
helicopter, this function may not have any
effect at high gyro sensitivity.

This mixing is used with engines that allow needle
FRQWUROGXULQJÁLJKW IXHODLUPL[WXUHDGMXVWPHQW 
A needle curve can be set. The needle servo
rise characteristics at throttle stick acceleration/
deceleration operation can be adjusted.
(Acceleration function)

ŏ*RYHUQRUPL[LQJ

This mixing is dedicated governor mixing when agovernor is used. Up to 3 rates (speeds) can beswitched for each condition.

51 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƕƙƒŃŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƅƜŃŰƒƇƈƏŃŷƜƓƈ
The T16IZ SUPER transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according
WRWKHW\SHVHOHFWHGZLWKWKH0RGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQX7KHFKDQQHODVVLJQPHQW LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ IRUHDFKPRGHOW\SHLVVKRZQEHORZ&RQQHFWWKHUHFHLYHUDQGVHUYRVWRPDWFKWKHW\SHXVHG
7KHVHWFKDQQHOVFDQEHFKHFNHGDWWKH)XQFWLRQVFUHHQRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQX7KHFKDQQHODVVLJQPHQWVFDQDOVREHFKDQJHG)RU
PRUHLQIRUPDWLRQUHDGWKHGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH)XQFWLRQPHQX

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
Ɣ1RUPDOWDLODQG9WDLO

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder Throttle Rudder

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2 Rudder Aileron2

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Gear

Flap

Gear

Aileron3

Gear

Aileron3

Flap

Flap

Aileron2

Flap2

Aileron2 Aileron4 Aileron2 Aileron4

7

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap

Flap3

Aileron3

Flap

Aileron3

Flap

8

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

Aileron4

Flap2

Aileron4

Flap2

9

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

Flap

Motor

Flap

Flap3

10

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

Flap2

AUX6

Flap2

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap3

Motor

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap4

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

Glider

6

2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

Airplane

Aileron2AIL

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
RX
CH Airplane Glider)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

V-tailNormal52 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
Ɣ$LOHYDWRU

2Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron6

Airbrake Airbrake Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

7

Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3

8

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

9

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

10

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

11

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap3

Flap3

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Flap4

Flap4

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Gear

AUX6

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

15

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX2

Butterﬂy

AUX4

Butterﬂy

16

AUX1

AUX1

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

AileronFASST MULT

1

FASSTest 18CH
The output
FASSTest 12CH
CH of each
S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

1AIL
2AIL
2AIL+1FLAP 2AIL+2FLAP 2AIL+4FLAP 4AIL+2FLAP 4AIL+4FLAPRX
CH Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

Elevator 2 servos

53 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
Ɣ7DLOOHVVZLQJ

4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider1

AileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron

2

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

6

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

AUX4

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX4

AUX4

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

T-FHSS

2AIL+4FLAPFASST MULT

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem2AILRXCH Airplane Glider

16 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator
DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

Flying Wing

54 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒƊƏƌƇƈƕ
Ɣ7DLOOHVVZLQJ:LQJOHW5XGGHU
2AIL+4FLAP

4AIL+2FLAP

4AIL+4FLAP

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

Glider

Airplane

GliderAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileronAileron2

Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

Motor

Throttle

4

RudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudderRudder Rudder

5

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3 Aileron3
Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4 Aileron4

Motor

6

Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

7

AUX5

AUX5

Flap

Flap

Flap2

Flap2

Flap3

Flap3

Flap

Flap

Flap

Flap

8

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

Flap2

9

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2

Flap3

Flap3

10

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

Gear

AUX6

Flap4

Flap4

11

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

AUX5

Rudder2 Rudder2

12

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

AUX3

Gear

AUX6

13

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX2

AUX5

AUX5

14

AUX1

AUX1

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX1

Butterﬂy

AUX3

Butterﬂy

15

Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

16

Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

DG1

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

DG2

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

T-FHSS

1FASST MULT

Airplane

FASSTest 18CH

2AIL+2FLAPFASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

2AIL+1FLAPThe output
CH of eachsystem

2AIL

RX
CH

)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

Rudder 2 servos
2XWSXWFKDQQHOVGL൵HUE\HDFKV\VWHPRIDWDEOH:KHQXVLQJDV\VWHPZLWKIHZFKDQQHOVWKHUHLVDZLQJW\SHZKLFKFDQQRWEHXVHG,WFDQQRWEHXVHGZKHQWKHUHLVDIXQFWLRQUHTXLUHGRXWRIWKHUDQJHRIWKHDUURZRID¿JXUH

55 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

RudderRudder

5

Gyro

Gyro

6

Pitch

Pitch

Governor

Governor

8

Elevator2

Governor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

T-FHSS

7CH

H-4/H-4X Swash

All other

1

AileronAileron2

Elevator

Elevator

3

Throttle

Throttle

4

Elevator2

Rudder

5

Pitch

Pitch

6

Gyro

Gyro

7

Governor

Governor8

RudderGovernor2

9

Gyro2

Gyro2

Gyro3

Gyro3

10

Gyro3

Gyro3

10

11

Governor2

Needle

DG1

SW

12

Needle

AUX5

DG2

SW

13

AUX4
X4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW

DG2

SW

FASSTest 12CH

All otherƔ)$667HVW&+The output
CH of eachsystem

H-4/H-4X SwashFASST MULTCH

The output FASSTest 18CH
CH of each S-FHSS
systemFASST 7CH

Ɣ)$667HVW&+)$66708/7,
FASST 7CH / S-FHSS)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

ŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕ

Aileron2

Elevator

3

Throttle

4

Rudder

5

Gyro

6

Gyro2

7

Gyro3

8

Camera TILT

9

Camera PAN

10

Camera REC

11

Mode

12

AUX5

13

AUX4

14

AUX3

15

AUX2

16

AUX1

DG1

SW SD

DG2

SW SA

T-FHSS

1FASST MULT

Multicopter

The output
CH of eachsystemFASSTest 18CH
FASSTest 12CH
S-FHSSFASST 7CH

CH)$66708/7,)$667&+FDQQRWEHVHOHFWHGIRU(XURSH

56 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶżŶŷŨŰŃŰŨűŸThe System menu sets up functions of thetransmitter. This does not set up any model data.

ŏ :KHQ WKH 6\VWHP PHQX EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG
WKHPHQXVKRZQEHORZLVFDOOHGXS7DSWKH
IXQFWLRQEXWWRQWKDW\RXZDQWWRHQWHU

ŶƜƖƗƈƐŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Display

Display adjustment.

Sound volume

Adjust the volume of: Other sound, Warning, Voice

System timer

Resets the system timer.

H/W setting

Stick mode selection (Mode 1 - Mode 4 ). J1-J4 sticks correction can be performed.

Battery

Battery alarm voltage setting. Auto power oﬀ time setting.

Range check

The output of the transmitter is lowered, for Range checking.

S.Bus servo

S.BUS servo setting.

Servo update

Update the S.BUS servo.

Sensor update

Update the corresponding telemetry sensor.

Information

Sets the User name, Language, and Unit system. Displays the program version, and microSD card information.

ŏ5HWXUQWR+RPHVFUHHQ

57 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplay
7KHIROORZLQJ/&'VFUHHQDGMXVWPHQWV
ŏ%DFNOLJKWLQJEULJKWQHVVDGMXVWPHQW
ŏ%DFNOLJKWLQJGHFUHDVHWLPHDGMXVWPHQW
ŏ7RXFKVFUHHQFDOLEUDWLRQŏ7DSWKH>'LVSOD\@EXWWRQLQWKH6\VWHPPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX

ťƄƆƎƏƌƊƋƗŃƐƄƛőŃƅƕƌƊƋƗƑƈƖƖŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ

ŷƒƘƆƋŃƆƄƏƌƅƕƄƗƌƒƑŃ

1. Adjust the backlighting brightness with thevalue input buttons.

This function adjusts the location of the Touch
Panel. Press the "Touch calibration" button.
The calibration screen will then pop up.
Tap the center of the cross hair cursor on
the screen with the soft pen. As soon as thesystem recognizes the position, the cursor
will move on to the next position. Repeat thisprocedure as long as the cursor moves to next
SRVLWLRQ<RXZLOOGRWKLVÀYHWLPHV&DOLEUDWLRQZLOOEHFDUULHGRXWEDVHGRQWKHÀYHSRVLWLRQVDisappearance of the cross hair cursor means
the calibration has been completed.

:KHQ WKH Ÿ EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ EHFRPHVEULJKWHU:KHQ WKH ź EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ
becomes darker.

ťƄƆƎƏƌƊƋƗŃƐƌƑőŃƅƕƌƊƋƗƑƈƖƖŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ
1. Adjust the backlight decrease brightness withthe value input buttons.
:KHQ WKH Ÿ EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ EHFRPHVEULJKWHU:KHQ WKH ź EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG WKH EDFNOLJKWLQJ
becomes darker.
*It cannot be made brighter than Backlighting brightness
DGMXVWPHQWťƄƆƎƏƌƊƋƗŃƇƈƆƕƈƄƖƈŃƗƌƐƈ

,QRUGLQDU\RSHUDWLRQWKLVFDOLEUDWLRQLVQRWQHFHVVDU\,I
you notice the Touch Panel is not functioning correctly after
ORQJXVHZHUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXFDUU\RXWWKLVFDOLEUDWLRQ

1. You can set a time period to decrease the
LCD backlight. This function counts the periodthat the Touch Panel has been not operated.
This time can be set by ten-second steps. You
can also turn off the backlight decrease* ifyou like.
7KH EDFNOLJKW FRQVXPHV D ODUJH DPRXQW RI SRZHU :H
recommend that you turn off the backlight by setting the
EDFNOLJKWSRZHUR൵WLPHWRDERXWRQHPLQXWH

58 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Sound volume setting

Sound volume

7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQVHWWKHYROXPHRI2WKHUVRXQG
:DUQLQJDQG9RLFHUHVSHFWLYHO\ŏ7DSWKH>6RXQGYROXPH@EXWWRQLQWKH6\VWHP
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX

The respective volume
controlŶƒƘƑƇŃƙƒƏƘƐƈŃŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ

2. You can change the sound volume bytapping the " ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " buttonof four items.
*If you tap " ▲ WKHYROXPHZLOOLQFUHDVH,I\RXWDSWKH" ▼ WKHYROXPHZLOOGHFUHDVH

1. When the Sound volume box is tapped, theabove screen will appear.

System timer

Integrating timer resetting

7KLVIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHV\VWHPWLPHURIWKH7,=SUPER transmitter. The system timer can also bereset.

*The system timer is displayed on the Home screen.

ŏ7DSWKH>6\VWHPWLPHU@EXWWRQLQWKH6\VWHPPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX● Total : Regardless of amodel, additional time incase a power supply is ON
is displayed.
● Model : The additionaltime when the power
supply was set to ON isdisplayed for every model.

Resets the timer
if pressed.

ŶƜƖƗƈƐŃƗƌƐƈƕŃƕƈƖƈƗ
The system timer shows the total timethat has elapsed since the last "reset".
1. Tap "Total" or "Model" to choose reset.
2. Tap the [System timer] button.
3. Tap "Yes" in the next screen to reset the timer.

59 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Stick mode selection and J1-J4 sticks calibration

H/W settingŃŶƗƌƆƎŃƐƒƇƈ
0RGHFDQEHFKRVHQ
%XWLWLVQ WFKDQJHGXQWLOGDWDLVUHVHW

8VXDOO\WKLV+:VHWWLQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\Please perform this calibration only if a change at
the center of a stick should arise after prolonged use.
ŏ7DSWKH>&DOLEUDWLRQ@EXWWRQLQWKH6\VWHP
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
System menu

To change the mode the stick ratchet
PXVWEHFKDQJHG5HTXHVWWKDWWKLVEHGRQHE\)XWDED6HUYLFH &KDUJHG
PRGL¿FDWLRQ
RUD

AIL

RUD

AIL

ELE THRTHR ELE

MODE1

MODE2

AIL

RUD

AIL

RUD

ELE THRTHR ELE

MODE3

MODE4

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃŦƄƏƌƅƕƄƗƈŃ
1. Tap the "Calibration" button.

3OHDVHGRQRWSUHVVWKHVWLFNWRR¿UPO\LQDQ\GLUHFWLRQZKHQ
doing the calibration.
&KHFNDIWHUFDOLEUDWLRQWRPDNHVXUHWKDWQHXWUDOLVWKH
ERWWRPULJKWVLGHLVDQGWKHWRSOHIWVLGHLV

2. Choose the stick to calibrate right and left.
3. The stick is set at neutral and the [Set neutral]
button is tapped.

TappedFull right andfull bottom

TappedThe stick is set at
neutralTapped

4. The stick is held at full right and full bottom(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.
5. The stick is held at full left and full top(diagonal). The [Set endpoint] button istapped.

Full left andfull top60 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Low battery alarm voltage set

Battery

Select the battery alarm voltage according to thebattery to be used.
It isn't indicated in caseof manual setting.

ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX

Battery type change :Lipo(2cells) → Manual
setting
When choosing manual
setting, the numericalvalue can be input.
It's dangerous to
set it manually inthe low voltage.

ŤƘƗƒŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƒȭŃƗƌƐƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

Vibrator Types

This function prevents battery
discharging if the transmitter power
supply does not erase.
1. Adjust the auto power off time withthe value input buttons.

Type 1
Type 2*When the time the transmitter is inactive reaches
WKHVHWWLPHWKHSRZHULVWXUQHGR൵DXWRPDWLFDOO\
7KLVWLPHFDQEHVHWXSWRKRXULQPLQXWHVLQFUHPHQWV7KHDXWRSRZHUR൵IXQFWLRQFDQDOVR
be deactivated.
$Q DXGLEOH DODUP LV VRXQGHG IURP  PLQXWHVEHIRUHDXWRSRZHUR൵:KHQDVWLFNRUVZLWFKLV
RSHUDWHGWKHDODUPLVFOHDUHG

Range Check

Type 3:KHQWKHORZEDWWHU\YROWDJHVHWWLQJLVFKDQJHGLWLVFKDQJHGIRU
HYHU\PRGHOLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU$XQLTXHYROWDJHFDQQRWEHVHWIRU
HDFKPRGHO$FKDQJHLQWKHORZEDWWHU\YROWDJHVHWWLQJDOVRGRHV
not reset other data.

%HIRUHDÁLJKWJURXQGUDQJHFKHFN

7KH UDQJHFKHFNPRGH UHGXFHVWKHWUDQVPLVVLRQUDQJH RI WKH UDGLR ZDYHV WR DOORZ IRU D JURXQG
range check.
7KHUDQJHFKHFNPRGHZKHQDFWLYDWHGZLOOFRQWLQXHIRU
VHFRQGVXQOHVVWKHXVHUH[LWVWKLVPRGHHDUO\:KHQWKH
SURJUHVVEDUUHDFKHVVHFRQGPDUNWKH5)WUDQVPLVVLRQ
automatically UHWXUQVWRWKHQRUPDORSHUDWLQJSRZHUWARNING
Do not ﬂy in the range check
mode.
*Since the range of the radio waves isshort, if the model is too far from thetransmitter, control will be lost and themodel will crash.

Refer to P.46
61 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

S.Bus servo

S.BUS servo setting$Q6%86  VHUYRFDQPHPRUL]HWKHFKDQQHODQG
various settings you input. Servo setting can be
SHUIRUPHGRQWKH7,=683(5VFUHHQE\ZLULQJ
WKHVHUYRDVVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUH:LWKVRPH6%86  VHUYRVWKHUHDUHVRPHIXQFWLRQVZKLFKFDQQRW EH XVHG ,I D IXQFWLRQ FDQQRW EH XVHG WKH GLVSOD\
VFUHHQZLOOFKDQJH 2QO\WKHIXQFWLRQZKLFKFDQEHXVHGE\
DVHUYRLVGLVSOD\HG
$IWHU UHDGLQJ FRPSOHWLRQ ZLWK FRQQHFWLRQ RI WKH DERYH
¿JXUHLIDVWLFNLVPRYHGVHUYRRSHUDWLRQFDQEHWHVWHG

ŏ&DOOWKHIROORZLQJVHWWLQJVFUHHQE\SUHVVLQJWKH
[S.BUS Servo] button in the System menu.

S.BUS/S.BUS2
Servo

ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX

ųƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈŃƉƒƕŃƆƋƄƑƊƌƑƊŃŶőťŸŶŃƖƈƕƙƒŃ
ƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

4. When multiple servos are connected change[INH] at the right side of the ID number on thescreen to [ACT] and enter the ID of the servo
you want to set.
5. Set each item. (Please see the next page.)
6. Press [Write]. The settings are changed.

1. Select [S.Bus servo] of the System menu.
:LUHWKHVHUYRDVVKRZQLQWKHÀJXUHDERYH
3. Press [Read]. The ID and current setting ofthat servo are displayed.

‫ ٴ‬ŶƈƕƙƒŃŬŧŃƑƘƐƅƈƕ
,I\RXXVHPXOWLSOH6%86VHUYRVRQO\WKHGHVLUHG
servo in the group can be set by entering the ID of
WKDWVSHFL¿FVHUYR
3-way hubor Y-harnesses

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

SERVO

62 ‫ڀ‬

S.BUS/S.BUS2
ServoŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

S.BUS Servo Description of each parameter's function*There are functions that can and cannot be performed according to the servo type.

• ID
Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

• Channel
Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.

• Reverse
The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.

• Soft Start
Restricts operation in the speciﬁed direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, theﬁrst initial movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the speciﬁed position.

• Stop Mode
The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be speciﬁed. The "Hold" mode setting holds
the servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.

• Smoother
This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smoothsetting is used for normal ﬂight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

1HXWUDO2ႇVHW
The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel isrestricted on one side.

• Speed Control
Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matchedwithout being affected by motor ﬂuctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.
However, note that the maximum speed will not exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servo's
operating voltage is increased.

• Dead band
The dead band angle at stopping can be speciﬁed.
[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal
change.
Large Value Setting ĺ Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.
(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current
consumption will increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

• Travel Adjust
The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

• BoostThe minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small
travel does not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be
immediately started by adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.
[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.
Large Value Setting ĺ Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is toolarge, operation will become rough.

63 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

• Boost ON/OFF
OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)• DamperThe characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.
When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value
is larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.
Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur,depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs eventhough the Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to avalue larger than the initial value.
[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.
Large Value Setting ĺ When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel likethe servo response has worsened.
(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo
will also be shortened.

• Stretcher
The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target
position when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.
This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.
[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]
Small Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes weaker.
Large Value Setting ĺ Servo holding force becomes stronger.
(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

• Buzzer
When a servo is powered up without a transmitter signal, a buzzer sounds.
(When transmitter signal is lost, a buzzer sounds until the servo regains the signal. This is not unusual.
The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25
Hz continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.
(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON.
sound by incorrect recognition.)

A buzzer may＊ Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo.
Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more thanneeded or do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time.

WARNING
While S.BUS servo writes, you aren't
supposed to remove a connection of a
servo and turn oﬀ a power supply of atransmitter.
■ Data of S.BUS servo is damaged and breaks down.

64 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Servo update

This function updates the corresponding Futaba S.BUS servos.

It is a function for updating the program of Futaba
S.BUS2 servo from T16IZ SUPER.
7R XSGDWH WKH VHUYR \RX QHHG D 3& WKDW FDQEH FRQQHFWHG WR WKH ,QWHUQHW D PLFUR 6' FDUGFRPPHUFLDOSURGXFW 

HV (high voltage)
non-compatible servoŏ 6HOHFW >6HUYR XSGDWH@ DW WKH OLQNDJH PHQX DQGcall the setup screen shown below.
HV (high voltage)compatible servo

ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJH
menuųƕƈƓƄƕƌƑƊŃƉƒƕŃƘƓƇƄƗƈ
 'RZQORDGWKH]LSÀOHRIWKHXSGDWHGDWDIURPRXUZHEVLWHRU\RXUORFDOGLVWULEXWRU·VZHEVLWH ([WUDFWWKH]LSÀOHRQ\RXUFRPSXWHU$IROGHUQDPHG)87$%$LVFUHDWHG
- Insert the micro SD card that contains the "FUTABA" folder into the transmitter.

ŸƓƇƄƗƈŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Connect the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servo to the transmitter asshown above.
2. Turn on the power of the transmitter and select [Servo
update] in the system menu.
3. Tap [Update] to start the software update for that servo.

4. It is complete when [Update succeeded.] is displayedon the screen.

Tap the update button.

65 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Sensor update

This function updates the corresponding Futaba telemetry sensors.

It is a function for updating the program of Futaba
telemetry sensor from T16IZ SUPER.
7R XSGDWH WKH VHUYR \RX QHHG D 3& WKDW FDQEH FRQQHFWHG WR WKH ,QWHUQHW D PLFUR 6' FDUGFRPPHUFLDOSURGXFW ŏ 6HOHFW >6HQVRU XSGDWH@ DW WKH OLQNDJH PHQX DQGcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJH
menuųƕƈƓƄƕƌƑƊŃƉƒƕŃƘƓƇƄƗƈ
 'RZQORDGWKH]LSÀOHRIWKHXSGDWHGDWDIURPRXUZHEVLWHRU\RXUORFDOGLVWULEXWRU·VZHEVLWH ([WUDFWWKH]LSÀOHRQ\RXUFRPSXWHU$IROGHUQDPHG)87$%$LVFUHDWHG
- Insert the micro SD card that contains the "FUTABA" folder into the transmitter.

ŸƓƇƄƗƈŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Connect the telemetry sensor to the transmitter asshown above.
2. Turn on the power of the transmitter and select [Sensor
update] in the system menu.
3. Tap [Update] to start the software update for thattelemetry sensor.

4. It is complete when [Update succeeded.] is displayedon the screen.

Tap the update button.

66 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Information

The program version and microSD card size are displayed. The User name,language and Unit system used by the system can also be changed.

This function registers the T16IZ SUPER username and the language displayed at proportionalcan be changed.

The Information screen displays the T16IZ SUPERV\VWHP SURJUDP YHUVLRQ LQIRUPDWLRQ  PLFUR6'
FDUG PHPRU\VL]HFDUGIUHHVL]H LQIRUPDWLRQ

Telemetry numerical values can be displayed in
HLWKHUPHWULFRU6$( \DUGSRXQG XQLWV,I D PLFUR6' FDUG LV QRW LQVHUWHG QR PHPRU\ FDUG
LQIRUPDWLRQZLOOEHGLVSOD\HGŏ7DSWKH>,QIRUPDWLRQ@EXWWRQDWWKH6\VWHPPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.

2/2 : WEB Manual QR code

ŏ5HWXUQWR6\VWHPPHQX

1/2

Telemetry Display Unit
[Metric]
Distance --- m (meter)
Speed --- km/h (kilometers per
hour)
Variometer --- m/s (meter per
second)Temperature --- ℃ (centigrade)[Yard]
Distance --- yard
Altitude --- feet
Speed --- mph (mile per hour)
Variometer --- fpm (ft per min)Temperature --- ℉ (fahrenheit)
Movement of a cursor of an input box

Back space (Input box)
Next page(Character list 2/4 - 4/4)

Fix and return to an
information screen.

An input box is reset
Input box

Shift key

Shift keyŵƈƊƌƖƗƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃƗƋƈŃƘƖƈƕŊƖŃƑƄƐƈ
7,= 683(5 WUDQVPLWWHU FDQ UHJLVWHU XVHU V
name.
ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƕƈƊƌƖƗƈƕŃƘƖƈƕŊƖŃƑƄƐƈ
1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.
2. Select "user's name" and then the keyboard
will pop up.
3. You can use up to 15 characters as a user'sname. Use the keyboard on the screen toenter user's name.

The language displayed at proportional canbe changed. The initial setting is English, but
diﬀerent languages can be selected.

67 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ůŬűŮŤŪŨŃŰŨűŸ
7KH/LQNDJHPHQXLVPDGHXSRIIXQFWLRQVZKLFKSHUIRUPPRGHODGGLWLRQPRGHOW\SHVHOHFWLRQHQG
SRLQWVHWWLQJDQGRWKHUPRGHOEDVLFVHWWLQJVůƌƑƎƄƊƈŃƐƈƑƘŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Model selectModel addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting

Model type

Model type, wing type, tail type, swash type, selection

Servo reverse

Servo direction reversal

End point

Servo basic rate adjustment and limit setting

Servo speed

Servo speed setting

Sub-trim

Adjusts the neutral position of each servo

Function

Channel assignment of each function can be changed

Fail safe

Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting

System type

System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, telemetry mode selection

Trim setting

Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily

Idle down

Lowers the idle speed of the engine

Swash ring

Limits the swash plate travel to within a ﬁxed range. (helicopter only)

Swash

Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only except swash type H-1)

Stick alarm

Can be set so that an audible alarm sounds when the throttle stick reaches the set position.

Timer

Timer setting

Function name

Function name can be changed

SensorVarious telemetry sensors setting

Telemetry

Displays various data sent from the receiverTele.setting

Telemetry data log

TrainerStarts and sets the trainer system.

Warning setting

Mixing, throttle position warning reset

User menu setting

Original menu making

Date reset

Model memory set data reset (by item)ŏ 7DS WKH >/LQNDJH PHQX@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH +RPH
screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ 6HOHFW WKH IXQFWLRQ
name and return to
the Home screen.

68 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Servo monitor

Servo Test & Graph Display / Displays servo positions.

7KLVLVXVHGIRUWHVWLQJVHUYRPRYHPHQW³0RYLQJ
7HVW´ UHSHWLWLRQPRGH DQG³1HXWUDO7HVW´ IL[HG
SRVLWLRQPRGH DUHDYDLODEOH
7KH³1HXWUDO7HVW´LVJRRGIRU¿QGLQJWKHQHXWUDO
position of a servo horn.

,Q RUGHU WR SUHYHQW DQ\ SRWHQWLDO GLIILFXOWLHV
WKH VHUYR WHVW IXQFWLRQ ZLOO EH LQRSHUDEOH RU
LQDFFHVVLEOHXQGHUFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQV6SHFL¿FDOO\the Servo Test function is not operational if the
7KURWWOH FXW LV 21 LQ HLWKHU DLUSODQH RU KHOLFRSWHU
PRGHV RU LI WKH7KURWWOH KROG LV 21 LQ KHOLFRSWHU
mode.
Test mode change :OFF → Neutral → Moving

ŏ 6HOHFW >6HUYR PRQLWRU@ DW WKH OLQNDJH PHQX DQGcall the setup screen shown below.

＜ or ＞● Long press the [U.MENU/
MON.] button in the
Home screen to call the
setup screen shown.

ŏ5HWXUQWR+RPHRU
Linkage menu

Each channel movement can be checked.

[Moving]: Mode which repeats operation ofeach servo[Neutral]: Mode which locks each servo in theneutral position

Select the [OFF] or pushing the
HOME/EXIT button → Testing is
stoppedWARNING
Don't set a servo test mode when thedrive motor is connected and the engine
has been started.
Ŷ,QDGYHUWHQWURWDWLRQRIWKHPRWRURUDFFHOHUDWLRQRIWKHHQJLQH
is extremely dangerous.

69 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Model selectThe Model selection function performs model addition, call,deletion, copy, and model name setting.

This function is used to load the settings of the
GHVLUHGPRGHOLQWRWKH7,=683(5¶VPHPRU\The settings may be selected from either the
WUDQVPLWWHU¶VEXLOWLQPHPRU\5HPHPEHUWKDWXSWRPRGHOPHPRULHVDUHDYDLODEOHLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
The model data of the microSD card is for storage.
microSD card model data cannot be called directlyfrom the transmitter. The name of the model stored
in the transmitter and the microSD card may bechanged. This can be very useful to tell different
models settings apart. Each model name can be as

ORQJDVFKDUDFWHUVDQGWKHPRGHOQDPHDOZD\V
appears in the display screen.
The Copy function is used to copy one set of model
GDWDLQWRDVHFRQGPHPRU\ZLWKLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
and the microSD card. It may be used for getting
DKHDGVWDUWRQVHWWLQJXSPRGHOVZLWKDOPRVWWKH
VDPHVHWWLQJV RQO\GL൵HUHQFHVQHHGWREHPRGL¿HG
instead of entering the complete model from
VFUDWFK $OVRWKLVIXQFWLRQPD\EHXVHGWRPDNHD
backup copy of a model setup before any changes
are made.

ŏ6HOHFW>0RGHOVHOHFW@DW
the linkage menu andcall the setup screen
shown below.

＜ or ＞● Tap the [Model select]button in the Home
screen to call the setup
screen shown below.

ŏ5HWXUQWR+RPHRU
Linkage menu

● "Save to"[Internal]: transmitter
memory[SD card]: microSD card

Current model isgreen.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƄƇƇƌƗƌƒƑ
1. Tap the [New] button.

2. Tap [Yes] to add the model. (When you wantto cancel model addition, tap [No].)*The added model is displayed in the model list.
:KHQDPRGHOLVDGGHGDUHFHLYHUOLQNLVUHTXLUHG

70 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƆƄƏƏ

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƇƈƏƈƗƌƒƑ

1. Tap the Internal or SD card. Select thelocation to which the desired model is to be
saved.

1. Tap the select model name or the model you
want to delete in the model list.
(The model currently selected cannot bedeleted.)2. Tap the [Delete] button.

Blue model would
be deleted.

2. Tap the desired model in the model list.
3. Tap the [Select] button.

3. Tap [Yes]. (When you want to stop model
deletion, tap [No].)

4. Tap [Yes] to call the model. (When you wantto cancel model call, press [No].)Blue model wasdeleted.

źƋƈƑŃƘƖƌƑƊŃƐƒƇƈƏŃƇƄƗƄŃƒƉŃŷŔśŶŽŏŃ
ŷŔřŶŽŏŃũŻŐŖřŏŃũŻŐŖŕ
1.The microSD card in which the model data ofanother transmitter is saved is displayed on
the model select screen.
T18SZ →
FX-32 →
T16SZ
FX-36
2. Copy the model data of another transmitterto T16IZ SUPER. The data will be converted for
T16IZ SUPER.
3. Select the converted model data.
*The model data converted for T16IZ SUPER cannot be usedin another transmitter.

71 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƑƄƐƈŃƆƋƄƑƊƈ

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƆƒƓƜ

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be changed. The current model name,tap.
2. When [Rename] is tapped, a keyboard
appears on the screen.

1. The model data chosen at current model
can be copied. The current model name,tap.

Current model (green)is chosen (blue).
Current model (green)is chosen (blue).

3. Enter the model name from this keyboard.

2. Tap the "Copy" button and tap thedestination button and select the copy
storage destination. (Internal or SD card)

8SWRFKDUDFWHUVFDQEHLQSXWDWWKHPRGHOQDPH

When you are done
renaming, tap Model name.

3. When [Internal]or [SD card] is tapped,
copying is executed.

Completion of rename

WARNING
Never launch the Model Selection function
while the engine is starting or the motor drive
wiring is connected.
■ Careless spinning of propellers or rotors is extremely
dangerous.

WARNING
Carefully check that the aircraft to be used andthe model selected match up.
■ Using a model which does not match the aircraft runs
the risk of the aircraft ﬂying out of control and crashing.
Perform a careful operations check prior to ﬂight.

add new copied model,I WKHUH LV QR PRGHO ZLWK WKH VDPH QDPH LQ WKH FRS\GHVWLQDWLRQWKHQDPHRIWKHFRSLHGPRGHOLVVDYHG,IWKHUH
LVDPRGHORIWKHVDPHQDPHDQXPEHULVDGGHGDWWKHHQG
RIWKHPRGHOQDPHDQGWKHPRGHOLVFRSLHG<RXFDQFKDQJH
the name later.
,QGLFDWLRQGDWH:KHQWKHPRGHOGDWDLVFRSLHGWKHFUHDWLRQ
date for the current model is recorded.
7,=683(5FDQXVHPRGHOGDWDRI76=76=);
);2WKHUWUDQVPLWWHUPRGHOGDWDLVQRWDYDLODEOH
+RZHYHULIWKHPRGHOGDWDFRQYHUVLRQIXQFWLRQ GHVFULEHG
DWWKHHQGRIWKLVPDQXDO LVXVHGSDUWRIWKHPRGHOGDWDRI
76*);7.FDQEHXVHG

72 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶThis function selects the model type from among airplane, glider,helicopter, and multicopter.

Model type

 6HYHQ W\SHV RI PDLQ ZLQJV VL[ W\SHV RI IO\LQJ
ZLQJ DQGWKUHHW\SHVRIWDLOZLQJVDUHDYDLODEOH
IRU DLUSODQHV (LJKW VZDVK W\SHV DUH DYDLODEOH
IRU KHOLFRSWHUV 6HYHQ W\SHV RI PDLQ ZLQJV DQGWKUHHW\SHVRIWDLOZLQJVDUHDYDLODEOHIRUJOLGHUVFunctions and mixing functions necessary for eachmodel type are set in advance at the factory.
1RWH 7KH 0RGHO 7\SH IXQFWLRQ DXWRPDWLFDOO\VHOHFWV WKH DSSURSULDWH RXWSXW FKDQQHOV FRQWUROIXQFWLRQV DQG PL[LQJ IXQFWLRQV IRU WKH FKRVHQ
model type.
:KHQ WKH 0RGHO 7\SH 6HOHFWLRQ FRPPDQG LV
DFFHVVHG DOO RI WKH GDWD LQ WKH DFWLYH PHPRU\ LV
FOHDUHG %H VXUH WKDW \RX GRQ¶W PLQG ORVLQJ WKLVGDWD RU EDFN LW XS WR DQRWKHU PHPRU\ XVLQJ WKH
copying functions.
7KH GLVSOD\ VFUHHQ LV DQ H[DPSOH7KH VFUHHQGHSHQGVRQWKHPRGHOW\SHŏ6HOHFW>0RGHOW\SH@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJH
menuŰƒƇƈƏŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
1. Model type selection [Model icon], tap.
2. Set the Model type, Wing type(Airplane/
Glider), Tail type(Airplane/Glider), or Swash
type(Helicopter) by using the appropriate
button.
3. Set the type you choose by tapping>(QWHU@ń><HV@ DW WKH FRQILUPDWLRQ VFUHHQ
(When you want to cancel model typeselection, tap [No].)ŏ  :KHQ D GDWD FKDQJH ZLOO RFFXU WKH FRQILUPDWLRQ
screen of data initialization menu will be displayed.
A push on [yes] will initialize data and allow changes.
A push on [no] will stop data changes.

2. [Yes], tap
1. [Enter], tap

73 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Set the type you
choose by tapping.

Airplane/Glider : Choose thewing type and tail.

Helicopter : Choose theswash type.

74 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Servo Reverse

Use to reverse the servo throw direction.

Servo Reverse changes the direction of an
LQGLYLGXDO VHUYR¶V UHVSRQVH WR D FRQWURO VWLFNmovement.
)RU&&30KHOLFRSWHUVEHVXUHWRUHDGWKHVHFWLRQRQ6ZDVK$)5EHIRUHUHYHUVLQJDQ\VHUYRV:LWK&&30 KHOLFRSWHUV DOZD\V FRPSOHWH \RXU VHUYR
reversing prior to any other programming. If you
use pre-built Airplane/Glider functions that control
PXOWLSOHVHUYRVLWPD\EHFRQIXVLQJWRWHOOZKHWKHU
the servo needs to be reversed or a setting in thefunction needs to be reversed. See the instructions
for each specialized function for further details.
$OZD\VFKHFNVHUYRGLUHFWLRQSULRUWRHYHU\ÀLJKW

DVDQDGGLWLRQDOSUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KRRNXSVDQGUDGLRIXQFWLRQWARNING
Before a ﬂight, always check that yourmodel's servo operation, the directionof control surfaces, and switch setup
are correct.
Default setting of the throttle/motor
channel is always reverse.

ŏ 7DS WKH >6HUYR UHYHUVH@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH /LQNDJH
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.

ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

7KHGLVSOD\VFUHHQLVDQH[DPSOH7KHVFUHHQGHSHQGVRQWKHPRGHOW\SHŶƈƕƙƒŃƕƈƙƈƕƖƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
$IWHUVHWWLQJXSDQHZPRGHOEHVXUHWRGH¿QHDOO
special menus. Be sure that all servos are plugged
LQWRWKHSURSHUUHFHLYHUFKDQQHOV1RZGHWHUPLQHZKHWKHU \RX QHHG WR UHYHUVH DQ\ FKDQQHOV E\moving each stick and observing the corresponding
PRYHPHQWLQWKHPRGHO¶VFRQWUROV

Tap the “Yes”→ Reverse

 7DS WKH GHVLUHG FKDQQHO·V VHWWLQJ EXWWRQ WRchoose the proper direction for the servo.
2. Tap “Yes” in the next screen.
3. Repeat for each servo needing reversal.
When done, tap “Servo reverse” to return to
the Linkage menu.

75 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Sets the travel, limit point.

End point

7KH(QGSRLQWIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHOHIWDQGULJKWVHUYRWKURZVJHQHUDWHVGL൵HUHQWLDOWKURZVDQGZLOO
correct improper linkage settings.

30 〜
140%

7KHWUDYHOUDWH QRUPDOIXOOVWLFNPRYHPHQWDWKLJKUDWHV  FDQ EH YDULHG IURP  WR  LQ  HDFKGLUHFWLRQRQFKDQQHOVWR$OVRWKHOLPLWSRLQWKRZIDUWKHVHUYRWUDYHOVZKHQDPL[LVLQYROYHG ZKHUHVHUYRWKURZVWRSVPD\EHYDULHGIURPWRŏ 7DS WKH >(QG SRLQW@ EXWWRQ LQ WKHLinkage menu to call the setup
screen shown below.

Travel rate

30 〜
140%

Limit point
Next pageCh7-16

ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Tap the values you
wish to adjust andvalue input buttons
will appear on-screen.

Left / Top

Right / Bottom

Indicates the current
direction of the stick, etc.
7KHGLVSOD\VFUHHQLVDQH[DPSOH7KHVFUHHQGHSHQGVRQWKHPRGHOW\SHŶƈƕƙƒŃƗƕƄƙƈƏŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ

ůƌƐƌƗŃƓƒƌƑƗŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ

1. Tap the travel button of the channel you
want to set. Value input buttons appear on
the screen.
2. Use these buttons to adjust the rate.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa3. Repeat the procedure above for each rate.

1. Tap the limit button of the channel you want
to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the limit
point.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa3. Repeat this procedure for each limit point.

76 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Servo speed

Sets the speed of each servo.

The Servo speed setting is used to set the servo
GHOD\IRUHDFKFKDQQHOIURPFKDQQHOOWRFKDQQHO7KHV\VWHPXVHVWKHSURJUDPPHGVSHHG GHOD\ 
WRVORZGRZQVHUYRSRVLWLRQFKDQJHV7KH6HUYR

VSHHGVHWWLQJFDQEHYDULHGIURPWRLQHDFKchannel.

（First）0 〜 27（Slowly）

ŏ 7DS WKH >6HUYR VSHHG@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH /LQNDJH
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

ŶƈƕƙƒŃƖƓƈƈƇŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
1. Tap the speed button of the channel you
want to set.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the
servo speed.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXHŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa VWHSV

3. Repeat this procedure for each channel.

Sub-trim

Setting of neutral position of each servo.

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo
QHXWUDO SRVLWLRQ DQG PD\ EH XVHG WR PDNH ILQH
DGMXVWPHQWV WR WKH FRQWURO VXUIDFH DIWHU OLQNDJHV

and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set
XSDPRGHOEHVXUHWKDWWKHGLJLWDOWULPVDUHVHWWR
their center position.

To close this screen, tap the [Servo speed]
button.

ŏ7DSWKH>6XEWULP@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

ŶƘƅŐƗƕƌƐŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ
1. Tap the trim display part of the channel you
want to adjust.
Value input buttons appears on the Sub-trim
menu screen.

2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the subtrim.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXHŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa VWHSV*See above

3. Repeat this step for each channel.

77 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Function

Channel assignment for each function can be changed to suit your needs.

:KHQ \RX VHOHFW PRGHO DQG ZLQJ VZDVK  W\SHV\RXZLOOILQGWKDWWKHRSWLPL]HGFRPELQDWLRQVRI
servo output channels and functions have been
DOUHDG\SUHVHW,I\RXZRXOGOLNHRQWKHIXQFWLRQVHWWLQJVFUHHQRIWKHOLQNDJHPHQX\RXFDQIUHHO\FKDQJH FRPELQDWLRQV RI VHUYR RXWSXW FKDQQHOVIXQFWLRQV DLOHURQ HOHYDWRU HWF  DQG LQSXWFRQWUROOHUV VWLFNVVZLWFKHVWULPOHYHUVDQGWULPVZLWFKHV <RXFDQDOVRDVVLJQWKHVDPHIXQFWLRQWR
multiple servo output channels such as assigning
HOHYDWRUIXQFWLRQWR&+DQG&+

DG1, DG2 (switch channels)

7KHVH WZR FKDQQHOV FDQ EH XVHG DV VZLWFK 2Q
2൵ FKDQQHOV<RXFDQIUHHO\FKDQJHFRPELQDWLRQVEHWZHHQVHUYRRXWSXWFKDQQHOVDQGLQSXWFRQWUROOHUVVWLFNVVZLWFKHVWULPOHYHUVDQGWULPVZLWFKHV 
Channel restrictions by a System Type)$667HVW&+&+6ZLWFK)$667HVW&+&+6ZLWFK)$66708/7,&+6ZLWFK)$667&+&+6)+66&+7)+66&+6ZLWFKŏ7DSWKH>)XQFWLRQ@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menuũƘƑƆƗƌƒƑŃƆƋƄƑƊƈ

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƆƒƑƗƕƒƏŃƆƋƄƑƊƈ

1. Tap the function button of the channel you
want to change to call the Function select.

1. Tap the control button of the channel you
want to change. A control select screen(stick, switch, knob, trim lever, etc.) isdisplayed.

2. Select the function you want to change.
2. Select the control you want to operate.
*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

78 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƕƌƐŃƆƋƄƑƊƈ
1. Tap the trim button to call the trim setup
screen.

ūŒźŃƕƈƙƈƕƖƈ
2. The following items can be set at the trim
setup screen.
ŏ +DUGZDUH VHWWLQJ 6HOHFWLRQ RI VZLWFK HWF
which controls trim)
ŏ5DWHVHWWLQJŏ7ULPPRGHVHWWLQJ
Normal mode: Normal trim (linear) operation
ATL mode: ATL operation mode. (Works at only one
end of operation) Reverse is also possible.
Center mode: Maximum change near center by
center trim operation (Does not change at end of
the stick movement)This function reverses the operation signal of the
VWLFNVVZLWFKHVWULPOHYHUVDQGNQREV
Note: This setting reverses the actual operation
VLJQDO EXW GRHV QRW FKDQJH WKH GLVSOD\ RI WKHindicators on the display. Use the Normal mode aslong as there is no special reason to use the reverse
mode.

The Motor function is used when switching the
motor ON/OFF (mostly for motor gliders). For
most EP planes, the throttle can be left as-is whencontrolling the motor by stick. This means that thevarious throttle-related functions are usable via
motor control.

Tap the channel you
wish to reverse.
Tap the “Yes”→ H/W reverse

79 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Fail safe

Sets the servos' operating position when transmitter signals can nolonger be received or when the receiver battery voltage drops.

The Fail safe function is used to set up positions
WKDW WKH VHUYRV ZLOO PRYH WR LQ WKH FDVH RI UDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFH'H¿QHVVHUYRSRVLWLRQZKHQVLJQDOVDUH
ORVWDQGZKHQUHFHLYHUEDWWHU\YROWDJHEHFRPHVORZ
<RXPD\VHWHLWKHURIWZRSRVLWLRQVIRUHDFKFKDQQHO+ROGZKHUHWKHVHUYRPDLQWDLQVLWVODVWFRPPDQGHG
SRVLWLRQRUIDLOVDIHZKHUHHDFKVHUYRPRYHVWR
DSUHGHWHUPLQHGSRVLWLRQ<RXPD\FKRRVHHLWKHU
mode for each channel.
7KH7,=683(5V\VWHPDOVRSURYLGHV\RXZLWKDQDGYDQFHGEDWWHU\PRQLWRULQJIXQFWLRQWKDWZDUQV\RX ZKHQ WKH UHFHLYHU EDWWHU\ KDV RQO\ D OLWWOHSRZHUUHPDLQLQJ,QWKLVFDVHHDFKVHUYRLVPRYHG
WRWKHGH¿QHGIDLOVDIHSRVLWLRQ7KHEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHPD\EHUHOHDVHGE\RSHUDWLQJDSUHGH¿QHGFRQWURO
RQ WKH WUDQVPLWWHU GHIDXOW LV WKURWWOH  'R QRWFRQWLQXHWRÀ\/DQGDVVRRQDVSRVVLEOH5HPHPEHU
if the predefined control suddenly moves to a

SRVLWLRQ\RXGLGQRWFRPPDQGODQGDWRQFHDQG
check your receiver battery.
'RQRWFRQWLQXHWRIO\/DQGDVVRRQDVSRVVLEOH
'HILQHVVHUYRSRVLWLRQZKHQVLJQDOVDUHORVWDQG
ZKHQUHFHLYHUEDWWHU\YROWDJHEHFRPHVORZWARNINGFor safety, always set the fail safe functions.
Ŷ(VSHFLDOO\VHWWKHWKURWWOHFKDQQHOIDLOVDIHIXQFWLRQVRWKDWWKH
VHUYRPRYHVWRWKHPD[LPXPVORZVLGHIRUDLUSODQHVDQGWRWKH
VORZVLGHIURPWKHKRYHULQJSRVLWLRQIRUKHOLFRSWHUV&UDVKLQJRIWKHPRGHODWIXOOKLJKZKHQQRUPDOUDGLRZDYHVFDQQRWEH
UHFHLYHGGXHWRLQWHUIHUHQFHHWFLVYHU\GDQJHURXVŶ,IIDLOVDIHLVUHVHWE\WKURWWOHVWLFNPRYHPHQWWKHIDLOVDIHPD\EHPLVWDNHQDVDQHQJLQHPDOIXQFWLRQDQGZLOOEHUHVHW
DWORZWKURWWOHDQGWKHPRGHOZLOOFRQWLQXHWRÀ\,I\RXKDYHDQ\GRXEWVLPPHGLDWHO\ODQG

ŏ7DSWKH>)DLOVDIH@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWRFDOOWKHVHWXSVFUHHQVKRZQEHORZ
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menuũƄƌƏŃƖƄƉƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
'HFLGH ZKLFK FKDQQHOV \RX ZDQW WR JR WR SUHVHWSRVLWLRQV DQG ZKLFK RQHV \RX ZDQW WR PDLQWDLQ
their last commanded position. To select the fail
VDIHPRGH\RXZLVKWRVHWXVHWKH)6EXWWRQ7KLVEXWWRQWRJJOHVEHWZHHQWKHWZRPRGHV +ROG)6
F/S mode setting:
1. Tap the F/S button of the channel you want
to set, and set that channel to the [F/S]mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, control, slider,or other control in the position you want the
servo to move to when the fail safe functionis activated, and tap the F/S position button.
That position is displayed in percentage.

1. Tap the [B.F/S] button of the desired channel
to set it to the B.F/S mode.
2. Hold the corresponding stick, VR, slider,or other control in the position you want
the servo to move to when the battery failsafe function is activated, and tap the F/S
position button. This position is displayed inpercentage.
:KHQ\RXZDQWWRUHWXUQWKDWFKDQQHOWR2))WDSWKH>%)6@
button again.

ťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃũƄƌƏŃƖƄƉƈŃƕƈƏƈƄƖƈŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑ
7KLVIXQFWLRQUHOHDVHVWKHSUHGH¿QHGFRQWUROIURP
its held position after indicating that your receiver
EDWWHU\LVORZ

:KHQ\RXZDQWWRUHWXUQWKDWFKDQQHOWRWKH+ROGPRGHWDS
WKH>)6@EXWWRQDJDLQťƄƗƗƈƕƜŃƉƄƌƏŃƖƄƉƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
7RVHOHFWWKH%)6PRGHWDSWKH>%)6@EXWWRQ
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>2))@DQG>%)6@

1. Enter the control setting screen by tapping
the Battery F/S release button. Now, you may
choose whether moving the throttle resets
the condition, or select a stick or switch todeactivate it. To set a desired throttle release
position, move the throttle stick to the point
at which you wish the B.F/S to be released.

B.F/S setting:80 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

System type

System mode setting, Receiver link

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

System Type selection

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 18CH )The T16IZ SUPER is for 2.4 GHz only. The system
can be changed from among 6 choices: FASSTest&+ )$667HVW&+ )$667 08/7, )$667
&+7)+666)+66,WLV)$667HVW&+DQG
)$667HVW&+ZKLFKFDQEHFKRVHQE\56%
RU56%VHW7KHPHWKRGRIVHOHFWLRQLVRQWKH
next page.

'XDO UHFHLYHUV FDQ EH OLQNHG ZLWK WKH 7,=
683(57ZRUHFHLYHUVDUHUHFRJQL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\E\ ,' QXPEHUV )RU H[DPSOH LQ 56% RU
56% &+ RXWSXW VHWWLQJ IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG
E\VHWWLQJWKHILUVWDVDV&+DQGVHWWLQJWKH
VHFRQG DV &+7ZR VHWV RI UHFHLYHUV FDQEH XVHG DV D VHW LQ WKH  PRGHO DOORZLQJ \RX 
channels. Separate fail-safe voltage can be set toeach receiver.
+RZHYHU WHOHPHWU\ FDQQRW EH XVHG IRU WKH QGreceiver.

,I\RXFKDQJHWKH6\VWHPW\SHRWKHUPRGHOGDWDLVQRWUHVHW
$IWHU DQ\ FKDQJH UHPHPEHU WR WHVW WKH PRGHO DQG IXOO\check servo direction and motion.
$QDORJ VHUYRV FDQQRW EH XVHG ZLWK WKH 56% RU
56%LQWKH)$667HVW&+PRGH

ŏ 6HOHFW >6\VWHP W\SH@ LQ WKH /LQNDJH PHQX
and access the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkagemenu

Telemetry function (FASSTest /T-FHSS mode only)

7RXVHWKHWHOHPHWU\IXQFWLRQVHW³7HOHPHWU\´WR
³$&7´
Receiver linking

7KHUHFHLYHUZLOORQO\EHFRQWUROOHG ZLWKRXWEHLQJ
D൵HFWHGE\RWKHUWUDQVPLWWHUV E\WKHWUDQVPLWWHULWis linked to. When using a receiver other than one
SXUFKDVHGDVDVHWOLQNLQJLVQHFHVVDU\
0RUHRYHUDUHOLQNLVUHTXLUHGZKHQDQHZPRGHOLV DGGHG E\ PRGHO VHOHFWLRQ DQG DW WKH WLPH RI
system type change.
ůƌƑƎƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇŃ

P.43

Cases when linking is necessary:
・When using a receiver other than the initial setting.
・When the communication system was changed.
(FASSTest18CH ↔ FASSTest12CH etc. )・When a new model was created by model
selection.

DL Interval (FASSTest mode only):KHQDWHOHPHWU\IXQFWLRQLVHQDEOHGWKHUHFHLYLQJ
LQWHUYDO GRZQOLQNLQWHUYDO RIVHQVRUGDWDFDQEH
changed.
,ID'/LQWHUYDOLVLQFUHDVHGWKHUHVSRQVHRIWKH
VHQVRU GDWD GLVSOD\ EHFRPHV VORZHU EXW VWLFNUHVSRQVHZLOOLPSURYH

Battery fail-safe voltage setup (FASSTest /T-FHSS
mode only)

7KHYROWDJHDWZKLFKEDWWHU\IDLOVDIHDFWLYDWHVFDQ
EH VHW ZKHQ \RX OLQN  9 7KH UHFHLYHUPHPRUL]HVWKHVHWWLQJDVLWZDVDWOLQN
6LQFHSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQYDULHVZLWKEDWWHU\W\SHVHUYRV DQG FRQGLWLRQ SOHDVH VHOHFW WKH IDLOVDIHDFWLYDWLRQYROWDJHIRU\RXURZQPRGHO

81 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦŵŶũŃųƕƒƗƒƆƒƏŃƉƒƕŃŷťŶ
7,=683(5KDVEHHQPDGHFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKH&56) 7%6 SURWRFROŏ&DOOSDJHIURPWKH>6\VWHPW\SH@PHQX

*Bidirectional communication function of CRSF is not supported.
:KHQ XVLQJ &56) WKH 6%86 VHUYR VHWWLQJ IXQFWLRQ DQG>5HORDG@ >5HJLVWHU@ >&KDQJH VORW@ IXQFWLRQV FDQQRW EH XVHG
:KHQVHWWLQJ6%86VHUYRDQGVHQVRUVHW&56)WR,1+

WARNING
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination withparts other than Futaba Genuine
equipment.

Tap the "CRSF" button to [ON]. A signal
conforming to the CRSF standard is
output from the S.BUS setting connector(S.I/F) of the transmitter.

System type
■ FASSTest 18CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up
to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.
■ FASSTest 12CH --- FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to
12 channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used,
but the response speed is faster than that of the 18CH mode.
• Analog servos cannot be used with the R7208SB (R7308SB) in the FASSTest 12CH mode.

■ FASST MULTI---FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2)
can be used.

■ FASST 7CH--- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ T-FHSS Air--- T-FHSS system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to
18 channels (linear16+ON/OFF2) can be used.

■ S-FHSS--- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

*FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH cannot be selected for Europe.

82 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Trim setting

Digital trim settings

7KLVIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHGLJLWDOWULP VFRQWUROVWHSDPRXQWDQGRSHUDWLRQPRGH 77 :KHQ WKH IOLJKW FRQGLWLRQV DUH VHW WKH WULPRSHUDWLRQFDQEHFRXSOHGZLWKDQ\RIWKHFRQGLWLRQV
selected through combination mode.

ŏ6HOHFW>7ULPVHWWLQJ@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJH
menuŦƒƑƗƕƒƏŃƖƗƈƓŃƄƐƒƘƑƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

ŶƈƓƄƕƄƗƈŒƆƒƐƅƌƑƄƗƌƒƑŃƐƒƇƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ

1. To set the control step amount, first tap thescreen to the data input mode.
Set the control step amount by tapping the" ▲▲ " " ▲ " " ▼▼ " " ▼ " button.
Initial value: 4Adjustment range: 1~200[Comb.]: Combination mode. The trim data
DUHUHÁHFWHGDWDOOWKHÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQV[Separ.]: Separate mode. Trim adjustment for
HDFKÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQ(When the value is tapped, the control stepamount is reset to the initial value.):KHQWKHYDOXHLVPDGHODUJHWKHFKDQJHSHUVWHSEHFRPHVlarger.

83 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Throttle cut

Stops the engine safely and easily.

7KURWWOH FXW SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\ WR VWRS WKHHQJLQHE\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDW
idle. The action is not functional at high throttle to
DYRLGDFFLGHQWDOGHDGVWLFNV7KHVZLWFK¶VORFDWLRQDQGGLUHFWLRQPXVWEHFKRVHQDVLWGHIDXOWVWR −− ".

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏ7DSWKH>7KURWWOHFXW@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

The yellow line is thecut position. Whenthe cut switch is ON,
the throttle will moveto this position.

This is the throttle cut
position. Tapping thiswill display value input
buttons on-screen. Set
the engine stop position.
Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the throttle cut switch
and ON-OFF direction.

ŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƆƘƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Tap the "INH" button.
2. Throttle cut function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)
3. Throttle cut position setting:
Tap the cut position button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the cut
position rate.

This indicates the throttle stick's current
position. Throttle cut will only function
when the throttle stick is more than 1/3rd
into the slow throttle range.

ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJH（LOW）a（Middle）:LWKWKURWWOHVWLFNDWLGOHDGMXVWWKHUDWHXQWLOWKHHQJLQH
FRQVLVWHQWO\VKXWVR൵

To exit the setting, tap the [Throttle cut]
button.

84 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Lowers the engine idling speed.

Idle down

7KH ,GOH GRZQ IXQFWLRQ ORZHUV WKH HQJLQH V LGOH
E\ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKZLWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWLGOH
The action is not functional at high throttle to avoid
DFFLGHQWDOGHDGVWLFNV7KHVZLWFK¶VORFDWLRQDQG
GLUHFWLRQPXVWEHFKRVHQDVLWGHIDXOWVWR −− ".
ŏ6HOHFW>,GOHGRZQ@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQX
and call the setup screen shown below.

Tapping this will change
INH to either OFF or ON
and activated.

ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

This is the idle down
throttle position. Tapping
this will display value input
buttons on-screen. Set theengine's max. low position.
Range:（↑）-100 〜 +100（↓）
Pressing and holding avalue will reset it to 0.

Tapping this will pull up the
hardware selection screen.
Select the idle down switch
and ON-OFF direction.

This is the current position bar for thethrottle stick. Throttle cut will only
function when the throttle stick is morethan halfway into the low throttle range.

ŬƇƏƈŃƇƒƚƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Tap the "INH" button to activate the Idle
down function.
2. Idle down function switch setting:
Tap the "--" button to call the <Hardware
select> screen, and then select the switch
and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual.)

3. Offset rate setting:
Tap the offset rate button. Value input
buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to adjust the offset rate.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa EHFRPHVDQLGOHXS
To exit the setting, tap the [Idle down]
button.

Landing
Idling, lower

Oﬀset rate

85 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash ring

/LPLWVWKHVZDVKWUDYHOZLWKLQDÀ[HGUDQJHWRSUHYHQWOLQNDJHGDPDJH
(Helicopter only)

7KLVIXQFWLRQOLPLWVWKHWUDYHORIWKHVZDVKSODWHWR
prevent linkage damage as the aileron and elevator
RSHUDWLRQLVXVHG,WLVXVHIXOIRU'KHOLVHWWLQJŏ7DSWKH>6ZDVKULQJ@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Setting the function to"ACT" will display theswash ring and [Rate]
percentage.

The movement range
display shows control
input for elevator andaileron direction.
The marker represents
the stick's position.

ŶƚƄƖƋŃƕƌƑƊŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
1. Push the Swash ring button on the linkagemenu.
2. Push ACT/INH button to activate.
7KHPRYHPHQWDUHDPRQLWRUVKRZVWKHFXUUHQWDLOHURQDQG
HOHYDWRUYDOXHVDQGOLPLWUDQJHVE\WKH\HOORZFLUFOH

3. Adjust the rate to the maximum amount ofswash plate decline.
7KHVZDVKPRYHPHQWLVOLPLWHGZLWKLQWKHFLUFOH $GMXVWPHQWUDQJH

86 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

SwashSwash operation linkage correction function (helicopter only, except
swash type H-1).

Neutral Point

Mixing Rate

$W\RXUOLQNDJHVLIWKHVHUYRKRUQGHYLDWHVIURPD SHUSHQGLFXODU SRVLWLRQ DW QHXWUDO WKH OLQNDJH
compensation functions in this menu may notcompensate effectively. To correct this use the
QHXWUDOSRLQWIXQFWLRQ7KLVZLOOPRYHWKHQHXWUDO
point of the servos to the actual perpendicular
SRVLWLRQ +RZHYHU WKLV DGMXVWPHQW FKDQJHV RQO\the axis point of the compensation functions in this
PHQXDQGGRHVQRWDIIHFWWKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQRI
other functions.

This compensation mixing is used to correct the
WHQGHQF\RIWKHVZDVKSODWHIRUHDFKFRQWURO7KH
IROORZLQJ FRPSHQVDWLRQ PL[LQJ LV SRVVLEOH 3,7WR$,/3,7WR(/($,/WR3,7(/(WR$,/DQG
(/( WR 3,7 +5 PRGH  ,W DGMXVWV WKH VZDVKplate to operate correctly for each control using thecorresponding compensation mixing.

Swash AFR6ZDVK$)5IXQFWLRQUHGXFHVLQFUHDVHVUHYHUVHVWKH
UDWH WUDYHO RIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGFROOHFWLYHSLWFK IXQFWLRQV E\ DGMXVWLQJ RU UHYHUVLQJ WKHPRWLRQRIDOOVHUYRVLQYROYHGLQWKDWIXQFWLRQRQO\ZKHQXVLQJWKDWIXQFWLRQ

Linkage Compensation

This compensation mixing is used to correct the
WHQGHQF\RIWKHVZDVKSODWHIRUSLWFKFRQWURODWORZ
pitch and high pitch.
Speed Compensation

This function is used to cancel the reaction that is
JHQHUDWHGE\WKHGL൵HUHQFHRIWKHRSHUDWLRQDPRXQWRIHDFKVHUYRZKHQWKHVZDVKSODWHPRYHVŏ 6HOHFW >6ZDVK@ DW WKH OLQNDJH PHQX DQG FDOO WKHsetup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

87 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ůƌƑƎƄƊƈŃƆƒƕƕƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ

űƈƘƗƕƄƏŃƓƒƌƑƗŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
*Becomes the compensation reference point.
$GMXVWLQJWKHVHUYRKRUQVRWKDWWKHQHXWUDOSRLQWSRVLWLRQLVQHDUWKHSRVLWLRQPDNHVWKHPL[LQJDPRXQWVPDOO

1. Hold the servo horn at a right angle to thelinkage rod, and then tap the [Enter] button
and read the actual neutral point.
*The neutral point is displayed on the screen.

After reading this neutral point, use othercompensation functions to make further
adjustments.
To exit the setting, tap the [Swash] button.

ŶƚƄƖƋŃŤũŵŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
Adjust so that the specified operation
amount is obtained by aileron, elevator, andpitch operation.
1. Tap the button of the AFR rate to be
adjusted. Value input buttons appear on thescreen.
2. Use the value input buttons to adjust the AFR
rate.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXH
 $GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa
+or- the direction of operation changes.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

*Set the linkage compensation after setting the mixing
rate.
*This function compensates for elevator interferenceby aileron operation or aileron interference by
HOHYDWRU RSHUDWLRQ DW /RZ SLWFK DQG +L SLWFK DW
FROOHFWLYHSLWFK +5HWF FRQWURO
1. Set the throttle stick to the maximum slow
position. Move the aileron stick to the left andright and adjust the aileron compensation
amount so that interference in the elevatoror pitch direction at that time is minimal.
7KHOHIWDQGULJKWVLGHVFDQEHDGMXVWHGVHSDUDWHO\,IWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHLQFUHDVHVZKHQWKHFRPSHQVDWLRQDPRXQW LV LQFUHDVHG PDNH WKH FRPSHQVDWLRQ
direction "-".
2. Adjust the elevator compensation amountso that the interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down is minimal.
3. Perform aileron and elevator compensation
similarly for the throttle stick full high side.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

ŶƓƈƈƇŃƆƒƐƓƈƑƖƄƗƌƒƑŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ

ŰƌƛƌƑƊŃƕƄƗƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
HR-3 is described as an example. The mixing
applied in other swash modes is different, but
the setting procedure is the same.
1. Set the throttle stick to the set neutral point.
Adjust the length of the linkage rod so thatthe swash plate is horizontal at this position.
$OLWWOHDGMXVWPHQWXVLQJVXEWULPVKRXOGEH2.
$GMXVWVRWKDWSLWFKRSHUDWLRQZKHQWKHSLWFKFXUYH
is straight is maximum.
2. Adjust the AIL->PIT amount so there is nointerference in the elevator or pitch direction
when the aileron stick is moved to the left
and right.
$GMXVWWKHOHIWDQGULJKWVLGHVVHSDUDWHO\3. Adjust the ELE->AIL and ELE->PIT amounts sothere is not interference in the aileron or pitch
direction when the elevator stick is moved
up and down.
$GMXVWWKHXSDQGGRZQVLGHVVHSDUDWHO\4. Adjust the PIT->AIL and PIT->ELE amounts sothat the swash plate is horizontal when thethrottle stick is set to maximum slow and full
high.
$GMXVWWKHVORZDQGKLJKVLGHVVHSDUDWHO\
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.

1. Set the throttle stick to the neutral point
position. Move the elevator stick quickly andadjust the speed compensation amount sothat the interference in the pitch direction isminimal.
To exit setting, tap the [Swash] button.
Notes:
If the linkage is too long or short, correctcompensation will not be applied. Correct
this before continuing. The pitch angle
changes after any adjustment. Reset thepitch angle when actually flying after
compensation processing.

88 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Stick alarm$Q DODUP VLQJOH EHHS  FDQ EH VRXQGHG DW WKH
VSHFL¿HGWKURWWOHVWLFNSRVLWLRQŏ$ODUPIXQFWLRQ212))FDQEHVHWE\VZLWFK
Tapping this will change
INH to ON and activated.

If the throttle stick
reaches the yellow
line, an alarm willsound.

ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

This is the current
position display bar forthe throttle stick.

This is the throttle stick
alarm position. Push thethrottle stick to the desired
position and tap the value.
Range:（Low）0 〜 100（High）

Tapping this will pull up the hardware selection
screen. Select the switch and ON-OFF direction if
turning the function ON-OFF by switch.

If the throttle stick
reaches the desired
position , an alarm(single beep) willsound.

89 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Timer setting

Timer

The Timer function may be set for
DQ\ GHVLUHG WLPH LH HQJLQH UXQ WLPH
VSHFLILHG WLPHV IRU FRPSHWLWLRQV HWF
7ZR LQGHSHQGHQW WLPHUV DUH SURYLGHG
for your use. The timers are stored
LQGHSHQGHQWO\ZLWKHDFKPRGHOPHDQLQJWKDW ZKHQ \RX VZLWFK EHWZHHQ PRGHOVHWXSVWKHWLPHUDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHQHZ
model is brought up automatically.
The timers may be set to start and stop
IURPWKHPRWLRQRIDQ\VZLWFKRUVWLFN<RXPD\VHWWKH21DQG2))GLUHFWLRQV
freely. Each timer has a capacity of up toPLQXWHVVHFRQGV(DFKWLPHUPD\EHVHWIRUFRXQWGRZQRUFRXQWXSRSHUDWLRQZLWKDWDUJHWWLPH
,IDWDUJHWWLPHLVVHWDQGWKHWLPHUUHDFKHVWKHVHWWLPHD
buzzer sound for each count is generated.

Last twenty seconds Last ten seconds Target timeTime：

Alarm :One shortbeep

Two short
Also
beeps

beep

ŏ6HOHFW>7LPHU@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQXDQGFDOOWKHVHWXS
screen shown below.

Continue counting
with displaying a
minus (-) sign.

A Buzzer or Speech
can be chosen

ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Elapsed: Minute-by-minutealarm starting from 00:00

Constant: The alarm
does not stop

Remainder : Minute-byminute alarm counting downfrom a designated time

One time: Stop thealarm at once

[Inhibit] → [Type1-4]
If it carries out like this,a vibration function
will work.

OFF: Turning the power OFF and switching models will reset the timer.
ON: Previous timer is put into memory and will restart from where it stopped.
[Start/Stop] → Home screen
A timer on the home screen starts and stops its countdown
directly from there when tapped. Tapping and holding thedisplay will reset the timer.

Timer 1ŸƓŃƗƌƐƈƕŒŧƒƚƑŃƗƌƐƈƕŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ

1. Tap the mode button and select the type oftimer.
2. Timer time setting.
Tap the Mode minutes or seconds button.
Value input buttons appear on the screen.
Use these buttons to set the timer time.

Timer 2ŶƗƄƕƗŒŶƗƒƓŒŵƈƖƈƗŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ

1. Tap the Start/Stop/Reset SW "--" button tocall the <Switch> screen, and then select theswitch and its ON direction.
(For a detailed description of the selection
method, see [Switch selection method] atthe back of this manual. The timer switches
can be set for each condition.)

90 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Integration Timer,17 LQWHJUDWLRQ 7LPHULVWKHIXQFWLRQZKLFKFKDQJHVSURJUHVVRIDWLPHUDFFRUGLQJWRWKHORFDWLRQRIWKHWKURWWOHVWLFN:KHQWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLVUDLVHGIRUIDVWHUVSHHGWKHVSHHGRIWKHWLPHUXVXDOO\
LQFUHDVHV:LWKWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNDWPLGUDQJHVSHHGWKHWLPHUVSHHGGHFUHDVHV WR :KHQWKH
WKURWWOHLVSRVLWLRQHGDWORZHQGWKHWLPHU VSURJUHVVVWRSV,W VSRVVLEOHWRVHWLWLQWKHWLPHZKLFK¿WVSRZHUFRQVXPSWLRQRI\RXUIXVHODJH
7KH FRQVXPSWLRQ RI WKH EDWWHU\IXHO LV GLIIHUHQW GHSHQGLQJ RQ WKH FRQGLWLRQV VR XVH DQ ,17 7LPHU DV
reference.
7KH,17 LQWHJUDWLRQ WLPHLVGLIIHUHQWIURPWKHDFWXDOHODSVHGWLPH

When a throttle stick is thehigh side, the speed of thetimer usually increases.

High
When a throttle stick is
middle-speed, the timer
speed decreases (by 50%).

MiddleWhen a throttle stick is low,timer progress stops.

Lowŏ6HOHFW>7LPHU@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQXDQGFDOOWKHVHWXS
screen shown below.
INT Time

Nomal TimerTap
INT time (%)

TH% : Integration Timer

91 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Function name

Function name can be changed

7KH QDPH RI WKH VSDUH IXQFWLRQV $X[LOLDU\  
FDQEHFKDQJHGIRUWKHIXOOQDPH FKDUDFWHUV RUIRUWKHDEEUHYLDWHGQDPH FKDUDFWHUV ŏ 7DS WKH >)XQFWLRQ QDPH@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH /LQNDJH
menu to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

ũƘƑƆƗƌƒƑŃƑƄƐƈŃƆƋƄƑƊƈŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
1. Select [Function name] from the Linkagemenu and tap the screen.
2. The Function name setup screen is displayed.
3. When the function whose name is to bechanged is selected and the screen is
WDSSHGDPRGLÀFDWLRQVFUHHQLVGLVSOD\HG
4. Select the function to be renamed andselect [Rename] and tap the screen. A
character input screen is displayed. Input thefunction name.

6. The function name may be displayed in 10
characters or 4 characters, depending on
the setup screen. For 4-character display,
input the function name as required.

5. When [Reset] is selected and the screen isheld down, the function name is set to theinitial state function name.

92 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry system
This screen displays and sets the various information from the receiver. An alarm and vibration can be
JHQHUDWHGGHSHQGLQJRQWKHLQIRUPDWLRQ)RUH[DPSOHDGURSLQWKHYROWDJHRIWKHUHFHLYHUEDWWHU\KRXVHG
in the aircraft can be reported by an alarm.
● This function can only be used in the FASSTest18CH mode and T-FHSS mode. The FASST/S-FHSS mode cannot use
telemetry.
● FASSTest12CH mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display.
● Telemetry sensors sold separately can be mounted in the aircraft to display a variety of information. (Receiver voltage
does not require a sensor.)● The telemetry function cannot be used if the telemetry mode of the parameters is not ACT.
● FASSTest18CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry cannot be used for the 2nd receiver.
● T-FHSS/FASSTest12CH : When 2 receivers are used with 1 transmitter, the telemetry function cannot be used.
● If the transmitter and receiver are linked, but the receiver's ID is not recorded in the transmitter's memory, the telemetryfunction cannot be used.
● Turning OFF the receiver after use will cause the telemetry data just prior to this to be displayed. (Even when thereceiver's power is turned OFF, the receiver voltage is not 0.0 V.)

Viewing the receiver voltage.

Setting is unnecessary. When menu telemetryis listened to, the voltage appears.

Viewing the drive battery
voltage.

CA-RVIN-700 and wiring work are necessary.

Using various optional
telemetry sensors.

Optional telemetry sensors are necessary.
T16IZ SUPER setting is unnecessary.

P.95

Using several telemetry
sensors of the same type.

Setting by "sensor" in the menu is necessary.
(Register is necessary.)

P.97

Setting alarms from thetelemetry information.

Setting by "Telemetry" in the menu isnecessary.

Viewing the telemetry data

P.93

P.101

P.100 〜 121＜ Home display ＞

Receiver → Transmitter. The reception of the signal
from the receiver to the transmitter is shown. This
does not aﬀect ﬂight.
Receiver voltage andExt voltage display

CAUTION
Do not stare at or set the transmittersetting screen while ﬂying.
■ Losing sight of the aircraft during ﬂight is very
dangerous.
■ When you want to check the information
during ﬂight, call the telemetry screen
before ﬂight and have the screen checked bysomeone other than the operator.

93 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Home
display

16 of telemetry data is displayed

HOME/EXIT is pushed*Be aware that pressing and holding this activates the key lockYou can choose
which type of sensor
to display for four
displays. Tap the sensor
type.

For some sensor types,
you can choose thedisplay item. Tap toselect.

7,=

)XVH

Info

SignalTelemetry SchematicInfo&$59,1ZLWKH[WHUQDOSRZHULQSXWPXVWEHOHVVWKDQ9

Drive battery

Receiver%UDQFK

0RWRU&RQWUROOHU

Drive battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

Battery voltage isdisplayed at the transmitter.

6ZLWFK
Info

6%86SRUW

Connect the battery
to the free port.

Info

+XE

7HUPLQDOER[
Info

+XE

7HPSHUDWXUH
6HQVRU

Slot 1530
6HQVRU

Slot 2$OWLWXGH
6HQVRU

Slot 3 〜 5

9ROWDJH
6HQVRU

Slot 6 〜 7*36
6HQVRU

Slot 8 〜 15

6HQVRU

Slot 16
Slot 17

6HQVRU+XE

Info94 ‫ڀ‬

Slot 31ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Various telemetry sensors setting

SensorThis screen registers the telemetry sensors used
ZLWKWKHWUDQVPLWWHU:KHQRQO\RQHRIDFHUWDLQ
W\SHRIVHQVRULVXVHGWKLVVHWWLQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\and the sensor can be used by simply connecting itto the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.
:KHQXVLQJRUPRUHRIWKHVDPHNLQGRIVHQVRU
they must be registered here.
ŏ7DSWKH>6HQVRU@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.

Slot Number[What is a slot?]
Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are
FODVVL¿HGLQXQLWVFDOOHG³VORW´7KHUHDUHVORWVIURP
No. 1 to No. 31.
Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data
sensor units may use multiple slots.
When using a sensor which uses two or moreslots, the required number of slots is automaticallyassigned by setting up a start slot.
When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor areused, the sensors themselves must allocate unused
slots and memorize that slot.

Registered sensor

Sensor ID : Multiple usage of sensorsof the same type requires an ID
be input. Tapping this will allow
for manual input, but see the next
page about how to perform autoregistration via sensor registration.

Tap the slot to display
sensors which can be used
for the start slot. Tap toregister the sensor.

95 ‫ڀ‬

This is what displays when no
sensor is registered in a slot.
Tapping the slot and selecting"-----------" will erase whatever was
registered there, freeing up theslot.

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŏ $V VKRZQ LQ WKH WDEOH EHORZ DQ DOWLPHWHU UHTXLUHV  FRQWLJXRXV VORWV DQG D *36 VHQVRU
requires 8 contiguous slots. The GPS (SBS-01/02G) start slots are 8, 16, and 24.

＜ Assignable slot ＞$OWLPHWHU*36DQGRWKHUVHQVRUVWKDWGLVSOD\DODUJHDPRXQWRIGDWDUHTXLUHPXOWLSOHVORWV
'HSHQGLQJRQWKHW\SHRIVHQVRUWKHVORWQXPEHUVWKDWFDQEHDOORFDWHGPD\EHOLPLWHG

Sensor

The required
number of slots

The number which can be used as a start slot

TEMP (SBS-01T/TE)

1 slot1 〜 31

RPM (SBS01RM/RO/RB)

1 slot1 〜 31Airspeed (SBS-01TAS)

1 slot1 〜 31

Voltage (SBS-01V)

2 slots

Altitude (SBS-01/02A)

3 slots

Current (SBS-01C)

3 slots

S.BUS Servo sennsor（SBS-01S)

6 slots

GPS (SBS-01/02G)

8 slots

8,16,24

Futaba ESC (MC-980H/A,
MC-9130H/A, MC-9200H/A)

8 slots

8,16,24

SBS-01ML

16 slots

8,16

For Pixhawk®

EM-10012 slots

8,16

O.S. ENGINESTEMP125-F1713

1 slot1 〜 31VARIO-F1712

2 slots

VARIO-F1672

2 slots

CURR-F1678

3 slots

GPS-F1675

8 slots

8,16,24

Kontronik ESC

8 slots

8,16,24

Castle TL0

8 slots

8,16,24

JetCat V1014 slots

1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,
18

PowerBox

16 slots

8,16

1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29
1,2,8,9,10,16,17,18,
24,25,26

Selling area

Global

1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,16,17,18,19,
20,21,22,24,25,26,27,28,29,30
1,2,3,4,5,8,9,10,11,12,13,16,17,18,19,20,21,
24,25,26,27,28,29

96 ‫ڀ‬

EuropeŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶThis page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

Sensor：Reload

When using multiple sensors of the same typethe sensors must be registered in the transmitter.
Connect all the sensors to be used to the T16IZ
683(5 DV VKRZQ LQ WKH ILJXUH DW WKH ULJKW DQGUHJLVWHUWKHPE\WKHIROORZLQJSURFHGXUH7KH,'of each sensor is registered in the transmitter.
ŏ&DOOSDJHIURPWKH>6HQVRU@PHQX
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Hub

Hub

SENSORSENSORSENSOR

Sensor : Register

SENSOR

&RQQHFWWKHVHQVRUWRWKH7,=683(5DVVKRZQLQWKHÀJXUH
above.
2. Tap “Reload” on page 3/3 of the [Sensor] screen.
3. Tap “Reload”.
All the sensors are registered and can be used.

SENSORŵƈƄƇƌƑƊŃƄƏƏŃƗƋƈŃƖƈƑƖƒƕƖŃƗƒŃƅƈŃƘƖƈƇ

Hub*It is not necessary to carry out
multiple battery connections likeD70=76*

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This function registers an additional sensor.
&RQQHFWWKHVHQVRUDVVKRZQLQWKHILJXUHDWWKHULJKW DQG UHJLVWHU LW E\ WKH IROORZLQJ SURFHGXUHThe sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.
ŏ&DOOSDJHIURPWKH>6HQVRU@PHQX
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

SENSORŤƇƇƌƗƌƒƑƄƏŃƖƈƑƖƒƕŃƕƈƊƌƖƗƕƄƗƌƒƑ
&RQQHFWWKHVHQVRUWRWKH7,=683(5DVVKRZQLQWKHÀJXUH
above.
2. Tap “Register” on page 3/3 of the <Sensor> screen.
3. The sensor is registered and can be used.

97 ‫ڀ‬*When the number of slots needed in
UHJLVWUDWLRQ LV LQVXIILFLHQW DQ HUURU LV
displayed and registration cannot be
performed. Disable unused slots or
SHUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJUHORDGŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Sensor : Change slot

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensorsof the same type.

This procedure changes the slot number of one
registered sensor.

ŏ&DOOSDJHIURPWKH>6HQVRU@PHQX
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

SENSORŏ 7DS WKH >&KDQJH VORW@ EXWWRQ
in the Sensor screen to call the
setup screen shown below.

)RUVRPHWUDQVPLWWHUV HJ7. ZKHQWKHVWDUWVORWRIDVHQVRULVFKDQJHGWKHVHQVRUFDQQRWEHXVHG

ŶƈƑƖƒƕŃƖƏƒƗŃƆƋƄƑƊƈ
1. Connect the sensor to the T16IZ SUPER asVKRZQLQWKHÀJXUHDERYH
2. Tap “Change slot” on page 3/3 of the<Sensor> screen.
3. Tap “Read”.
4. A sensor details screen appears.
5. The current start slot is displayed. To changea start slot, a ＋ Ɇ button, tap.（Cannot be
set to a slot that cannot be allocated like thetable of all pages.）
6. Tap to the “Write”.

WARNING
Do not disconnect or turn transmitter
power OFF while telemetry sensor data
is being saved.
Sensor save data will be lost, resulting in
malfunction.

98 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry

Displaying data from the receiverThis screen displays your choice of data from thereceiver.
$OVRZDUQLQJVFDQEHDFWLYDWHGUHJDUGLQJWKHGDWD
)RUH[DPSOHLIWKHUHFHLYHUYROWDJHGURSVWKHXVHUFDQEHZDUQHGE\DQDODUP DQGYLEUDWLRQ ŏ7DSWKH>7HOHPHWU\@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

Tap page button toadvance to next page.
( The number of pages
changes with the numberof sensor registration.)

Various telemetry data
Start slot number

Choose the desired sensor and tap.

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

ŧƌƖƓƏƄƜŃŶƈƑƖƒƕƖ
Default display sensors can only be used byconnecting the sensors to the receiver. For displayof other sensors or to use the same type of sensor in
PXOWLSOHFDVHVHLWKHUUHJLVWHUWKHPYLDWKH6HQVRURSWLRQRQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXRUDOORFDWHWKHVHQVRUV
to empty slots to have them display on the Telemetry
screen. Refer to the previous "Sensor" explanation
SDJHVIRUKRZWRGRWKLV

99 ‫ڀ‬

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from thereceiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Receiver [Battery],QWKLVVFUHHQWKHEDWWHU\YROWDJHRIDUHFHLYHULV
displayed.
,I LW EHFRPHV KLJKHU RU ORZHU WKDQ WKH VHWWLQ DQ
DODUPDQGRUYLEUDWLRQZLOODOHUW\RX*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>5HFHLYHU@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Receiver battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

100 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the EXT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Receiver [Ext. battery]
7KH(;792/7VFUHHQZLOOGLVSOD\WKHGDWDIURPWKH (;7EDWWHU\ RXWSXW IURP WKH 56% RU
56%UHFHLYHU,QRUGHUWRXVHWKLVIXQFWLRQLW
is necessary to connect external voltage connector
RI WKH 56% RU 56% UHFHLYHU WR D &$
59,1RU6%69WRWKHEDWWHU\\RXGHVLUHWR
measure the voltage of WKH(;7EDWWHU\.

*CA-RVIN-700 must be installed in the aircraft.
<RXZLOOEHDOHUWHGE\DQDODUPRUYLEUDWLRQLIWKH
voltage set by you is exceeded.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>5HFHLYHU@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

101 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the temperature

Telemetry : Temperature*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
7HPSHUDWXUH LV D VFUHHQ ZKLFK GLVSOD\VVHWV XS
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
the temperature information from an optional
FASSTest12CH mode.
temperature sensor.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\
7KH WHPSHUDWXUH RI WKH PRGHO HQJLQH  PRWRU
functions.
EDWWHU\HWF ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHGLVSOD\HG
,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
DODUPDQGRUYLEUDWLRQZLOODOHUW\RXŏ 7DS WKH >7HPSHUDWXUH@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH 7HOHPHWU\screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Temperature

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature rises
above the set value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an
alarm will sound when
the temperature drops
below the set value.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

ŤƏƈƕƗŃƖƈƗŃŝŃŷƈƐƓƈƕƄƗƘƕƈŃƚƄƕƑƌƑƊŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [℃ ] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXHŃ℃ Ņ℃
Adjustment range: -20℃ ~200℃
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

102 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the rpm

Telemetry : RPM Sensor
7KH 530 6HQVRU VFUHHQ LV XVHG WR VHW XS DQ
optional rpm sensor and display the rotation
information it transmits.
7KH URWDWLRQ RI WKH PRGHO HQJLQH  PRWRU HWF 
ZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHVKRZQ,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
DODUPDQGRUYLEUDWLRQZLOODOHUW\RX*An rpm sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>USPVHQVRU@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

rpm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm rises above the set
value.
↓ A downward arrow
will show that an alarm
will sound when therpm falls below the set
value.

Sets the rpm on which
the alarm operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Magnet""Optics""Brushless motor"

SBS-01RM → Gear ratio 1.00~99.00
SBS-01RO → Blade
2~10
SBS-01RB → Pole
2~30ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃŝŃŲƙƈƕŃ(ŸƑƇƈƕ)ŃƕƒƗƄƗƌƒƑƖŃ

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx rpm] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXHŃ2,000 rpm Ņ0 rpm
Adjustment range: 0 rpm~150,000 rpm
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

103 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the altitude

Telemetry : Altitude*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

$OWLWXGH LV D VFUHHQ ZKLFK GLVSOD\V  VHWV XS WKH DOWLWXGH
information from an optional altitude sensor or GPS sensor.
7KHDOWLWXGHRIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEHNQRZQ,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHU ORZ WKDQSUHVHWDOWLWXGH\RXFDQEHWROGE\DODUP:DUQLQJE\YLEUDWLRQFDQDOVREHFKRVHQ'DWDZKHQDSRZHUVXSSO\LVWXUQHGRQVKDOOEHPDQGLWGLVSOD\VWKH
DOWLWXGHZKLFKFKDQJHGIURPWKHUH(YHQLIWKHDOWLWXGHRIDQDLU¿HOGLVKLJKWKDWVKDOOEHPDQGWKHDOWLWXGHGL൵HUHQFH
from an airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates thealtitude from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure
ZLOO JHW ORZHU DV \RX JR XS LQ DOWLWXGH 8VLQJ WKLV WKHVHQVRUZLOOHVWLPDWHWKHDOWLWXGH3OHDVHXQGHUVWDQGWKDWDQ
exact advanced display cannot be performed if atmospheric
SUHVVXUHFKDQJHVLQDZHDWKHUVLWXDWLRQ*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>$OWLWXGH@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Altitude

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Sets the altitude
on which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches above
your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thealtitude reaches below
your set value.

Mode1: Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Mode4: Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensible
Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

ũƌƕƖƗŏŃƗƋƈŃƖƈƗŃƒƉŃƄŃƕƈƉƈƕƈƑƆƈŃƌƖŃƕƈƔƘƌƕƈƇő

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃŝŃŤƏƗƌƗƘƇƈŃ

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [xxx m] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXHŃPŅP
Adjustment range -500 m~+3,000 m
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW$WPRVSKHULFSUHVVXUHLVFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHZHDWKHU
DOVRDWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

104 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from thevariometer

Telemetry : Altitude [Variometer]*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
9$5,2 LV D VFUHHQ ZKLFK GLVSOD\V  VHWV XS WKH VWDWXVWKH7,=683(5LQFRUSRUDWHVDGL൵HUHQW
variometer information from an optional altitude
PHORG\ IRU DVFHQW DQG GHVFHQW $GGLWLRQDOO\sensor or GPS sensor.
GHSHQGLQJXSRQWKHUDWHRIFOLPERUGHVFHQWWKH
7KHYDULRPHWHURIWKHPRGHOZKLFKLVÀ\LQJFDQEH WRQHVYDU\WRLQGLFDWHZKHWKHURUQRWWKHDLUSODQHLV
climbing or descending at a rapid rate.
NQRZQ
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
,ILWEHFRPHVKLJKHURUORZHUWKDQWKHVHWWLQJDQ
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
DODUPDQGRUYLEUDWLRQZLOODOHUW\RX
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\
7RHQVXUHWKDWWKHSLORWLVDZDUHDVWRWKHPRGHO V
functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>9DULRPHWHU@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

VariometerMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.
Sets the variometeron which the alarm
operates.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thevariometer reaches
below your set value.

● If this is set to Mode1-4,
a rise and dive are told
by a diﬀerent melody.
Mode 1 : Little rise/dive→ Melody changes: sensitively

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Allows Melody to beturned ON or OFF.

ũƌƕƖƗŏŃƗƋƈŃƖƈƗŃƒƉŃƄŃƕƈƉƈƕƈƑƆƈŃƌƖŃƕƈƔƘƌƕƈƇő

1. The model and transmitter to which thealtitude sensor was connected are turned on.
2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.
$WPRVSKHULFSUHVVXUHLVFKDQJHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHZHDWKHU
DOVRDWWKHVDPHDLU¿HOG<RXVKRXOGSUHVHWEHIRUHDÀLJKW"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1Mode 4 : Big rise/dive→ Melody changes: insensibleŤƏƈƕƗŃƖƈƗŃŝŃƙƄƕƌƒƐƈƗƈƕŃ

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [m/s] item.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: +1m
Adjustment range-50 m/s~+50 m/s
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW

Type 2:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.

Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

105 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃŶƈƗƗƌƑƊ

Tap the [Set] button

Current variometer*These settings can bemade for each sensor.

Next page

Deadband

Range

When the variometer is greaterthan this value, Vario melody is
not variable.
Setting range：
Offset value 〜 +50 m/s,QLWLDOYDOXH：5.0 m/s

When the variometer is less than
this value, Vario melody is notvariable.
Setting range：-50 m/s 〜 Offset value,QLWLDOYDOXH：-5.0 m/s

When the variometer is lessthan this value, Vario melody
is not output.
Setting range：

When the variometer isgreater than this value, Vario
melody is not output.
Setting range：

0 m/s 〜 +50 m/s,QLWLDOYDOXH：0.0 m/s-50 m/s 〜 0 m/s,QLWLDOYDOXH：0.0 m/s

OﬀsetžŷƋƈŃƕƈƏƄƗƌƒƑŃƒƉŃŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊƖƀ
Fixed melody
Range↑
Deadband↑Oﬀset

This is the changing point of climb and sink. When the variometeris greater than this value, Vario Melody is climb type. When thevariometer is less than this value, Vario Melody is sink type.
Setting range：5DQJHŃVHWWLQJYDOXH〜5DQJHŅVHWWLQJYDOXH,QLWLDOYDOXH：0.0 m/s

Deadband↓Variable melody
Dead band（Not sound）

Variable melody

Range↓

106 ‫ڀ‬Climb side
Discontinuous
soundsSink side
Continuous
soundsFixed melodyŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

DelayThe output vario melody does not change during
the delay time. In other words, this is a minimum
time of Vario melody output.
Setting range：0.0 s，0.5 s，1.0 s，1.5 s,QLWLDOYDOXH：0.0 s*This parameter is effective to all variometers.

žŹƄƕƌƒŃŰƈƏƒƇƜŃŧƈƏƄƜƀ
Actually Variometer
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Output Vario Melody
0.0m/s

1.0m/s

3.0m/s

4.0m/s

2.0m/s-1.0m/s

Delay time
1.0s

107 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the receiver battery voltage

Telemetry: Voltage [Battery]*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
,QWKLVVFUHHQWKHEDWWHU\YROWDJHRIDUHFHLYHULV
displayed.
,I LW EHFRPHV KLJKHU RU ORZHU WKDQ WKH VHWWLQ DQ
DODUPDQGRUYLEUDWLRQZLOODOHUW\RX,Q WKLV VFUHHQ WKH EDWWHU\ YROWDJH LV GLVSOD\HG
,Q RUGHU WR XVH WKLV IXQFWLRQ LW LV QHFHVVDU\ WR
FRQQHFW ([WHUQDO YROWDJH FRQQHFWRU RI 56%
56% ⇔6%69 ⇔ Battery
6%69 PHDVXUHV WZR EDWWHULHV 7KH SRZHUEDWWHU\FRQQHFWHGWRWZROLQHVLVGLVSOD\HGRQ(;792/77KHEDWWHU\IRUUHFHLYHUVFRQQHFWHGWR3
lines is displayed here.
ŏ7DSWKH>9ROWDJH@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Battery voltage

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer,
Voice, and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using
the vibrator alarm. If using vibrator,choose one of the three types.
3. Tap to the Limit [4.0 V] item.
 $GMXVW WKH UDWH XVLQJ WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆʆʆEXWWRQV
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLV
reset to the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return tothe original state, push the HOME/EXIT
button.
5HIHU WR WKH PDQXDO RI 6%69 IRU WKH GHWDLOV RI
ZLULQJ

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.
Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

＜ Two examples of wiring are shown ＞
Two drive batteries are measured (R7108SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)WR6%86
SRUW

Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)

EXT Line

Normal Line56%

Receiver battery●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]

Two drive batteries and power supplies for servos are measured (R7108SB use)
Drive battery 1（EXT Battery)
Drive battery 2（EXT Battery)
Power supplies
for servos*SBS-01V measures two voltage. One corresponds to high voltages, such as a drive battery,with an EXT line. Another is a normal line and is measurement of the battery for receivers of aline connected to 3P connector, or the battery for servos.

EXT Line

6ZLWFK

Normal LineWR6%86SRUW$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\+XE

56%

Receiver battery
S.BUS2

servos108 ‫ڀ‬●Battery voltage measurement for receivers [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 1 is measured in an EXT port [R7108SB use]
●The drive battery 2 is measured in an EXT line [SBS-01V use]
●The voltage for servos is measured in a power supply line [SBS-01V use]ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

D i s pl a y i n g d a t a f r o m t he E XT
battery voltage port

Telemetry: Voltage [Ext. battery],Q WKLV VFUHHQ WKH  (;7 EDWWHU\ YROWDJH LV
displayed. ,Q RUGHU WR XVH WKLV IXQFWLRQ LW LV
necessary to connect External voltage connector of56% 56% ⇔6%69 ⇔ Battery
6%69 PHDVXUHV WZR EDWWHULHV 7KH SRZHUEDWWHU\FRQQHFWHGWRWZROLQHVLVGLVSOD\HGRQ(;792/7

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>9ROWDJH@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQWR
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Ext. battery
voltageMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↓ The "down" arrow
will indicate that an
alarm will sound whenthe voltage drops to
below the setting.

Sets the voltage on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.
3. Tap Limit [4.0 V].
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: 4.0 V
Adjustment range: 0.0 V~100.0 V:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHWWR
the initial value.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

109 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the Distance Screen

Telemetry : GPS [Distance]
The Distance screen displays and sets altitude data
IURPDQ6%6**366HQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\ 
DQGDOORZVWKHGLVWDQFHWRWKHDLUERUQHDLUFUDIWWR
be read by the transmitter. When the aircraft flies
LQVLGH RU RXWVLGH WKH VHW GLVWDQFH DQ DODUP DQGvibration alerts the pilot.

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
DQG FRQQHFW WKH VHQVRU LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH VHQVRUinstruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>*36@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Distance
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
distance reaches
below your set value.

Sets the distanceon which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference"
item. Sets the current aircraft position
as the starting point.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Altitude calculated as either straight line distance(slant) or surface distance on a map can also be
selected.

Type 1nt

Sla

Type 2

AltitudeType 3

Surface
Select <Slant> <Surface> to "Distance mode", tap thescreen.

110 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ũƌƕƖƗŏŃƗƋƈŃƖƈƗŃƒƉŃƄŃƕƈƉƈƕƈƑƆƈŃƌƖŃƕƈƔƘƌƕƈƇő

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƄŃŅƗƒƒŃƆƏƒƖƈŅŃƄƏƄƕƐŃƇƌƖƗƄƑƆƈ

1. The model and transmitter to which the GPS
sensor was connected are turned on.

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.

2. Tap to the [Preset] of "Reference" item.

2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

1RZWKHSRVLWLRQRIWKHSUHVHQWPRGHOZDVVHWWRP

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƄŃŅƗƒƒŃƉƄƕŅŃƄƏƄƕƐŃƇƌƖƗƄƑƆƈŃ
1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice,and Inhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using thevibrator alarm. If using vibrator, choose oneof the three types.

3. Tap Limit [m].
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: 0 m
Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW

3. Tap Limit [m].
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
Initial value: 1,000 m:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHWWR
the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Adjustment range 0 m~3,000 m
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHWWR
the initial value.

5. To terminate the input and return to theoriginal state, push the HOME/EXIT button.

TelemetryDataŧƌƖƗƄƑƆƈ
*Positioning time of GPS:KHQSRZHUHGXSWKH6%6*EHJLQVWRDFTXLUH *36 VDWHOOLWH GDWD 7KLV SURFHVV FDQtake several minutes. Please do not move the
PRGHOGXULQJWKLVSURFHVV'XULQJDFTXLVLWLRQ
WKH/('RQWKH6%6*ZLOOEOLQNJUHHQ
DIWHUWKHVDWHOOLWH VVLJQDOVKDYHEHHQDFTXLUHGWKH/('ZLOOEHFRPHVROLGJUHHQDQGWKH*36
VLJQDOVWUHQJWKGLVSOD\RQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUZLOOVKRZWKUHHEDUV
0RYLQJWKHPRGHOEHIRUHWKHVDWHOOLWHVDUHIXOO\DFTXLUHG ZLOO FDXVH D GHOD\ LQ DFTXLULQJ WKHsatellite signal.

111 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶDisplaying data from the speed

Telemetry : GPS [Speed]

The speed screen displays and sets the speed data from an *A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
6%6* *36VHQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be displayed.
$IWHU IOLJKW WKH PD[LPXP VSHHG GXULQJ IOLJKW FDQ EH
YLHZHG%HFDXVHWKLVVSHHGLVEDVHGRQSRVLWLRQGDWDIURPD *36 VDWHOOLWH WKH JURXQG VSHHG LV GLVSOD\HG LQVWHDG RI
DLU VSHHG &RQVHTXHQWO\ ZLWK D KHDG ZLQG WKH GLVSOD\HG
VSHHGGHFUHDVHVDQGZLWKDWDLOZLQGWKHGLVSOD\HGVSHHG
increases.

7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
DQG FRQQHFW WKH VHQVRU LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH VHQVRUinstruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ7DSWKH>*36@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Speed↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Reference and Distance mode work in conjunction with Distancediscussed on the previous two pages.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƚƋƈƑŃƖƓƈƈƇŃƌƑƆƕƈƄƖƈƖŃ

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
 $GMXVW WKH UDWH XVLQJ WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆ ʆʆ
buttons.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXHŃNPKŅNPK
Adjustment range 0km/h~500km/h
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the HOME/EXIT button.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3*Speed alarm precaution
6LQFH WKH *36 VSHHG VHQVRU GLVSOD\V WKH JURXQG VSHHG LW
FDQQRWEHXVHGDVDVWDOODODUP)RUH[DPSOHDQDLUFUDIWWKDWVWDOOVDWNPKZLOOVWDOOLIWKHWDLOZLQGLVNPKRUJUHDWHU
HYHQ WKURXJK NPK LV GLVSOD\HG E\ JURXQG VSHHG ,Q
DGGLWLRQZLWKDQDLUFUDIWWKDWZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGÀLJKWDW
NPKDWDQRYHUVSHHGDODUPZKHQWKHKHDGZLQGUHDFKHVNPKWKHDLUSODQHZLOOGLVLQWHJUDWHLQPLGDLUGXHWRRYHU
VSHHGLQJHYHQDWDJURXQGVSHHGRINPK

112 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : GPS [Altitude, Variometer, Position]*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
7KH$OWLWXGH9DULRPHWHU3RVLWLRQVFUHHQGLVSOD\V
DQG VHWV WKH GDWD IURP DQ 6%6* *36VHQVRU VROGVHSDUDWHO\
7KH *36 VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\ 0RXQW
DQG FRQQHFW WKH VHQVRU LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH VHQVRUinstruction manual.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ 6HOHFW >*36@ LQ WKH 7HOHPHWU\ VFUHHQ DQGaccess the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Altitude
Variometer

Refer to the former
page for a setup
about Altitude andVariometer.

This indicates thereceiving accuracy
from a GPS Satellite.
When three bars are
displayed, the GPS isready for use.

The position of the present
model is displayed.

ŤƏƗƌƗƘƇƈ
ŹƄƕƌƒƐƈƗƈƕ

ƓƒƖƌƗƌƒƑ

113 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Current]
7KH6%66FDQPRQLWRUDQGGLVSOD\WKHLQÀLJKW *Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
FXUUHQWRSHUDWLQJDQJOHDQGLQWHUQDOWHPSHUDWXUHRIXSWRWZR6%86VHUYRV
,I \RX IRUJHW WR FRQQHFW WKH VHUYR ZLULQJ GXULQJIXVHODJHDVVHPEO\RUWKHVHUYRZDVGLVFRQQHFWHG
an alarm can be activated at the transmitter.
Tap here and go to theServo 2 settings page.
(Display and settingscontent is the same as
Servo 1.)

ŏ 6HOHFW >6HUYR VHQVRU@ LQ WKH 7HOHPHWU\screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX
Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this willtake you to thesettings screen forthe current alarm

Tapping this and selecting"Buzzer" will cause the device
to sound an alarm when
servos are not connected.

Tapping this and selecting"Each type" will cause thedevice to vibrate when servos
are not connected.

When the Alarm or
Vibrator options areactivated, the servo
connection will
display.
*This alarm and display is limited to the S.BUS
servos connected to the servo sensors.
↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator is choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

114 ‫ڀ‬Initial value: ↑ 10.0A ↓ 0.0A
Adjustment range 0.0A~10.0A( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : Servo sensor [Temperature] [Angle]*Servo sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
ŏ 6HOHFW >6HUYR VHQVRU@ LQ WKH 7HOHPHWU\screen and access the setup screen
shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

● Temperature↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
above your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thetemperature reaches
below your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the temperatureon which the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

Initial value: ↑ 115℃↓ -10℃
Adjustment range -10℃ ~115℃( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)● Angle↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when theangle reaches below
your set value.
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Sets the angle onwhich the alarm
operates.

Vibrator choices are
type1-3, and Inhibit.

115 ‫ڀ‬Initial value: ↑ +180.0° ↓ -180.0°
Adjustment range -180.0° ~ +180.0°( ↑ Limit ≧ ↓ Limit)ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : Current sensor [Current]
7KH 6%6& KDV WKH FDSDELOLW\ RI PHDVXULQJFXUUHQWYROWDJHDQGFDSDFLW\ FRQVXPSWLRQ IURP
drive battery all at the same time.

*Current sensor must be installed in theaircraft.

'ULYH

(6&

%DWWHU\

0RWRU
WR5HFHLYHU

6%6&ŏ6HOHFW>&XUUHQW@LQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQDQG
access the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thecurrent alarm

Max. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for thevoltage alarm
Tapping this will take you tothe settings screen for the
consumption capacity alarm
The consumption capacity is indicated.
It isn't the present battery capacity.

◆ Alarm setting↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

"Vibrator" type
Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3116 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : Airspeed sensor [Airspeed]

Displaying data from the airspeed*A Airspeed sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
The speed screen displays and sets the speed
GDWDIURPDQ6%67$6 $LUVSHHGVHQVRU VROG
separately.
The speed of the aircraft during flight can be
GLVSOD\HG$IWHUÀLJKWWKHPD[LPXPVSHHGGXULQJIOLJKWFDQEHYLHZHG$LUVSHHGLVWKHVSHHGRIDQDLUFUDIWUHODWLYHWRWKHDLU<RXZLOOEHDEOHWRJHWDmore accurate aircraft speed.

7KH$LUVSHHG VHQVRU LV QHFHVVDU\ DQG LV VROG VHSDUDWHO\
0RXQWDQGFRQQHFWWKHVHQVRULQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHVHQVRUinstruction manual.
*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.
2QO\ UHFHLYHU YROWDJH DQG (;7 YROWDJH FDQ EH XVHG LQ
FASSTest12CH mode.
7KH)$667HVW&+7)+66PRGHFDQXVHDOOWKHWHOHPHWU\functions.

ŏ 7DS WKH >6SHHG VHQVRU@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH 7HOHPHWU\screen to call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

SpeedMax. and min. values
since the power
was turned ON will
display.

↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches above
your set value.
↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when the
speed reaches below
your set value.

Sets the speed on
which the alarm
operates.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

ŤƏƄƕƐŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƚƋƈƑŃƖƓƈƈƇŃƌƑƆƕƈƄƖƈƖŃ

1. Tap Alarm and choose from Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.
2. Choose "Inhibit" for Vibrator if not using the vibrator
alarm. If using vibrator, choose one of the three
types.
3. Tap Limit [xxx km/h].
 $GMXVW WKH UDWH XVLQJ WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆ ʆʆ
buttons.
Adjustment range 0km/h~800km/h
Ń/LPLW≧Ņ/LPLW

Type 1
Type 2Type 3:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHUDWHLVUHVHW
to the initial value.
5. To terminate the input and return to the originalstate, push the HOME/EXIT button.

117 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : Futaba ESC MC-980H/A, MC-9130H/A, MC-9200H/A*Futaba ESC must be installed in the aircraft.

◆ Register the ESC with transmitter.
Registration to transmitter◆ Linkage menu → Sensor → 3/3● Call page 3 of [Sensor].

Connect the SBM-2 to thetransmitter as shown, thentap Register.
Registration is complete when
this screen appears

Connect SBM-2 to the S.I / F port on
the back of transmitter.

Complete registration and remove
SBM-2 from the transmitter.
*Please note that the proper default slot for this accessory is number 8 (8-15).
This sensor uses eight slots. Being made to a start slot are 8, 16, and 24.

◆ The registered ESC will be displayed as "Futaba ESC".
◆ The registered Hobbywing ESC is displayed as "Hobbywing ESC".

118 ‫ڀ‬For details on Hobbywing ESC telemetry
support, refer to the Hobbywing website.

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

◆ MC-9130H / A telemetry connection example
To CH3 Throttle

To free port
To S.BUS2

SBM-2

To drive battery

ESC◆ ESC telemetry display screen
The ESC status is displayed. Alarm setting is also possible.

Tap to move to thetemperature setting page.

Tap to move to thecurrent setting page.
Tap to move to thevoltage setting page.
Tap to move to thecapacity setting page.
Tap to move to therotation setting page.

Display max / min value
Press and hold to reset.
Display max / min value
Press and hold to reset.

◆ Alarm setting↑ An upward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches above
your set value.

Sets the current on
which the alarm
operates.

↓ A downward arrow
indicates the alarm
will sound when thecurrent reaches below
your set value.
Allows Speech to beturned ON or OFF.

Alarm is chosen from
Buzzer, Voice, andInhibit.

Shows the output level from the ESC
to the motor, not the position of thethrottle stick.
Even if the stick is in the 50%
position, the output may not be 50%
depending on the ESC setting.
Tap to move to the throttle setting
page.

*The current and capacity consumption display may varydepending on the usage conditions, so use it as a guide.

◆ Alarms can be set for Voltage, Capacity, Rotation, ESC temperature, and Throttle using
the same procedure.

Enter the number ofpoles for your motor.

If the gear is down, enter
the gear ratio to display
the helicopter rotor speed
and the airplane gear down
propeller speed.

When enabled, the alarm
will be activated in thefollowing warning state.

When enabled, the vibrator
will start in the following
warning state.

◆ Warning state
Throttle not at 0%
Low voltage
Over temperatureOver current
Motor locked
Throttle signal lost119 ‫ڀ‬When the throttle stick is not low when ESC is started
When the battery voltage is below the cutoﬀ voltage
When the ESC temperature is 110 °C or higher
Peak current overWhen the motor locks
When no throttle signal is received for more than 0.25 sŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry : SBS-01ML for Pixhawk®
7KH6%60/GLVSOD\VWHOHPHWU\GDWDIURPWKHGURQHÀLJKWFRQWUROOHU3L[KDZN
S.BUS PortS.BUS2 PortTELEM PortS.BUS Port

Pixhawk

S.BUS2 Receiver
FutabaT16IZ SUPER◆ Register SBS-01ML to transmitter by method 1 or 2.
◆ Linkage menu → Sensor → 3/3

１. Registration to transmitter● Call page 3 of [Sensor].

Connect the SBS-01ML tothe transmitter as shown,then tap Register.
Registration is complete when
this screen appears

Connect the SBS-01ML to the S.I/F
connector on the back of the transmitter.
Complete registration and remove
SBS-01ML from the transmitter.

*Please note that the proper default slot for this accessory is number 16 (8-16).
This sensor uses eight slots. Being made to a start slot are 8 and 16.

2. Manual registration method◆ Linkage menu → Sensor

Tap 8 or 16 to display alist of sensors that can beregistered. Tap SBS-01ML
to register.

120 ‫ڀ‬The default slot for SBS-01ML is #16.
When using #8, change the SBS-01ML
slot according to the procedure on
page 98.

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

◆ SBS-01ML telemetry display screen
Displays the status of the drone. Alarm setting is also possible.
ŏ7DSWKH>6%60/@EXWWRQLQWKH7HOHPHWU\VFUHHQ
to call the setup screen shown below.
Tap to move to the GPS1 Satellites
setting page.
Tap to move to the GPS1 HDOP
setting page.

Display max / min value
Press and hold to reset.

Tap to move to the GPS2 Satellites
setting page.
Tap to move to the GPS2 HDOP
setting page.

Tap to move to the Altitudesetting page.
Tap to move to the Ground
Speed setting page.

Display max / min value
Press and hold to reset.

Tap to move to the Air speed
setting page.
Tap to move to the Voltage 1
setting page.

Tap to move to the Current 1
setting page.
Tap to move to the Voltage 2
setting page.

Display max / min value
Press and hold to reset.

Tap to move to the Current 2
setting page.

Item%HIRUHFRQQHFWLQJPDNHVXUHWKDWWKHWHOHPHWU\WHUPLQDOFRPPXQLFDWLRQVSHHG
RIWKHÀLJKWFRQWUROOHULVVHWWRESV 'HIDXOWLVESV
3L[KDZN®  DQG 3L[KDZN®  DQG ODWHU KDYH GL൵HUHQW FRQQHFWRUV VR VHOHFW D
connection cable that matches the connector.

Number of
GPS1
GPS1 HDOP
Number of
GPS2
GPS2 HDOP
Altitude7KHGDWDLQWKHWDEOHRQWKHULJKWLVREWDLQHGDQGGLVSOD\HGXVLQJWKH0$9/LQN
SURWRFROIURPWKHÀLJKWFRQWUROOHU'HYLFHVWKDWGRQRWXVHWKHVHGDWDDUHQRW
supported.

Groundspeed
Air speed
Voltage 1

2SHUDWLRQZLWKDOO3L[KDZN®ÀLJKWFRQWUROOHUVLVQRWJXDUDQWHHG

Current 1
Voltage 2
Current 2

121 ‫ڀ‬MAVLink
Message

Field

GPS̲RAW̲INT

satellites̲visible

GPS̲RAW̲INT

ephGPS2̲RAWsatellites̲visible

GPS2̲RAWGLOBAL̲POSITION̲INT
VFR̲HUD
VFR̲HUDBATTERY̲STATUSBATTERY̲STATUSBATTERY̲STATUSBATTERY̲STATUSeph
relative̲alt
groundspeed
airspeedvoltages[0] (id = 0)
current̲battery (id = 0)
voltages[0] (id = 1)
current̲battery (id = 1)ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Tele. setting

Speech interval set , data logging of telemetry.

6HWWKHVSHHFKLQWHUYDORIWHOHPHWU\GDWDDQGWKH
logging of telemetry data to a microSD card atchosen intervals.
Telemetry data can be checked on your PC after aÀLJKW
ŏ7DSWKH>7HOHVHWWLQJ@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXto call the setup screen shown below.
Sets the speech interval

ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

Initial value: 0 sec.
Adjustment range 0-30 sec.

Telemetry data log function
Telemetry data has been adapted to the log function which is recorded at the microSD card.
【Setting method】① Open the linkage menu Tele. setting screen.
② Log recording can be started and stopped by operating a switch. The Logging switch is selected.
③ The log output interval can be set.
* The data to be recorded is updated at the time set by Linkage menu → System Type screen D/L interval. For
example, when the log output interval is 1 second and the D/L interval is 2 seconds the same data is overlapped andrecorded twice.
【Operation method】① Insert the microSD card into the card slot.
② Set the switch set by Log Start/Stop Switch to ON. A beep sounds and a log ﬁle is created and recording of thetelemetry data begins.

Absolutely never remove the microSD card while log data is being recorded.
③ Set the switch set by Logging switch to OFF. A beeping sound is generated and recording of the telemetry data stops.
④ Turn off the transmitter power and remove the microSD card.
■ Log ﬁleA log ﬁle is created in the microSD card LOG folder. Two ﬁles with the same ﬁlename, but a different extension are
created. (Example: 00001234.FLI, 00001234.FLD)■ Extension FLI: Slot allocation information ﬁle■ Extension FLD: Log data ﬁle*When copying or moving a log ﬁle, always select both the .FLI ﬁle and .FLD ﬁle.
Log ﬁles can be converted to CSV format by using the telemetry log converter available at the Futaba website.
■ Notes◇ Altimeter altitude data and GPS distance and altitude data output with the point that time logging started as thereference (0 m). When the transmitter preset position and the log start position are different, the transmitter display
and the log data display will also be different. The altitude and distance from the take-off position can be recorded bystarting logging immediately after take-off.
◇ The transmitter gear ratio or number of ﬁns setting is not reﬂected in the speedometer log data (speed). Multiply thegear ratio or number of ﬁns by the speed data.
◇ When the microSD card becomes full, recording stops and does not resume even if logging is restarted.

122 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Telemetry Alarm Duration and Repeat time
The repeat time and duration time for the telemetry alarm (buzzer, vibration and speech) can be set.

ŏ 7DS WKH >7HOHPHWU\ 6HWWLQJ@ EXWWRQ LQ WKH /LQNDJH
menu to call the setup screen shown below.

Duration is not displayed when
Repeat is INH.

Duration
It is an alarm output time.
Setting range：1 s 〜 30 s
Initial value：INH

Repeat
It is a repeat time of an alarm
output.
Setting range：INH，1 s 〜 240 s
Initial value：INH

Duration value has to be less than
repeat value.
Duration time is extended when theother alarm event occurs.

žŧƘƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƄƑƇŃŵƈƓƈƄƗŃƗƌƐƈŃƉƒƕŃŷƈƏƈƐƈƗƕƜŃŤƏƄƕƐƀ
e.g. Repeat time is 8 seconds and Duration time is 5 seconds.
Repeat time 8s
Alarm
output

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Duration time 5s

123 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Trainer system starting and setting

Trainer

T16IZ SUPER trainer system makes it possible
IRU WKH LQVWUXFWRU WR FKRRVH ZKLFK FKDQQHOV DQGRSHUDWLRQ PRGHV FDQ  EH XVHG LQ WKH VWXGHQW V
transmitter. The function and rate of each channel
can be set. The training method can also be matched
WRWKHVWXGHQW VVNLOOOHYHO7ZRWUDQVPLWWHUVPXVWEHFRQQHFWHGE\DQRSWLRQDO7UDLQHU&RUGDQGWKH,QVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUVKRXOGEHSURJUDPPHGIRU
WUDLQHURSHUDWLRQDVGHVFULEHGEHORZ
:KHQWKH,QVWUXFWRUDFWLYDWHVWKHWUDLQHUVZLWFKWKH
VWXGHQWKDVFRQWURORIWKHDLUFUDIW LI0,;)81&
1250PRGHLVWXUQHGRQWKH,QVWUXFWRUFDQPDNHFRUUHFWLRQVZKLOHWKHVWXGHQWKDVFRQWURO :KHQ
WKHVZLWFKLVUHOHDVHGWKH,QVWUXFWRUUHJDLQVFRQWURO
This is very useful if the student gets the aircraft
into an undesirable situation.
ŏ6HWWLQJGDWDDUHVWRUHGWRPRGHOGDWD
ŏ6WXGHQWUDWHFDQEHDGMXVWHGDW0,;)81&
NORM mode.
ŏ$FWLYDWHGVWXGHQWFKDQQHOVFDQEHVHOHFWHG
by switches.

Note:7KLVWUDLQHUV\VWHPFDQEHXVHGLQWKHIROORZLQJmanner:1. With the T16IZ SUPER transmitter and a conventional
WUDQVPLWWHU LI WKH FKDQQHO RUGHU LV GLIIHUHQW LW LV
necessary to match the channel order before using thisfunction.
 <RXFDQVHOHFWWKHFKDQQHORILQSXWGDWDIURPVWXGHQW VWUDQVPLWWHULQWKH)81&RU0,;PRGH
:KHQ WKH7,= 683(5 LV XVHG DV WKH LQVWUXFWRU¶VWUDQVPLWWHU VHW WKH PRGXODWLRQ PRGH RI WKH VWXGHQW¶VWUDQVPLWWHUWR330
 ,I EHLQJ XVHG DV WKH VWXGHQW 7,= 683(5 FDQ EH
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHLQVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUZKLFKUHTXLUHVWKHVWXGHQW VPRGHWREH3307,=683(5DOZD\VVHQGV330PRGHVLJQDOIURPWKHWUDLQHUMDFN ,QWKHFDVHRIVWXGHQW VWUDQVPLWWHUVRWKHUWKDQ*+] %H VXUH WKDW DOO FKDQQHOV ZRUN FRUUHFWO\ LQ ERWKWUDQVPLWWHUVEHIRUHÀ\LQJ

Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:
Types of transmitters,QVWUXFWRU

Student,QVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUVHWWLQJV
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH mode6WXGHQW VWUDQVPLWWHUVHWWLQJV
System Type
Trainer setting
Mod. mode
CH modeMod. mode

Trainer Cords

7,=683(5); 7,=683(5);
76*7,=76= 76*7,=76=
76=70=
76=70=
70=
70=

Arbitrary7,=683(570=);7=
7)*
);

Arbitrary&+

3&0*
*

&+

330

7,=683(57)*);

Arbitrary

&+
8CH

)$6670/7
)$66708/7



Arbitrary

8CH

330





7)*

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary7)*

7-7-7.7-
T6L

Arbitrary

8CH

Arbitrary

7,=683(5Arbitrary&+

Arbitrary&+

7,=683(5Arbitrary&+

Arbitrary&+

7,=683(5Arbitrary

Arbitrary8CH7,=683(57,=683(57,=683(570=);7=
7)*
);7)*);
7&7&*7-
7&7&
7&7-7.
7-

7&7&7&7(;7(;
7&*7&

16CH

Arbitrary

124 ‫ڀ‬16CH

7)*DQG&Trainer Cords7)*DQG&
Trainer Cords

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŏ7DSWKH>7UDLQHU@EXWWRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

źƋƈƑŃƘƖƌƑƊŃƄƗŃƗƋƈŃƖƗƘƇƈƑƗŃƖƌƇƈ

źƋƈƑŃƘƖƌƑƊŃƄƗŃƗƋƈŃƗƈƄƆƋƈƕŃƖƌƇƈ

1. Select the mode.

1. Select the mode.

:KHQ FKDQJLQJ WKH PRGH WDS WR WKH LWHP \RX ZDQW WR
FKDQJHDQGFKDQJHWKHPRGHXVLQJWKHźźźŸŸŸEXWWRQV7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV7DSWKHVFUHHQWRFKDQJH
the mode.

:KHQ FKDQJLQJ WKH PRGH WDS WR WKH LWHP \RX ZDQW WR
FKDQJHDQGFKDQJHWKHPRGHXVLQJWKHźźźŸŸŸEXWWRQV7KHGLVSOD\EOLQNV7DSWKHVFUHHQWRFKDQJH
the mode.

"Teacher/Student": Select [Student].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[ACT].
"16/12/8 CH": When the student uses the
T16IZ SUPER, T14SG, T18SZ, T16IZ, T16SZ, T18MZ,
T32MZ select [16CH]. When the student uses
the T14MZ, T12Z, T12FG or FX-40, select [12CH].
Otherwise select [8CH].

"Teacher/Student": Select [Teacher].
"ACT/INH": Enable operation by changing to[OFF] or [ON].
"16/12/8 CHANNEL": When the student uses
the T16IZ SUPER (including the T18MZ, T32MZ,
T14SG) select [16CH]. Otherwise select [12CH]
or[8CH].

Note: In "student mode", only the teacherside can turn on and off the power to thestudent's transmitter. Keep the power switch
always at off position.

2. Select the trainer switch.
:KHQVHWWLQJRUFKDQJLQJWKHVZLWFKWDSWRWKH6:,7&+
LWHPFDOOWKHVZLWFKVHWXSVFUHHQDQGVHWWKHGHVLUHGVZLWFK
DQG212))GLUHFWLRQ

6HH 6ZLWFK VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG DW WKH HQG RI WKLVPDQXDOIRUVHOHFWLRQPHWKRGGHWDLOV
7KH VZLWFK PRGH FDQ DOVR EH VHOHFWHG ZKHQ VHWWLQJ WKH
21SRVLWLRQRQWKHVZLWFKVHWXSVFUHHQ:KHQ>1RUPDO@LV
VHOHFWHG QRUPDO 212)) RSHUDWLRQ LV SHUIRUPHG:KHQ
>$OWHUQDWH@ LV VHOHFWHG WKH WUDLQHU IXQFWLRQ LV DOWHUQDWHO\WXUQHG RQ DQG RII HDFK WLPH WKH VZLWFK LV RSHUDWHG7KLVDOORZVDOWHUQDWH212))VZLWFKLQJHYHQZKHQDPRPHQWDU\VZLWFK 6+ LVXVHG

 1RWH 7KH WUDLQHU IXQFWLRQ ZRQ·W EH WXUQHG
on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives
signals from the student's transmitter. Be
sure to confirm this after connecting yourtrainer cable.

125 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

3. Select the operating mode for each channel.

ŷƕƄƌƑƈƕŃƖƗƘƇƈƑƗŃƆƋƄƑƑƈƏŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃ
ƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑ
,QWUDLQLQJPRGHWKHLQVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUFDQ
SLFNXSWKHVWXGHQW VVLJQDORQERWKWKH)XQFWLRQ
DQG 0L[ FKDQQHOV7KDW PDNHV LW HDV\ IRU WKHWZRWUDQVPLWWHUVWRFRQQHFWHYHQLIWKHVWXGHQWDQG
LQVWUXFWRUKDYHVHWXSWKHLUWUDQVPLWWHUVGL൵HUHQWO\:KHQWKHLQVWUXFWRU VWUDQVPLWWHUPRGHLVVHWWR1250WKHVLJQDORIWKHVDPHFKDQQHORIWKHVWXGHQW VWUDQVPLWWHULV
RXWSXWDVLV 7KHVDPHDVEHIRUH "NORM": The model is controlled by signals
from the student transmitter.
"MIX" mode: The model is controlled bysignals from the teacher and student
transmitters. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"FUNC" mode (function mode):
The model is controlled by signals fromthe student transmitter with the teacher
AFR setting. (Reset the student's model data
to the default condition.)"OFF": Only the teacher side operates.
7KHVHWWLQJDERYHDOORZVVHWWLQJRIWKHVHUYRWKURZUHODWLYH
WR WKH DPRXQW RI VWXGHQW VLGH RSHUDWLRQ ZKHQ >0,;@ RU
>)81&@ZDVVHOHFWHG :KHQFKDQJLQJWKHUDWHXVHWKHʈʈʈ
ʆ ʆʆ EXWWRQ WR 7DS WKH >5DWH@ LWHP RI
the channel.
Setting range: -100~100
Initial value: 100:KHQWKHYDOXHLVWDSSHGWKHUDWHLVUHVHWWRWKHLQLWLDOYDOXH

4. Set the switch of each channel.
:KHQVHWWLQJWKHVZLWFKDWHDFKFKDQQHOWDSWRWKH6:
LWHP RI WKH FKDQQHO \RX ZDQW WR FKDQJH FDOO WKH VZLWFKVHWXSVFUHHQDQGVHOHFWWKHVZLWFK"--" : Always ON.
"SA"~"SH": The switch which enables student
side operation can be selected. (See "Switch
selection method" at the end of this manual
for selection method details.)ŷƕƄƌƑƈƕŃƆƒƑƑƈƆƗƒƕŃƓƒƚƈƕŃƖƘƓƓƏƜŃ
ƖƓƈƆƌƲƆƄƗƌƒƑ
7UDLQHU FRQQHFWRU WR VXSSO\ SRZHU WR H[WHUQDOHTXLSPHQWFRQQHFWHGWRWKHWUDLQHUFRQQHFWRUZKHQWXUQLQJRQWKHSRZHUE\SUHVVLQJWKHSRZHUVZLWFK
in the trainer student mode.
Futaba is not responsible for damage
sustained by combination with parts otherthan Futaba Genuine equipment.
When connecting Futaba transmitters to
the trainer code, do not operate the powerswitch on the student side transmitter andoperate the power switch on the teacherside transmitter as before. The student sidetransmitter turns power automatically in
conjunction with the teacher side.

126 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Mixing warning normal reset

Warning setting
7KHZDUQLQJGLVSOD\DWSRZHU21FDQEHWXUQHG
212))IRUHDFKIXQFWLRQ8VHE\VHWWLQJIXQFWLRQVZKLFKPD\EHGDQJHURXVLIRSHUDWHGDWSRZHU21
WR21,QLWLDOVHWWLQJLVDOO21 %X]]HU ŏ 7DS WKH >:DUQLQJ VHWWLQJ@ EXWWRQ LQ WKHLinkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR
Linkage menu

The settings can be changed
individually. When set to[Inhibit], a warning is not
displayed at power ON.

"Vibrator" type
If the following types are selected, the transmitter
will vibrate during the warning.

Type 1
Type 2Type 3WARNING
It is extremely dangerous tounnecessarily inhibit essential
warnings.
■ Careless spinning of propellers or rotors poses a
danger of serious injury or death.

127 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Original menu screen making

User menu setting*Any change made to data entered from the User menu orfrom the normal method of use are the same. Changes madeLQHLWKHUZD\DUHVDYHGLQWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHUPHPRU\

T16IZ SUPER has a menu for each of the
IROORZLQJ6\VWHP/LQNDJHDQG0RGHO$OVR
you can create a personalized User menu that can
include all of the menus that you use most often.
ŏ 7DS WKH >8VHU PHQX VHWWLQJ@ EXWWRQ LQ WKHLinkage menu to call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

Tap here to selectyour ﬁrst choice.

Once pressed, 3 pages of choices will be displayed.

When "---" is chosen,
it can be deleted.

Make your selection, press your choice and theﬁrst of your "User menu" will be entered.

ūƒƚŃƗƒŃƆƄƏƏŃƄŃŸƖƈƕŃƐƈƑƘ
1. From the home screen, press the U.MENU/MON. button.

From the home
screenHOME
screenFunction can becalled by a tap
Press the U.MENU/MON.
128 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Data reset

Model memory setting data reset. (by item)

7KLV IXQFWLRQ LV GHVLJQHG WR DOORZ \RX WR UHVHW
selected portions or all of the settings saved in
WKH DFWLYH PRGHO PHPRU\<RX PD\ LQGLYLGXDOO\FKRRVHWRUHVHWWKHIROORZLQJVHWVRIGDWD
Trim (All condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
$OO WKH FRQGLWLRQV RU WKH FRQGLWLRQ FXUUHQWO\EHLQJGLVSOD\HG WKHHQWLUHJURXSIRUJURXSVHWWLQJ 
can be selected.
*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Trim (Current and Group condition):
Reset the digital trim setting.
&XUUHQW FRQGLWLRQ JURXS FRQGLWLRQ FDQ EH
selected.

*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.
Model menu setting:
5HVHWVDOOWKHIXQFWLRQVLQWKH0RGHOPHQXH[FHSW
condition select.
All model setting:
5HVHWV DOO /LQNDJH DQG 0RGHO PHQX IXQFWLRQVH[FHSWIRUV\VWHPW\SHPRGHOVHOHFWPRGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQQDPHDQGWHOHPHWU\VHWWLQJ
Function Name:
A function name is reset.
Telemetry:
Reset the telemetry setting.

ŏ6HOHFW>'DWDUHVHW@DWWKHOLQNDJHPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR/LQNDJHPHQX

ŧƄƗƄŃƕƈƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
1. Tap to the item you want to reset and tap
the screen.
$FRQ¿UPDWLRQPHVVDJHDSSHDUV

2. Execute reset by tapping the "Yes".

[Trim (All condition)]: Resets only the Trim (allconditions)[Trim(Current and Group condition)]: Resets
only the data of Trim (condition in use and all
the conditions set to group mode)[Model menu setting]: Resets all the functionsin the model menu, except the condition
selection functions.
[All model setting]: Resets all the functions in
the linkage menu and model menu except
the frequency, model select, and modeltype functions.
[Function name]: Resets only the function
name functions.
[Telemetry]: Resets only the teremetryfunctions.

CAUTIONCAUTION

Never engage the Data reset function
while the engine is starting or the
motor drive wiring is connected.

Throttle Reverse■ Sudden, abrupt spinning of propellers or rotors isextremely dangerous.

■ Only the throttle channel (CH3) initial setting is
REV (reverse). Thoroughly check the Hi and Low
directions of the engine or motor used and be carefulthat they do not suddenly run at full speed. Even
after data reset, CH3 is reversed.

129 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰŲŧŨůŃŰŨűŸŃŋŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒŪƏƌƇƈƕŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŌ
7KHGHGLFDWHGPL[HVHWFXVDEOHZKHQDLUSODQH
or glider model type is selected are displayed
LQWKLV0RGHOPHQXIXQFWLRQVVHFWLRQ)LUVWXVH
WKH0RGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR
SUHVHW WKH PRGHO W\SH ZLQJ W\SH DQG WDLO W\SHPDWFKHGWRWKHIXVHODJHXVHG2WKHUVHWWLQJVUHVHWWKHGDWDXVHGLQPL[LQJIXQFWLRQHWF
These dedicated mixes can be set for each
IOLJKWFRQGLWLRQDVUHTXLUHG:KHQ\RXZDQWWR
XVHWKHV\VWHPE\VZLWFKLQJWKHVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ E\ VZLWFK RU VWLFN SRVLWLRQ XVH WKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV.
8SWRFRQGLWLRQVFDQEHXVHG
Note: The T16IZ SUPER is designed so that the
airplane and glider model types can handle aircraftof the same wing type.
The functions common to airplanes and gliders,
except some dedicated functions, are summarized
without regard to the model type.
The setting items are different, depending on thenumber of servos, etc. according to the wing typeused. The setup screens in the instruction manual
are typical examples.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŤƌƕƓƏƄƑƈŒŪƏƌƇƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition
delay can be set.

AFR
Dual rate
Program. mixes

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.
D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.
Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used foreach condition.
This function adjusts the left and right ailerons. Roll axis correction and fine

Aileron diﬀerential tuning with a VR are also possible. This is convenient when making settings[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]during ﬂight.

Flap setting

The ﬂaps can be adjusted independently. For a 4 ﬂaps model, the camber ﬂaps
can be mixed with the brake ﬂaps.

AIL → Camber ﬂap

This mix operates the camber flaps in the aileron mode. It improves the[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 2 ﬂaps or more]
operation characteristic of the roll axis.

AIL → Brake ﬂap

This mix operates the brake ﬂaps in the aileron mode. It improves the operation
characteristic of the roll axis.

[Airplane/glider, 4 ﬂaps or more]

Aileron → RudderThis mix is used when you want to operate the rudder at aileron operation.
Banking at a shallow bank angle is possible.

[Airplane/glider, general]

This mix is used when you want to the mix camber ﬂaps with elevator operation.

[Airplane/glider, 2 ﬂaps or more]

Elevator → Camber Lifting force can be increased at elevators up.

[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Camber mixing
Airbrake → ELE[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Camber ﬂap → ELE
Rudder → Aileron
Rudder → Elevator
Butterﬂy (Crow)

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the elevators.
This mix is used to correct operation of the airbrakes (spoilers) when landing.
This mix is used to correct for attitude changes when the camber ﬂaps are being
used.
This function is used to correct roll knife edge, etc. of stunt planes.
This function is used to correct roll maneuvers, knife edge, etc. of stunt planes.
This function is used when powerful brake operation is necessary.

[Airplane/glider, general][Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons + 1 ﬂap or more][Airplane/glider, general][Airplane, general][Glider, 2 ailerons or more]

Trim mix 1/2

The ailerons, elevators, and flaps trim offset rate can be called by switch orcondition selection.

Snap rollThis function selects the snap roll switch and adjusts the steering angle of eachrudder. Servo speed can also be adjusted.

Air brake

This function is used when airbrakes are necessary when landing or when diving,
etc. during ﬂight.

Gyro

This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro is used.

[Airplane/glider/multicopter, general]

Ailevator

This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons of models with elevator
speciﬁcations.

[Airplane/glider, elevator speciﬁcations]

Acceleration

Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden Elevator, Elevator → Camber,and Ail → Rudder.

[Airplane/glider general]Motor

The operation speed when the motor of F5B and other EP gliders is started byswitch can be set.

[Airplane/glider, general]

V-TailWingletGyro Setting[Glider general][Airplane general][Airplane, general]

This function adjusts the elevators and rudder of V-tail models.

[Airplane/glider, V-tail speciﬁcations]This function adjusts the left and right rudders of winglet models.

[Airplane/glider, winglet speciﬁcations]This function Futaba Airplane Gyro GYA553 Settings.

130 ‫ڀ‬[Airplane, general]ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

7KHIXQFWLRQVLQWKH0RGHOPHQXFDQEHXVHGE\VZLWFKLQJWKHVHWWLQJVRIXSWRIOLJKWFRQGLWLRQVE\XVLQJWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV$GGFRQGLWLRQVDVUHTXLUHG
:KHQ\RXGRQRWZDQWWRXVHWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWKLVVHWWLQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\,QWKLVFDVH
XVHWKHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDVVLJQHGDWLQLWLDOVHWWLQJŏ6LQFHVZLWFKLQJE\VWLFNDQGOHYHUSRVLWLRQLQ
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
ŏ $ &RQGLWLRQ 'HOD\ IXQFWLRQ FDQ EH VHW
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
ŏ :KHQ PXOWLSOH FRQGLWLRQV ZHUH VHW WKHLU
operation priority can be freely changed.
ŏ 7KH FRQGLWLRQ QDPH FDQ EH FKDQJHG 7KH
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easilyFRQÀUPHG

ŏ6HOHFW>&RQGLWLRQVHOHFW@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
2QO\WKHQXPEHURIEXWWRQVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH
FRQGLWLRQVZKLFKFDQEHDGGHGDUHGLVSOD\HG
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions/LVW
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

131 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa PD[LPXPGHOD\

132 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶAFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]$)5 IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG WR DGMXVW WKH WKURZ DQGRSHUDWLRQ FXUYH RI WKH VWLFN OHYHU DQG VZLWFKIXQFWLRQVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

Rate

100%

Rate

40%

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
WKHPD[LPXPWKURZ:KHQPL[LQJLVDSSOLHGIURP
RQH FKDQQHO WR DQRWKHU FKDQQHO ERWK FKDQQHOVFDQEHDGMXVWHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHE\DGMXVWLQJWKH
operation rate through the AFR function.
ŏ 2SHUDWLRQ FXUYH DGMXVWPHQW 7KUHH W\SHV
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
ŏ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW7KHRSHUDWLRQ
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

ŏ6HOHFW>$)5@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

133 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Dual rate100%'5FXUYHVZKLFKFDQEHVZLWFKHGE\VZLWFKHWF
FDQ EH DGGHG7KH FXUYH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG E\ WKHAFR function.
ŏ 8SWRUDWHVFDQEHDGGHGIRUHDFK
condition.
ŏ '5LVVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGLVQRW
UHÁHFWHGDWRWKHUFRQGLWLRQVŏ '5DWWKHWRSRIWKH'5OLVWKDVSULRULW\40%

ŏ6HOHFW>'XDOUDWH@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

134 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correct
XQGHVLUHGWHQGHQFLHVRIWKHDLUFUDIWDQGLWPD\DOVREHXVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJ
PHDQV WKDW WKH PRWLRQ RI D FRPPDQG FKDQQHOFDOOHGWKHPDVWHULVDGGHGWRWKHPRWLRQRIWKH
PL[HGFKDQQHOFDOOHGVODYH
<RXPD\FKRRVHWRKDYHWKH0DVWHUVWULPDGGHGWR
WKH6ODYHFKDQQHOUHVSRQVHLI\RXGHVLUH 7ULPVHWWLQJ  7KH PL[LQJ FXUYH FDQ EH FKDQJHG VR
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
H൵HFWLYHO\E\VHWWLQJWKH(;3(;33RLQWPRGHV

2൵VHWW\SHPL[LQJDSSOLHVD¿[HGR൵VHWRUSUHVHW
to the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
7KH3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJLQFOXGHVDSRZHUIXOOLQN
IXQFWLRQZKLFKDOORZV3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJWREH
OLQNHGZLWKWKHVSHFLDOPL[LQJIXQFWLRQVRUZLWKother programmable mixing functions. The link
IXQFWLRQFDQEHVHWXSIRU0DVWHUDQG6ODYHFKDQQHO
individually.

ŏ7DSWKH>3URJPL[HV@EXWWRQLQWKH0RGHOPHQXWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or oﬀset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Oﬀset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

135 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇƖ
ŏ*URXSVLQJOHPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQWKH*U
and Sngl modes.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
:KHQPL[LQJLQFOXGHVPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHWWKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>21@:KHQPL[LQJGRHVQRWLQFOXGHPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHW
WKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>2))@(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>21@
DQG>2))@
7KLVLVH൵HFWLYHZKHQWKHPDVWHUFKDQQHOLVVHWE\)XQFWLRQŏ0L[LQJPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

ŏ0L[LQJFXUYHW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

(DFK WLPH WKH EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG LW WRJJOHV EHWZHHQ WKH0L[LQJDQG2൵VHWPRGHV)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FXUYH VHWWLQJ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.

ŏ0L[LQJVHWXSVFUHHQVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

ŏ)LQHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJ
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>,1+@
DQG>212))@ŏ0L[LQJ 212)) VZLWFK VHWWLQJ DQG 212))
direction switching$Q 212)) VZLWFK LV QRW VHW HYHQ ZKHQ WKH IXQFWLRQ LV
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG VHH >6ZLWFK
VHWWLQJPHWKRG@DWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH¿QHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH
the description at the back of this manual.

ŏ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHHWKH
description at the back of this manual.
2IIVHW PL[LQJ FKDQJHV WKH VSHHG 8VH WKH 6SHHG ,Q DQG6SHHG2XWEXWWRQVWRUHDGMXVWWKHVSHHG
 7KHPL[LQJVZLWFKFDQVHWDGHOD\ZLWKDGLIIHUHQWUDWHDW
starting and stopping.
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVLQDFWLYHZKHQDPL[LQJVZLWFKLVQRWVHW

ŏ0DVWHU FKDQQHO VHWWLQJ H[FHSW RIIVHW W\SH
mixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 
0DVWHUFKDQQHOFRQWUROFDQEHVHWWRVWLFN95DQGRWKHUVLPSOHWUDYHOVZKLFKGRQRWLQFOXGH(QGSRLQW$)5'5
PL[LQJVHWWLQJHWF,QWKLVFDVHGLVSOD\WKH)XQFWLRQ+:!VFUHHQE\WDSSLQJWKH>6WLFN6ZLWFK'LDO@EXWWRQDQG
then select master channel side control.

ŏ6ODYHFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 

ŏ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ

136 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶAileron diﬀerential[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

The left and right aileron differential can be
DGMXVWHG LQGHSHQGHQWO\7KH GLIIHUHQWLDO UDWH FDQDOVR EH DGMXVWHG DFFRUGLQJ WR WKH IO\LQJ VWDWH E\VHWWLQJD¿QHWXQLQJ95
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)ŏ6HOHFW>$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDO@DWWKHPRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition name

Aileron differential

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Aileron left/rightadjustment*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

Fine tuning VR setting*The graph is operated by setting a VR, etc.

Aileron differential● Fine tuning VR operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ 7DS WR WKH DLOHURQ $,/  a   OHIW RU ULJKW 
setting item.
Adjust the aileron angles.
ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ WKH ILQH WXQLQJ 95 WDS WKH 
item and tap the screen to call the selection
VFUHHQDQGWKHQVHOHFWWKHÀQHWXQLQJ95
ŏ7KHÀQHWXQLQJUDWHFDQEHVHWE\FXUYH

137 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flap setting[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
JOLGHUÁDSVRUPRUH@

7KH XSGRZQ WUDYHO RI HDFK IODS FDPEHU IODSV)/3 EUDNH IODSV )/3  FDQ EH DGMXVWHG
LQGHSHQGHQWO\DWHDFKVHUYRDFFRUGLQJWRWKHZLQJW\SHŏ7KHRSHUDWLRQUHIHUHQFHSRLQWRIHDFKÁDSFDQEH
offsetFLP 4(Brake Flap)

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
FLP 1(Camber Flap)

7KHFDPEHUÀDSVRIDÀDSPRGHOFDQEHPL[HGZLWKWKHEUDNHÀDSV %UDNH)/3WRFDPEHU)/3

FLP 2(Camber Flap)ŏ$Q212))VZLWFKFDQEHVHW

ŏ6HOHFW>)ODSVHWWLQJ@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.

Currently selected condition name

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)(For more information, see
the description at the backof this manual.)

Up side/Down side
adjustment
Operation reference
point oﬀset
Camber ﬂap setting

Brake ﬂap setting

Operation is performed via the volume
switches, etc., set for each flap control of thefunction.

The operational volume
switch is set up by "Function"

Mixing
INH ⇔ ON

Up side/Down side
adjustment

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation reference
point oﬀset

Brake ﬂap to Camber ﬂap settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DSÁDS )/3 aXSRUGRZQDFFRUGLQJWR
the wing type.
Adjust the travel independently.
ŏ 7R RIIVHW WKH RSHUDWLRQ UHIHUHQFH SRLQW RI
HDFKÁDSWDSWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJRIIVHWLWHP
8VH WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆ ʆʆ EXWWRQ WRRIIVHWthe reference point.
ŏ:KHQXVLQJEUDNH)/3WRFDPEHU)/3PL[LQJ

*The display screen is an
example. The actual screen
depends on the ModelType.

tap the [INH] item and tap the screen. (ON isdisplayed.)
When setting a switch, tap the [--] item of
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

138 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

AIL → Camber ﬂap[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
JOLGHUDLOHURQVÁDSVRUPRUH

7KLVPL[RSHUDWHVWKHFDPEHUIODSV )/3 in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
LV PDQLSXODWHG WKH DLOHURQV DQG FDPEHU IODSV
perform aileron operation simultaneously andthe operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ7KHDLOHURQOHIWULJKWPL[LQJUDWHRIHDFKÁDSVHUYR
FDQEHÀQHWXQHGŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHWŏ$Q212))VZLWFKFDQEHVHW
ŏ/LQNLQJLVSRVVLEOH/LQNWKLVPL[WRRWKHUPL[HVŏ 6HOHFW >$,/ń&DPEHU IODS@ DW WKHmodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

FLP 1(Camber Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

FLP 2(Camber Flap)
AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameAIL

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

AIL

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] itemŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WKH >@ LWHP RI
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the the back of this manual.)ŏ7DSWKHOHIWRUULJKWLWHPRIHDFKÁDSVHUYR
Adjust the mixing rate.

:KHQ WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJHDGMXVWPHQWV FDQ EH PDGH E\ FKDQJLQJ WKH PL[LQJ UDWHSRODULW\ RU ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW SDJH(For a description of the mixing curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ7RVHWOLQNLQJWDSWKH>/LQN@LWHP
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

139 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
JOLGHUÁDSVRUPRUH

AIL → Brake ﬂap

7KLV PL[ RSHUDWHV WKH EUDNH IODSV )/3 in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick
LV PDQLSXODWHG WKH DLOHURQ DQG EUDNH IODSV
perform the aileron operation simultaneously
and the operation characteristic of the roll axis is
improved.
ŏ7KHDLOHURQOHIWDQGULJKWPL[LQJUDWHVFDQEH
DGMXVWHGIRUHDFKÁDSVHUYRŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ/LQNLQJFDQEHVHW/LQNWKLVPL[WRRWKHUPL[HVŏ 6HOHFW >$,/ń %UDNH IODS@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

FLP 3(Brake Flap)
AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 4(Chip Aileron)

Currently selected condition nameAIL

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

FLP 4(Brake Flap)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

AIL

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Adjustment of eachﬂap servo

To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item‫ ٴ‬ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DSWKH,1+LWHP
(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the at the back of this manual.)ŏ7DSWKHOHIWRUULJKWEXWWRQRIHDFKÁDSVHUYR
Adjust the mixing rate.

DGMXVWPHQWV FDQ EH PDGH E\ UHYHUVLQJ WKH PL[LQJ UDWHSRODULW\ RU ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ7RVHWOLQNLQJWDSWKH/LQNLWHP
Set it to ON and tap the screen.

:KHQ WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJH

140 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

Aileron → Rudder

8VHWKLVPL[ZKHQ\RXZDQWWRPL[WKHUXGGHUVZLWKDLOHURQRSHUDWLRQŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

(

AIL 2
(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

(

)

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ 6HOHFW >$LOHURQń 5XGGHU@ DW WKHmodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.
AileronRudder
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Currently selected condition name→

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Aileron → Rudder

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rateŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the back of this manual.
ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WR WKH )LQH 7XQLQJ"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be selected.
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting

method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)[Fine tuning VR operation mode]>/,1@ 0 L [ L Q J  U D W H     D W  F H Q W H U  R I  9 5 When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
>$7/@ 0L[LQJ UDWH  DW OHIW HQG RI 95
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
>$7/@ 0L[LQJ UDWH  DW ULJKW HQG RI 95
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

141 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Elevator → Camber [Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGZKHQ\RXZDQWWRPL[WKH
FDPEHUÀDSVZLWKHOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQ:KHQXVHGWKHÀDSVDUHORZHUHGE\XSHOHYDWRUDQGOLIWFDQ
be increased.

ŏ6HOHFW>(OHYDWRUń&DPEHU@DWWKHPRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Elevator → Camber
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Note: Tailless wing elevator can be operated
when this mix is activated.
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95

Currently selected condition name

● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

Elevator → Camber

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

Ailerons and ﬂaps rateadjustment

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Elevator → Camber

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Fine tuning VR setting

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Operation mode
Adjustment rateŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WKH >@ LWHP RI
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WKH )LQH WXQLQJ"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be
selected.
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQDOVREHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

142 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Camber mixing[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more

7KLV IXQFWLRQ DGMXVWV WKH UDWH RI FDPEHURSHUDWLRQ ZKLFK RSHUDWHV WKH ZLQJ FDPEHUDLOHURQV FDPEHU IODSV EUDNH IODSV  LQ WKHQHJDWLYH DQG SRVLWLYH GLUHFWLRQV 7KH DLOHURQ
IODS DQG HOHYDWRU UDWHV FDQ DOVR EH DGMXVWHG
LQGHSHQGHQWO\ E\ FXUYH DQG DWWLWXGH FKDQJHV
caused by camber operation can be corrected.
,QLWLDOVHWWLQJDVVLJQVFDPEHURSHUDWLRQWRVLGHOHYHU/6

ŏ7KHXSGRZQVLGHUDWHVRIWKHDLOHURQÁDSDQG
elevator servos can be adjusted by curve. Whenthe mixing direction is reversed by the linkage,adjustments can be made by changing themixing rate polarity (+ or -).
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ$GHOD\FDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ$FXW
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canbe set.
ŏ7KHVSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQÁDSDQGHOHYDWRUVHUYRV
can be set. (In side/Out side)ŏ6HOHFW>&DPEHUPL[LQJ@DWWKHPRGHO
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

Currently selected condition nameServo speed setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay setting

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Ailerons, ﬂaps
and elevators rateadjustment● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Overall adjustment by
Rate A and Rate B.

143 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D FRQGLWLRQ GHOD\ WDS WR WKH
[Condition delay] item.
Set the delay.

(Curve/rate setup screen)ŏ 7KH FXUYH DQG UDWH DUH DGMXVWHG E\ FDOOLQJthe aileron, flap, and elevator curve/ratescreens.
The rate and curve of each servo can be set
by calling each screen. (For a description of
the curve setting method, see the description
at the back of this manual.)
The servo speed can also be adjusted.

When setting a cut switch, tap [Cut-switch]and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the switch and set its
ON direction. (Always ON at [--] setting)(For a description of the condition delay
function, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

LS144 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Airbrake → ELE[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

AIR BRAKE

7KLV PL[ LV XVHG ZKHQ \RX ZDQW WR PL[ WKHHOHYDWRUV ZLWK DLUEUDNH VSRLOHU  RSHUDWLRQ ,W
raises the elevators to correct for dropping of thenose during airbrake operation.
7KLVIXQFWLRQGRHVQRWRSHUDWHZKHQDLUEUDNHLVQRWDVVLJQHG
DWWKH)XQFWLRQPHQXLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQX
ŏ7KH5DWHVLGH5DWHVLGHPL[LQJUDWHZLWKWKH
elevator servos can be adjusted.
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95

ŏ 6HOHFW >$LUEUDNHń (/(@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATORELEVATORELEVATOR 2

ELEVATOR 2*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

Currently selected condition name

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WKH >@ LWHP RI
the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the switch
and set its ON direction. (Always ON at "--"
setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.
ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WKH )LQH WXQLQJ"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen, and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set. The VR operation
mode can also be set.
 )RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHÀQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJ
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

145 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Camber ﬂap → ELE[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/
glider, DLOHURQVÁDSRUPRUH

7KLVPL[LQJLVXVHGWRFRUUHFWFKDQJHV HOHYDWRUGLUHFWLRQ JHQHUDWHGZKHQWKHFDPEHUÀDSV VSHHG
ÀDSV DUHXVHGFLP 1(Camber Flap)

ŏ7KHHOHYDWRUVHUYRVXSVLGHGRZQVLGHUDWHFDQEH
adjusted. When the mixing direction is reversedby the linkage, adjustments can be made bychanging the mixing rate polarity (+ or –).
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95

ŏ 6HOHFW >&DPEHU IODSń(/(@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

ELEVATOR 2

ELEVATORELEVATOR 2Currently selected condition nameCamber ﬂap → ELE● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].

AILVATOR

V-TAILELEVATOR

FLP 2(Camber Flap)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Camber ﬂap → ELE

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Adjustment ofelevator servo

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
Fine tuning
settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ7DSHOHYDWRUVHUYRV$GMXVWWKHPL[LQJUDWH

:KHQ WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJHDGMXVWPHQWV FDQ EH PDGH E\ FKDQJLQJ WKH PL[LQJ UDWHSRODULW\ RU± ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WKH )LQH WXQLQJ 
item and tap the screen to call the selection
screen, and then select the VR. The VR
operation mode can be selected.
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)

146 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder → Aileron[Corresponding model type]:
Airplane/glider, general

7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGZKHQ\RXZDQWWRPL[WKH
DLOHURQV ZLWK UXGGHU RSHUDWLRQ ,W LV XVHG ZKHQUXGGHU LV DSSOLHG GXULQJ UROO PDQHXYHUV NQLIH
HGJHHWFRIDFUREDWLFSODQHV,WFDQEHXVHGWREDQNVFDOHPRGHOVODUJHPRGHOVHWFOLNHDIXOO
size plane.

(ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ/LQNLQJFDQEHVHW/LQNWKLVPL[WRRWKHUPL[HVŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95

AIL1(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 1
Wingletat Flying wing

AIL 2(Main Aileron)
AIL 3(Chip Aileron)
RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing

)

(

)

V-TAILRUDDER 2
RUDDERRUDDERŏ6HOHFW>5XGGHUń$LOHURQ@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXCurrently selected condition nameand call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Left/right overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see back of this manual.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WR WKH )LQH WXQLQJ"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The
adjustment rate can be set.

The VR operation mode can also be set.
)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHÀQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJ
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the back of this manual.)ŏ :KHQ OLQNLQJ WDS WKH >/LQN@ LWHP  21 LV
displayed.)147 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder → Elevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

7KLV IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG ZKHQ \RX ZDQW WR PL[HOHYDWRURSHUDWLRQZLWKUXGGHURSHUDWLRQ,WLVXVHG
WR FRUUHFW XQGHVLUDEOH WHQGHQFLHV ZKHQ UXGGHU
LV DSSOLHG LQ UROO PDQHXYHUV NQLIH HGJH HWF RI
acrobatic planes.

ŏ/LQNFDQEHVHW/LQNVWKLVPL[LQJWRRWKHUPL[LQJVŏ7KHPL[LQJUDWHFDQEHÀQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95
(Fine tuning)ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ 6HOHFW >5XGGHUń(OHYDWRU@ DW WKHmodel menu and call the setup
screen shown below.

Currently selected condition name

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the backof this manual.)

Up/Down overall
adjustment at Rate A
and Rate B

Activate the function bytapping the [INH].
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.
To set linking, tap to
the [OFF] item

Fine tuning
settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ7DS>,1+@(ON is displayed.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D VZLWFK WDS WR WKH >@ LWHP
of the switch and tap the screen to call theselection screen. Then, select the switch andset its ON direction. (Always ON at "--" setting)(For a description of the switch selection
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ :KHQ VHWWLQJ D 95 WDS WKH )LQH WXQLQJ"--" item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and then select the VR. The

adjustment rate can be set.
The VR operation mode can also be set.
 )RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHÀQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJ
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHFDQEHVHW
(For a description of the curve setting
method, see the description at the back ofthis manual.)ŏ :KHQ OLQNLQJ WDS WKH >/LQN@ LWHP  21 LV
displayed.)

148 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Butterﬂy[Corresponding model type]: Glider, 2 ailerons or more

7KLVIXQFWLRQDOORZVSRZHUIXOEUDNHRSHUDWLRQ
by simultaneously raising the left and right
DLOHURQV DQG ORZHULQJ WKH IODSV FDPEHU IODSEUDNHÀDS 
7KLVVHWWLQJZLOODOORZWKHDLOHURQVWREHUDLVHGZKLOH WKH IODSV DUH VLPXOWDQHRXVO\ ORZHUHG
%XWWHUIO\ FURZ SURGXFHVDQH[WUHPHO\HIILFLHQW
landing configuration by accomplishing the
IROORZLQJ6ORZWKHDLUFUDIW·VYHORFLW\2. Provide washout at the wing tips to reduce
the tendency to tip stall.
3. Create more lift toward the center of the
ZLQJDOORZLQJLWWRÁ\DWDVORZHUVSHHG

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)ŏ0L[LQJGXULQJÁLJKWFDQEHWXUQHG212))E\
setting a switch. (Always ON at [--] setting)ŏ7KHEXWWHUÁ\RSHUDWLRQUHIHUHQFHSRLQWFDQEH
offset. When the screen is tapped with the offset
item selected when operated to the position to
be changed, the reference point is offset. If thereference point is offset too much, unexpected
operation may be performed.
ŏ7KHDLOHURQVDQGÁDSVRSHUDWLRQVSHHGFDQEH
adjusted. (In side/Out side)ŏ$GHOD\FDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ$FXW
switch which can turn OFF the delay function canalso be set.
ŏ7KHGLIIHUHQWLDOUDWHFDQEHDGMXVWHG
:KHQVHUYRELQGLQJRFFXUVZKHQVHWWLQJWKHDLOHURQVDQG
ÀDSVLQEXWWHUÀ\PL[LQJXVHWKH$)5IXQFWLRQWRDGMXVWWKH
rate.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the model type.

ŏ 6HOHFW >%XWWHUIO\@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

To next page

In speed

Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)
The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

Out speed
Condition delay setting

Condition delay cut
switchThe diﬀerential rate
can be adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）:KHQGL൵HUHQWLDOUDWHLV8SUDWHLVGHFUHDVHDQG'2:1
rate is increase.
:KHQGL൵HUHQWLDOUDWHLVWKHFDOFXODWLRQPHWKRGRI83'2:1DQGDGLUHFWLRQEHFRPHUHYHUVH
When offsetting the butterfly operationreference point, operate to the throttle
stick point you want to change and thentouch the Offset button. The reference
point displays 0%. When [Yes] is touched,
the reference point is changed. Then,"Initialize elevator curve?" appears,
allowing you to conﬁrm your setting.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

149 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
Select the Mixing RateAIL and FLP box. Adjust
the mixing rates.

Elevator rateadjustment(To elevator curve setup screen)

Fine tuning
setting*In case of tailless
wing not display.

(Elevator correction rate setup screen)

The oﬀset position isindicated by a red dottedline by an elevator curve.

Overall adjustment
by Rate A and Rate B

Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

FLP 4
FLP 3
(Brake Flap) (Brake Flap)
FLP 1
FLP 2
(Camber Flap)(Camber Flap)
AIL1
AIL 2
(Main Aileron)(Main Aileron)
AIL 3
AIL 4
(Chip Aileron)(Chip Aileron)
V-TAILELEVATORELEVATOR 2AILVATORELEVATOR

150 ‫ڀ‬ELEVATOR 2ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃƖƗƌƆƎŃƉƘƏƏŃƖƗƕƒƎƈŃŰŲŧŨ
ŏ0RGH$ŏ0RGH%(Normal)(Throttle stick full stroke MODE)ŏ 7KH EXWWHUIO\ RSHUDWLRQ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG ŏ ,W GRHV QRW UHYHUVH DW WKH QHXWUDO SRVLWLRQ
at the neutral position (50) of the throttle
so you can set the butterfly operation start
stick.
point with the full stroke of the throttle stick.

At oﬀset 20

At oﬀset 20

At oﬀset 70

At oﬀset 70

The direction of butterﬂy motion is reversed.

The direction of butterﬂy motion is not reversed.

151 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]: Glider, general

Trim mix 1/2

7KHVHIXQFWLRQVFDOOWKHDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVDQG
ÀDSV FDPEHUÀDSVEUDNHÀDSV WULPR൵VHWUDWHV
SUHVHWDFFRUGLQJWRWKHÀLJKWVWDWH
7KH DPRXQW RI DLOHURQV HOHYDWRU DQG IODSVFDPEHUÀDSEUDNHÀDS WULPR൵VHWFDQEHVHWWRD
VZLWFKAs an example Trim mix 1 can be set up for
ODXQFKLQJZLWKVSHHGÀDSVDQGDLOHURQVGURSSHG
and a slight amount of up elevator. Trim mix
2 FDQ EH XVHG IRU KLJK VSHHG IO\LQJ ZLWK ERWKDLOHURQVDQGVSHHGÀDSVUHÀH[HGVOLJKWO\DQGDELWRIGRZQHOHYDWRU
The trim functions can be activated duringÀLJKWE\VHWWLQJDVZLWFK7RSUHYHQWVXGGHQWULPFKDQJHVZKHQVZLWFKLQJÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDGHOD\
FDQEHVHWWRSURYLGHDVPRRWKWUDQVLWLRQEHWZHHQ
WKHWZR7ULPPL[ZLOOKDYHSULRULW\RYHU7ULP
mix 1.

Example1. Move to the [INH] item. Set the trim mix function to[ON].
:KHQVHSDUDWLQJWKHVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQPRYHWR
WKH>*URXS@LWHPDQGVHWLWWR>6LQJOH@
2. Select the ON/OFF switch.
3. Select the [Manual] or [Auto] mode.
In the [Auto] mode, also select an auto SW. This
switch can be linked to a stick, etc.
<Speed>
In: The operation speed at switch ON can be set.
Out: The return speed at switch OFF can be set.
<Fine Tuning>
The offset rate can be varied in the Fine Tuning
numeric range set at screen by VR, etc. selection.
<Condition Delay>:KHQÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDUHVHWWKHRSHUDWLRQVSHHG
can be set for each condition. Condition delay
operation can be interrupted and each rudder
quickly returned to its original position by selecting a
cut switch.
*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.

ŏ 6HOHFW >7ULP PL[ RU @ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

To next page

The ON/OFF switch of
mixing is chosen.

In speed

Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Trim mix function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed

Condition delay cut
switchCondition delay setting

When a ﬁne tuning VR
is set, the trim ratesof ailerons, ﬂaps andelevators can be adjusted.

（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

The oﬀset rate of ailerons, ﬂaps and elevators can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding setting item. Adjust the rate.

152 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶSnap roll

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general(Example) Setting example for F3A

7KLVIXQFWLRQVHOHFWVWKHVZLWFKDQGUDWHDGMXVWPHQWRIHDFKUXGGHU DLOHURQVHOHYDWRUVRUÀDSV ZKHQ
a snap roll is performed.
ŏ)RXUVQDSUROOGLUHFWLRQVFDQEHVHW 5LJKWXS
right/down, left/up, left/down)ŏ2SHUDWLRQPRGH:KHQ>0DVWHU@PRGHLVVHOHFWHG
the Snap Roll function is turned ON/OFF by masterswitch in the state in which the direction switch
was switched to the direction in which you wantto snap roll. When [Single] mode is selected, snap
roll in each direction can be executed by meansof independent switches.
ŏ$VDIHW\VZLWFKFDQEHVHW$VDVDIHW\PHDVXUH
the switch can be set so that snap roll is not
executed when, for instance, the landing
gear is lowered, even if the switch is turned on
accidentally. The snap roll switch is activated only
when the safety switch is ON.
ŏ7KHRSHUDWLRQVSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQG
ÁDSVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHGIRUHDFKVQDSUROO
direction. (In side/out side)ŏ0RGH>0DVWHU@ŏ6DIHW\6:>6:*@ 6DIHW\PHDVXUH
ŏ  0 D V W H U  6 :   > 6 :  + @  0 D L Q  V Z L W F K  I R Uexecuting snap roll)ŏ'LUHFWLRQVZLWFKHV
7KHVQDSUROOXSVLGHOHIWDQGULJKWDQGGRZQVLGHOHIWDQG
ULJKWGLUHFWLRQVZLWFKHVDUHVHOHFWHGKHUH

Right/Up: [SW-D] OFF-OFF-ON
Right/Down: [SW-D] ON-OFF-OFF
Left/Up: [SW-A] OFF-OFF-ON
Left/Down: [SW-A] ON-OFF-OFFŏ6SHHGDGMXVWPHQW
The operation speed of each control
surface when the snap switch is ON canbe changed and snap roll executed bystick while there is switch operation can be
performed.

ŏ 6HOHFW >6QDS UROO@ DW WKH PRGHO PHQX
and call the setup screen shown
The ON/OFF switch
below.

of snap roll is chosen.

The safety switch is
chosen.
To next page

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
Master or Single ischosenCondition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)

Snap rolldirections

Master mode : Direction
switches
Single mode : Snap rollswitches

Aileron, elevator and
Rudder rate adjustment

In speed

Out speed（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

153 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Air brake[Corresponding model type]: Airplane, general

7KLV IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG ZKHQ DQ DLU EUDNH LV
QHFHVVDU\ZKHQODQGLQJRUGLYLQJHWF
7KH SUHVHW HOHYDWRUV DQG IODSV FDPEHU IODSEUDNHIODS RIIVHWDPRXQWFDQEHDFWLYDWHGE\DVZLWFK
7KHR൵VHWDPRXQWRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQG
IODSVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHGDVQHHGHG$OVRWKH
VSHHGRIWKHDLOHURQHOHYDWRUDQGÀDSVHUYRVFDQ
EHDGMXVWHG ,QVLGH2XWVLGH $GHOD\FDQEHVHW
IRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGD&XWVZLWFKZKLFKZLOOWXUQ2))WKHGHOD\FDQEHFKRVHQ7ULPDPRXQWVFDQEHILQHWXQHGE\VHWWLQJD95<RXFDQDOVR
VHWWKH$XWR0RGHZKLFKZLOOOLQN$LUEUDNHWRDVWLFNVZLWFKRUGLDO$VHSDUDWHVWLFNVZLWFKRUGLDOFDQDOVREHVHWDVWKH212))VZLWFK

Elevator
Aileron 2
Aileron 1

ŏ6HOHFW>$LUEUDNH@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQGFDOOWKH
setup screen shown below.

*The display screen is an example. The actual
screen depends on the Model Type.
To next page

When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

In speed

The ON/OFF switch of
air brake is chosen.
Manual/Auto mode
selection
Manual: Switches thefunction ON/OFF byswitchAuto: Air brake function
call can be linked to a
stick, etc. A stick switch,etc. separate from thefunction ON/OFF switch
is set.

Out speed
Condition delay
setting and cut switch
setting.

Fine tuning setting（First）0 〜 27
（Slowly）

Offset：The offset
rate of ailerons, flaps,and elevators can be
a d j u s t e d . Ta p t o t h ecorresponding setting
item. Adjust the rate.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Fine tuning：When a ﬁnetuning VR is set on thenext page, the ailerons',
ﬂaps', and elevators' trim
rates can be adjusted.
Tap to the corresponding
setting item. Adjust therate.

The value inside theparentheses shows thecurrent rudder position.

154 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider/multicopter, general

Gyro

7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGZKHQD*<$6HULHVJ\UR
LV XVHG WR VWDELOL]H WKH DLUFUDIW V DWWLWXGH 7KHVHQVLWLYLW\DQGRSHUDWLRQPRGH 1RUPDOPRGH*<
PRGH FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKDVZLWFK
ŏ7KUHHUDWHV 5DWH5DWH5DWH FDQEH
switched.
ŏ8SWRD[HV *\UR*\UR*\UR FDQEH
simultaneously controlled.

*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use the)XQFWLRQPHQXRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWRDVVLJQWKHVHQVLWLYLW\FKDQQHO *\UR*\UR*\UR  XVHG WR D YDFDQW FKDQQHObeforehand.
6HW>&RQWURO@DQG>7ULP@RWKHUWKDQ)XQFWLRQWR>@ŏ6HOHFW>*\UR@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

ŏ7KUHHUDWHV 5DWH5DWH5DWH FDQEHXVHGTap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
ŏ:KHQXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQ7DS>,1+@ŏ :KHQ D )XWDED *<$ J\UR LV XVHG ZKHQ >*<@ W\SH LV VHOHFWHG WKHsensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
ŏ:KHQVHWWLQJDVZLWFKWDSWKH6ZLWFKLWHPDQGWDSWKHEXWWRQWRFDOO
the selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)

155 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

(Example) Setting three axis using a GYA450 and GYA451 (2)ŏ:LQJW\SH$LOHURQVHUYRVPRXQWHGIXVHODJHVHOHFWHG
ŏ6HW 5CH → Gyro (GYA451AIL), 7CH → Gyro2 (GYA451ELE), 8CH → Gyro3 (GYA450RUD), Control and Trim → "--" : at
the Function menu of the Linkage menu.
ŏ*\URVHWWLQJRIWKH0RGHOPHQX

Rate
1
2
3

ACT
OFF/ON
INH
ON/OFF

Type
GY

SwitchSE

Gyro
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ２
AVCS : 60%

Gyro ３
AVCS : 60%

GY

SENormal : 60%

Normal : 60%

Normal : 60%

6HWVRWKDW5DWHLVWXUQHGRQDWWKHEDFNSRVLWLRQRIVZLWFK(DQG5DWHLVWXUQHG21DWWKHIURQWSRVLWLRQ6LQFHVZLWFK(LVWXUQHG2))DWWKHFHQWHU5DWHUHPDLQV>,1+@
S.BUS Receiver
GYA451

Aileron servo

GYA451

AVCS

Elevator servo

S.BUS2 port

GAIN 0％NORMALGYA450

When AVCS is used werecommend that thesensitivity CH be set tothe 3-position.

Rudder servo

156 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶAilevator[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type(൵HFWLYHRQO\ZKHQVHUYRVXVHGDWWKHHOHYDWRUVAilevator

This function improves the operating performanceof the roll axis by operating the elevators asailerons.
$LOHYDWRU LV ZKHUH HDFK HOHYDWRU LQ D VWDQGDUG
FRQYHQWLRQDO RUYWDLOPRYHVLQGHSHQGHQWO\OLNHDLOHURQVRQDZLQJ,QDGGLWLRQWRHDFKHOHYDWRUVLGHPRYLQJXSDQGGRZQWRJHWKHUHDFKVLGHPRYHVLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVZKHQPRYLQJDVDQDLOHYDWRU
2Q D9WDLO WKLV LV DOVR NQRZQ DV D UXGGHUYDWRU
DV WKH\ FDQ VHUYH WKH VDPH SXUSRVH 7\SLFDOO\both ailevator and ailerons are coupled together to
PD[LPL]H UROO SHUIRUPDQFH HVSHFLDOO\ RQ ODUJHUZLQJVSDQSODQHVELEVATOR(AILERON 5)

ELEVATOR 2(AILERON 6)

Note: Select ailevator as the Model type at theModel type screen. This changes the output
channel. Check the Function menu.

ŏ6HOHFW>$LOHYDWRU@DWWKHPRGHO
menu and call the setup screen
shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
The up and down rates of the left andright elevators when the elevator stick ismanipulated can be individually adjusted.

(Aileron function)
When the elevators are used asailerons, aileron travel of the left andright elevators can be adjusted.

ŏ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
,I WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJHDGMXVWPHQWV FDQ EH PDGH E\ FKDQJLQJ WKH PL[LQJ UDWHSRODULW\ RU ,IDODUJHYDOXHRIWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUH
PRYHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHWKHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXW
of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

157 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Acceleration[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider general$FFHOHUDWLRQ VHWWLQJ FDQ EH SHUIRUPHG DW (OHYDWRU
(OHYDWRU ĺ &DPEHU DQG$LOHURQ ĺ 5XGGHU *OLGHU
RQO\
ŏ7KLVVHWWLQJLVGLYLGHGLQWRHOHYDWRUVHWWLQJDQGFDPEHU
setting. The setting method is the same.
ŏ&DPEHUVHWWLQJVHWVWKHDFFHOHUDWLRQIXQFWLRQIRU(OH
to camber mixing. Setting is not performed when Ele tocamber mixing is INH.
ŏ7KHDFFHOHUDWLRQIXQFWLRQFDQEHVHWIRUERWKWKHXS
side and down side.
ŏ)XQFWLRQ212))VZLWFKVHWWLQJLVSHUIRUPHGIRU
$LOHURQń5XGGHUVHWWLQJRQO\ŏ$LOHURQń5XGGHUVHWWLQJLVDFFHOHUDWLRQIXQFWLRQVHWWLQJIRU$LOHURQń5XGGHUPL[LQJ,WLVQRWSHUIRUPHGZKHQ$LOHURQń5XGGHUPL[LQJLV,1+

ŏ 6HOHFW >$FFHOHUDWLRQ@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
2/3 : Elevator → Camber
3/3 : Aileron → Rudder
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ $FFHOHUDWLRQUDWHVHWWLQJ 5DWH
ŏ 7KH UHWXUQ WLPH DIWHU RSHUDWLRQ 'DPSLQJ 
can be set.
ŏ 7 K H  R S H U D W L R Q  S R L Q W  D W  D F F H O H U D W L R Qand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.

Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the servo stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

158 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, general

Motor

7KLVIXQFWLRQOHWV\RXVHWWKHRSHUDWLRQVSHHGZKHQWKHPRWRURIDQ)%RURWKHU(3JOLGHULVVWDUWHGE\VZLWFK7KHRSHUDWLRQVSHHGFDQEHVHWLQUDQJHVRIVORZVSHHGÀLJKWDQGKLJKVSHHGÀLJKW 6SHHG
6SHHG 7KLVIXQFWLRQFDQDOVREHRSHUDWHGDVD
VDIHW\IXQFWLRQE\VHWWLQJVZLWFKHVŏ7KHLQVLGHDQGRXWVLGHRSHUDWLQJVSHHGVFDQEH
adjusted independently in 2 ranges (Speed 1/
Speed 2).
ŏ7KHERXQGDU\EHWZHHQWKHUDQJHVFDQEHVHW(From speed 1 to speed 2)

ŏ6HOHFW>0RWRU@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.

ŏ7KHVHWRSHUDWLRQVSHHGRSHUDWLRQFDQEH
activated at initial operation only. (1 time
operation) However, operation can be repeatedby setting the switch to OFF before operation isÀQLVKHG:KHQ\RXZDQWWRUHVHWWLPHRSHUDWLRQ
set the ACT/INH item to [INH] and then reset it to[ON].
ŏ7KHPRWRU &+ LVFRQWUROOHGE\6:* ,QLWLDO
setting) When changing the switch or stick which
FRQWUROVWKHPRWRUÀUVWFKDQJH)XQFWLRQRIWKH
Linkage menu.
1RWH :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ DOZD\V FKHFN LQLWLDORSHUDWLRQZLWKWKHSURSHOOHUUHPRYHG

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

ŏ:KHQXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQ7DS>,1+@ŏ*URXSVLQJOHPRGHVZLWFKLQJ
(For more information, see the description
at the back of this manual.)ŏ6ZLWFKA switch that turns the function itself
ON/OFF can be selected.
ŏ0RWRURIISRVLWLRQ
Tap the motor off button when [SW-G] is in
the motor OFF position you want to set. The
direction of the motor switch is memorized.
The screen graph display OFF direction alsochanges.

ŏ:KHQXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQ7DS>,1+@ŏ:KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKH2QHWLPHPRGHtap to the [One time] item and tap thescreen.
ŏ6SHHGWR
The speed 1 and speed 2 region boundary
can be changed,ŏ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW
The speed when speed 1 and speed 2 are
ON (In) and OFF (Out) can be adjusted.

Notesŏ)LUVWGHFLGHWKHPRWRU2))GLUHFWLRQDQGWKHQ
set the speed. When you want to reset the
motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.
ŏ:HUHFRPPHQGWKDWPRWRU2))EHVHWLQ
combination with F/S.
ŏ6HWWKHEDVLFRSHUDWLRQGLUHFWLRQZLWKWKHUHYHUVH
function to match the ESC used.
ŏ$OZD\VVHWWKHPRWRU2))SRVLWLRQ

159 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, Tail type V-tailV-Tail7KLVIXQFWLRQOHWV\RXDGMXVWIRUOHIWDQGULJKWUXGGHU
angle changes at elevator and rudder operation of aV-tail airplane.
9WDLO LV ZKHQ  VHUYRV DUH XVHG WRJHWKHU WR FRQWURO
rudder movement as elevators. In addition to eachUXGGHU VLGH PRYLQJ XS DQG GRZQ WRJHWKHU HDFK VLGH
PRYHVLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVZKHQPRYLQJDVHOHYDWRUV
2QD9WDLOWKLVLVDOVRNQRZQDVDUXGGHUYDWRUDVWKH\
can serve the same purpose.

ELEVATOR(RUDDER 2)

RUDDER(ELEVATOR 2)

ŏ6HOHFW>97DLO@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Elevator function)
Up and down travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 elevator operation(Rudder function)
Left and right travel adjustment at
CH1 and CH2 rudder operationŏ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
$GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
,I WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJHDGMXVWPHQWVFDQEHPDGHE\FKDQJLQJWKHPL[LQJUDWHSRODULW\ RU ,IDODUJHYDOXHRIWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUH
PRYHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHWKHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXW
of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.

160 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Winglet[Corresponding model type]: Airplane/glider, winglet(2RUD)

7KLV IXQFWLRQ DGMXVWV WKH OHIW DQG ULJKW UXGGHUDQJOHVRIDLUSODQHVZLWKZLQJOHWV
,W FDQ EH XVHG IRU VSHFLDO DLUSODQHV ZLWK WZRUXGGHUV 7KH DPRXQW RI PRYHPHQW RI WKH WZRPRXQWHGUXGGHUVHUYRVFDQEHDGMXVWHGVHSDUDWHO\
7ZRVHUYRVDUHRSHUDWHGZLWKRQHUXGGHUVWLFNRUDDER 1
Winglet(at Flying
wing )RUDDER 2
Wingletat Flying wing()ŏ6HOHFW>:LQJOHW@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Condition group/
single mode
selection (Gr. /Sngl)(Rudder 1/2)
The travel at rudder stick left and right
operation can be individually set.

ŏ7UDYHODGMXVWPHQW
Tap to the item you want to adjust.
 $GMXVWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
,I WKH PL[LQJ GLUHFWLRQ LV UHYHUVHG E\ WKH OLQNDJHDGMXVWPHQWVFDQEHPDGHE\FKDQJLQJWKHPL[LQJUDWHSRODULW\ RU 

161 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
GYA553 setting
By connecting the T16IZ SUPER and the
6-axis gyro GYA553 for airplanes, you can
set the GYA553.

Connection T16IZ SUPER and GYA553

T16IZ SUPER

S.I/F

CGY 接続コード（ジャイロに付属）

Reciver Connection Cable(included with gyro)

GYA553

CAUTIONBe sure to connect and disconnect the GYA553
and T16IZ SUPER connection cable with thepower oﬀ.

162 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553

SETTING1

1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Airplane Model Menu
* At this time, if Gyro is not connected to
T16IZ SUPER by wire, this screen appears.

2
When "GY Settings Transfer" isselected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ SUPER is written to the gyro.

2. Select "Start"

Tap "Yes" to display the GYA553 data saved
in T16IZ SUPER.

Select "Start"
This will download the gyro data to
the T16IZ SUPER.

3

To Basic menu

3. Home screen is displayed◆ When copying data from Gyro A to Gyro B

Connect the gyro A to the T16IZ SUPER and press [Start]. (Enter the data of A into T16IZ SUPER)

If you press Start here, the B data will be download to the
T16IZ SUPER and the A data will be lost.

Connect Gyro B to T16IZ SUPER and press [GY Settings Transfer]. (Put data on A into gyro B)

163 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Home screen
2QWKHKRPHVFUHHQEDVLFLQIRUPDWLRQVXFKDVJ\URRSHUDWLRQPRGH
VHQVLWLYLW\EDWWHU\YROWDJHDUHGLVSOD\HG
Battery voltage
Displays the voltage of thereceiver battery connected to
GYA.

Gyro operation mode / Gyro
gain
Displays "AVCS" or "Normal"
opera-tion mode and gyro
gain of aileron (roll), elevator(pitch) and rudder (yaw) axis.

GYA553 Software version
The software version of
the connected GYA553 isdisplayed.

Basic menu
Home screen

Basic menu

◆ Conﬁg◆ S.BUS basic

164 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Conﬁg

Conﬁg 1/7 Gyro set mounting direction

6HWWKHPRXQWLQJGLUHFWLRQRI*<$6HWPRXQWLQJGLUHFWLRQZLWKUHIHUHQFHWR¿JXUHEHORZ

Conﬁg 1/7 WING/TAIL
6HWZLWKWKHZLQJW\SHWDLOW\SHRI*<$7KHZLQJW\SHWDLOW\SHRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVQRWXVHGDQGLVQRUPDO
・7XUQR൵WKHHOHYRQ9WDLOPL[LQJRQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUVLGH
・'RQRWXVHWUDQVPLWWHUVXEWULP$GMXVWXVLQJWKHJ\URQHXWUDOR൵VHW
・:KHQXVLQJWKH6%86VHUYR\RXFDQDOVRXVHWKHQHXWUDOR൵VHWIXQFWLRQRIWKH6%86VHUYRVHWWLQJSDUDPHWHUV

Select wing type

Select tail type165 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Conﬁg

Conﬁg 1/7 Servo type

Select the servo type according to the servo to be
used.
Digital servo → DG : 285 Hz
Analog servo → AN : 70 Hz
The stability of digital-servo mode of a flightincreases in order to perform a high-speed control
action.
Digital servo

Conﬁg

1/7

Analog servo

SB/R2 OUT
Select the SB/R2 port.

S.BUS

Rudder 2

Throttle

S.BUS devices can beconnected to this port.

When using two rudder servos
Program box
MODE LEDDATA LED

MODE SW

DATA SW

Head direction markS.BUS 2

AileronS.BUS/Rudder 2

Aileron 2

RudderElevator

Elevator 2

166 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Conﬁg

Conﬁg

2/7 Gyro direction,WLVWKHGLUHFWLRQVHWWWLQJRIWKHJ\UR%HFDUHIXODVLWZLOOFUDVKLIWKHGLUHFWLRQLVUHYHUVHG
)RU GXDO DLOHURQ GXDO HOHYDWRU DQG GXDO UXGGHU DLUFUDIW FKHFN WKH RSHUDWLQJ GLUHFWLRQ RI HDFK VHFRQG
aileron/elevator/rudder.
Tilt the airplane to the left
on the ground and checkthat the ailerons operate to
the right.

Turn the airplane to the righton the ground and checkthat the rudder operates tothe left.

Raise the airplane with its
nose upward and checkthat the elevator operates
downward.

Conﬁg 3/7 Neutral oﬀset
Neutral position setting for each servo.

This will move the neutral to the desired position.

167 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Conﬁg

Conﬁg

4/7

5/7

Servo limit

This is the limit setting for each servo. The
position of the maximum operation is read into the
J\URLQWKH¿UVWVHWWLQJ

Aileron example
Maximum angle

Stick to full right

Stick to full left

168 ‫ڀ‬Adjust the value (%) to reach the
maximum operating position

Maximum angle
Adjust the value (%) to reach theiiiiŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
Conﬁg

Conﬁg

6/7

Holding Power,WLVDIXQFWLRQWRDGMXVWWKHSRVWXUHKROGLQJIRUFHRIWKHDLUFUDIWLQ$9&6PRGH
'HFUHDVLQJ WKH YDOXH ZHDNHQV WKH KROGLQJ SRZHU DQG PDNHV WKH RSHUDWLRQ IHHOLQJ FORVHU WR WKH QRUPDO
mode.
7KHFXUUHQWUDWHQXPEHUV&WR&DUHGLVSOD\HGE\RSHUDWLQJWKHFKDQQHORIWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
/LNH WKH ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ IXQFWLRQ RI WKH WUDQVPLWWHU \RX FDQ VHW XS WR  GL൵HUHQW GDWD IRU WKH DWWLWXGHKROGLQJIRUFHUDWHRIWKHDLUFUDIWLQ$9&6PRGHE\RSHUDWLQJWKHVZLWFKIURPWKHWUDQVPLWWHUDQGVZLWFK
EHWZHHQWKHP<RXFDQVHWWKHKROGLQJSRZHUUDWHVHOHFWRUVZLWFKWRWKHFKDQQHOZLWKWKH$)5IXQFWLRQRIWKHWUDQVPLWWHUDQGVHWWKHSRLQWIRUHDFKUDWHRQWKH$)5SRLQWFXUYHWRVZLWFK,WLVDOVRSRVVLEOHWRXVH
WKHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQIXQFWLRQWRZRUNZLWKWKHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVZLWFK
Conﬁg 6/7

S.BUS Basic 2/3

C1-C5 switch
buttonWith the switch button, the"holding power" of each rate (C1 toC5) can be displayed and adjusted.

By operating the channel of thetransmitter, the channel positionof the current rate numbers C1
to C5 will be displayed in green.

Display and adjust the current
rate numbers C1 to C5 by
operating the channel on thetransmitter.
When set to SW of DG1 or DG2
C1

Switch channel rate
C5

-100%

-35%

0%

35%

100%

C1

C5

When set to dial or lever

Channel rate
-100%

C1

-75%

-25%

C2

0%

C3

25%

75%

C4

100%

C5

100%
0%
-100%

Conﬁg 7/7 Reset
Reset each Config item. It returns to the initialvalue.

169 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting GYA553
SBUS Basic menu

Set the CH for each function according to the transmitter to be used. Any unused functions should be set
to INH (Inhibited).
WARNING
Always verify that the S.BUS function assignments
match your transmitterʼ s function (in the FUNCTION
menu) assignments. If any changes are made within
the transmitter function assignments, then it will also
be necessary to make the changes within the S.BUS
function assignments. To change the channel, GYA553
and T16IZ SUPER must be connected.

The channel of each function can be changed.
Tap to move to the rate
switching CH setting page.

Holding Power C2 to C5
Tap the CH used for rate switching
to select it.

Reset each S.BUS function. It
returns to the initial value.

ON-OFF channel for auto
recovery! 10 CH ON

170 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰŲŧŨůŃŰŨűŸŃŋūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŌ
This section contains information on the commands
that apply to helicopters only. For instructions
RQ DLUSODQH JOLGHU DQG PXOWLFRSWHU UHIHU WR WKHsections pertaining to those aircraft.
8VHWKH0RGHOW\SHIXQFWLRQLQWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWR VHOHFW WKH VZDVK W\SH PDWFKHG WR WKH IXVHODJH
beforehand.

$OVRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDWWKH&RQGLWLRQ6HOHFWscreen if necessary before setting the model data at
HDFKIXQFWLRQ 8SWRFRQGLWLRQVFDQEHXVHG
7KH$)5 IXQFWLRQ GXDO UDWH IXQFWLRQ DQG RWKHUIXQFWLRQVFRPPRQWRDOOPRGHOW\SHVDUHGHVFULEHG
in a separate section.

◆ Condition hold

&RQGLWLRQKROG212))RSHUDWLRQLVSRVVLEOHXQGHUQRUPDOFRQGLWLRQV
DQGWKHWKURWWOHVWLFNLVPRUHWKDQUGLQWRWKHVORZWKURWWOHUDQJH
7KURWWOH VHUYRV ZLOO UHPDLQ DW WKH WKURWWOH VWLFN SRVLWLRQ GXULQJ 21
operation.

:KHQ SHUIRUPLQJ DGMXVWPHQWV VXFK DV LGOLQJ XS ZKHQ WKH HQJLQH LV
HQJDJHGNHHSWKHWKURWWOHVWDEOHVRDVWRSUHYHQWWKHHQJLQHIURPUHYYLQJWRRKLJK2QFH\RXUDGMXVWPHQWVDUHFRPSOHWHDOZD\VPDNHVXUHWRVHW
WKHIXQFWLRQWR>2))@

● ON/OFF operation on the Home screen

WARNING

8QGHUWKHFRQGLWLRQVGHVFULEHGDERYHWDSWKH&RQGLWLRQKROG>2))@

For safety reasons, when performing individual displayed on the screen.
'XULQJIXQFWLRQRSHUDWLRQ&RQGLWLRQKROGZLOOGLVSOD\>21@DQGDQ
adjustments it is recommended that you shut off
the engine and disconnect the motor to prevent DODUPZLOOVRXQG
rotation.
*Sudden, abrupt rotation can result in death or serious injury.

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋūƈƏƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.

AFR

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.

Dual rate

D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.

Pitch curve

Pitch curve and hovering trim adjustment

Throttle curve

Throttle curve and hovering trim adjustment

Acceleration

Allows a brief "overload" in response to sudden throttle and pitch commands

Throttle holdMoves the throttle to idle during autorotation

Swash mixing

Compensates for each control response

Throttle mixing

Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied

Pitch → Needle

Adjusts response curve in diﬀerent ﬂight conditions

Pitch → Rudder

Handles torque changes from pitch angle inputs

Gyro

Used to switch gyro sensitivity

Governor

Used to switch RPM of the helicopterʼs head

Gyro setting

Detailed setting of CGY755/CGY760R

171 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

7KHIXQFWLRQVLQWKH0RGHOPHQXFDQEHXVHGE\VZLWFKLQJWKHVHWWLQJVRIXSWRIOLJKWFRQGLWLRQVE\XVLQJWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV$GGFRQGLWLRQVDVUHTXLUHG
:KHQ\RXGRQRWZDQWWRXVHWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWKLVVHWWLQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\,QWKLVFDVH
XVHWKHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDVVLJQHGDWLQLWLDOVHWWLQJŏ6LQFHVZLWFKLQJE\VWLFNDQGOHYHUSRVLWLRQLQ
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
ŏ $ &RQGLWLRQ 'HOD\ IXQFWLRQ FDQ EH VHW
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
ŏ :KHQ PXOWLSOH FRQGLWLRQV ZHUH VHW WKHLU
operation priority can be freely changed.
ŏ 7KH FRQGLWLRQ QDPH FDQ EH FKDQJHG 7KH
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easilyFRQÀUPHG

ŏ6HOHFW>&RQGLWLRQVHOHFW@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
2QO\WKHQXPEHURIEXWWRQVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH
FRQGLWLRQVZKLFKFDQEHDGGHGDUHGLVSOD\HG
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions/LVW
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

172 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa PD[LPXPGHOD\

173 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶAFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]$)5 IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG WR DGMXVW WKH WKURZ DQGRSHUDWLRQ FXUYH RI WKH VWLFN OHYHU DQG VZLWFKIXQFWLRQVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
WKHPD[LPXPWKURZ:KHQPL[LQJLVDSSOLHGIURP
RQH FKDQQHO WR DQRWKHU FKDQQHO ERWK FKDQQHOVFDQEHDGMXVWHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHE\DGMXVWLQJWKH
operation rate through the AFR function.
ŏ 2SHUDWLRQ FXUYH DGMXVWPHQW 7KUHH W\SHV
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
ŏ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW7KHRSHUDWLRQ
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

ŏ6HOHFW>$)5@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

174 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Dual rate'5FXUYHVZKLFKFDQEHVZLWFKHGE\VZLWFKHWF
FDQ EH DGGHG7KH FXUYH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG E\ WKHAFR function.
ŏ 8SWRUDWHVFDQEHDGGHGIRUHDFK
condition.
ŏ '5LVVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGLVQRW
UHÁHFWHGDWRWKHUFRQGLWLRQVŏ '5DWWKHWRSRIWKH'5OLVWKDVSULRULW\ŏ6HOHFW>'XDOUDWH@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

175 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correct
XQGHVLUHGWHQGHQFLHVRIWKHDLUFUDIWDQGLWPD\DOVREHXVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJ
PHDQV WKDW WKH PRWLRQ RI D FRPPDQG FKDQQHOFDOOHGWKHPDVWHULVDGGHGWRWKHPRWLRQRIWKH
PL[HGFKDQQHOFDOOHGVODYH
<RXPD\FKRRVHWRKDYHWKH0DVWHUVWULPDGGHGWR
WKH6ODYHFKDQQHOUHVSRQVHLI\RXGHVLUH 7ULPVHWWLQJ  7KH PL[LQJ FXUYH FDQ EH FKDQJHG VR
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
H൵HFWLYHO\E\VHWWLQJWKH(;3(;33RLQWPRGHV

2൵VHWW\SHPL[LQJDSSOLHVD¿[HGR൵VHWRUSUHVHW
to the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
7KH3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJLQFOXGHVDSRZHUIXOOLQN
IXQFWLRQZKLFKDOORZV3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJWREH
OLQNHGZLWKWKHVSHFLDOPL[LQJIXQFWLRQVRUZLWKother programmable mixing functions. The link
IXQFWLRQFDQEHVHWXSIRU0DVWHUDQG6ODYHFKDQQHO
individually.

ŏ7DSWKH>3URJPL[HV@EXWWRQLQWKH0RGHOPHQXWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or oﬀset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Oﬀset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

176 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇƖ
ŏ*URXSVLQJOHPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQWKH*U
and Sngl modes.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
:KHQPL[LQJLQFOXGHVPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHWWKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>21@:KHQPL[LQJGRHVQRWLQFOXGHPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHW
WKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>2))@(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>21@
DQG>2))@
7KLVLVH൵HFWLYHZKHQWKHPDVWHUFKDQQHOLVVHWE\)XQFWLRQŏ0L[LQJPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

ŏ0L[LQJFXUYHW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

(DFK WLPH WKH EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG LW WRJJOHV EHWZHHQ WKH0L[LQJDQG2൵VHWPRGHV)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FXUYH VHWWLQJ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.

ŏ0L[LQJVHWXSVFUHHQVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

ŏ)LQHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJ
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>,1+@
DQG>212))@ŏ0L[LQJ 212)) VZLWFK VHWWLQJ DQG 212))
direction switching$Q 212)) VZLWFK LV QRW VHW HYHQ ZKHQ WKH IXQFWLRQ LV
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG VHH >6ZLWFK
VHWWLQJPHWKRG@DWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH¿QHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH
the description at the back of this manual.

ŏ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHHWKH
description at the back of this manual.
2IIVHW PL[LQJ FKDQJHV WKH VSHHG 8VH WKH 6SHHG ,Q DQG6SHHG2XWEXWWRQVWRUHDGMXVWWKHVSHHG
 7KHPL[LQJVZLWFKFDQVHWDGHOD\ZLWKDGLIIHUHQWUDWHDW
starting and stopping.
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVLQDFWLYHZKHQDPL[LQJVZLWFKLVQRWVHW

ŏ0DVWHU FKDQQHO VHWWLQJ H[FHSW RIIVHW W\SH
mixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 
0DVWHUFKDQQHOFRQWUROFDQEHVHWWRVWLFN95DQGRWKHUVLPSOHWUDYHOVZKLFKGRQRWLQFOXGH(QGSRLQW$)5'5
PL[LQJVHWWLQJHWF,QWKLVFDVHGLVSOD\WKH)XQFWLRQ+:!VFUHHQE\WDSSLQJWKH>6WLFN6ZLWFK'LDO@EXWWRQDQG
then select master channel side control.

ŏ6ODYHFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 

ŏ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ

177 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Pitch curve / Pitch trimųƌƗƆƋŃƆƘƕƙƈ

7KLVIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHSLWFKRSHUDWLRQFXUYHIRU
each flight condition for the optimal flight state
relative to movement of the throttle stick.

ŏ 6HOHFW >3LWFK FXUYH@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

8S WR  SRLQWV FDQ EH VHW IRU WKH SRLQW FXUYH W\SHV+RZHYHUZKHQXVLQJWKHSRLQWVRUSRLQWVVSHFL¿HGWRFUHDWHDFXUYHDVLPSOHFXUYHFDQEHFUHDWHGE\UHGXFLQJWKHQXPEHURILQSXWSRLQWVWRRUDQGWKHQHQWHULQJWKH
VSHFL¿HGYDOXHDWWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJSRLQWVWKDW\RXFUHDWHG
a curve.

Currently selected condition name

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normal curve adjustment
ŏ )RU QRUPDO FXUYH XVXDOO\ XVH >3RLQW@ W\SHand create a basic pitch curve centeredabout hovering. Use this function together
with the THR curve (normal) function andadjust the curve so that up/down control isbest at a constant engine speed.
Idle up curve adjustment
ŏ )RU WKH KLJK VLGH SLWFK FXUYH VHW WKHmaximum pitch which does overload theengine. For the low side pitch curve, create
curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, andother purposes and use the idle up curves
according to the performance.

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖWARNING

Throttle hold curve adjustment
ŏ 7KH WKURWWOH KROG FXUYH LV XVHG ZKHQ
executing auto rotation dives.

178 ‫ڀ‬When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling state.

ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ

ŏ *URXS6LQJOH LWHP :KHQ \RX DOVR ZDQW WR
input the same setting contents at otherconditions, perform setting in the groupmode. In this case, the same contents are
input to the other conditions set in the groupmode. When you want to set each condition
independently, select the single mode
(initial setting). Other conditions can be set
independently.

ŦƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈƖ
7KH VFUHHQV VKRZQ EHORZ DUH FXUYHV FUHDWHG E\
HQWHULQJWKHSLWFKUDWHDWORZFHQWHUDQGKLJKVLGH 
SRLQWVRUSRLQWV DWHDFKFRQGLWLRQ:KHQDFWXDOO\FUHDWLQJ D FXUYH LQSXW WKH UDWH VSHFLILHG DW WKHIXVHODJH RUWKHUHIHUHQFHYDOXH )RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FXUYH VHWWLQJ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.

Ɣ3LWFK&XUYH ([DPSOH
Normal Curve

Idle-up 1 Curve

Idle-up 2 Curve

Hold Curve

Pitch servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

179 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ųƌƗƆƋŃƗƕƌƐŃŋūƒƙƈƕƌƑƊŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƋƌƊƋŃƓƌƗƆƋŏŃƏƒƚŃƓƌƗƆƋŌ
7KHKRYHULQJSLWFKORZSLWFKDQGKLJKSLWFKWULPVHWXSVFUHHQFDQEHFDOOHGIURPWKH3LWFKFXUYHVHWXS
screen.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Hovering pitch trim
settingūƒƙƈƕƌƑƊŃƓƌƗƆƋŃƗƕƌƐ
The Hovering Pitch trim function trims the pitch
QHDUWKHKRYHULQJSRLQW1RUPDOO\LWLVXVHGZLWKthe hovering condition. The hovering pitch can be¿QHWXQHGIRUFKDQJHVLQURWRUVSHHGDFFRPSDQ\LQJ
FKDQJHVLQWHPSHUDWXUHKXPLGLW\DQGRWKHUÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV$GMXVW WKH KRYHULQJ SLWFK VR WKDW
rotor speed is constant. This function can be used
WRJHWKHUZLWKWKHKRYHULQJ7KURWWOH7ULPIXQFWLRQfor more delicate operation.
ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ RQO\ WKH KRYHULQJ QRUPDO 
condition, switch the group mode to thesingle mode (initial setting) before setting.
ŏ7DS>,1+@ 21LVGLVSOD\HGŏ6HOHFWWKHDGMXVWPHQWNQRE
Selection example: LDŏ 7KH WULP RSHUDWLRQ PRGH 0RGH &HQWHU
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum amount of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (parallel
movement trim) operation. The advantage
of using this mode is that the hovering pitch
can be adjusted without changing the
curve.
ŏ7ULPDGMXVWPHQWUDQJH 5DQJH VHWWLQJ
When this value is made small, trim can only
be used near the center.
ŏ 7KH WULP UDWH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG DQG WKHoperation direction can be changed.

Low/high pitch trim
settingūƌƊƋŃųƌƗƆƋŒůƒƚŃųƌƗƆƋŃŷƕƌƐ
+LJK3LWFK/RZ3LWFK7ULPLVWKHSLWFKVHUYRKLJKVLGHDQGORZVLGHWULPIXQFWLRQŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ:KHQVHWWLQJWKHDGMXVWPHQWNQREVFRPPRQto all the conditions, set them in the groupmode.
ŏ7DS>,1+@ 21LVGLVSOD\HGŏ6HOHFWWKHDGMXVWPHQWNQREV
Selection example: LS (high side), RS (lowside)
ŏ 7KH WULP UDWH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG DQG WKHoperation direction can be changed.
ŏ7ULPDFWVDVKLJKVLGHRUORZVLGHWULPZLWKWKH
center as the standard.

180 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Throttle curve / Throttle Hover trimŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃŃƆƘƕƙƈ

7KLVIXQFWLRQDGMXVWVWKHWKURWWOHRSHUDWLRQFXUYH
for each condition for optimum engine speed tothrottle stick movement.
 8S WR  FXUYH SRLQWV FDQ EH VHW IRU WKH SRLQWFXUYHW\SH+RZHYHUZKHQWKHSRLQWVDQGRWKHUŏ 6HOHFW >7KURWWOH FXUYH@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

SRLQW GDWD LV XVHG D VLPSOH FXUYH FDQ EH HDVLO\created by reducing the number of input points of
WKHFXUYHWRDQGHQWHULQJWKHVSHFLILHGYDOXHDW
the corresponding points.

Currently selected condition name

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the back of thismanual.

Point curve type is 9
points (initial), but for
simple use, 4~5 points
are suﬃcient.

Throttle hover trim
operating position(White line)ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖ

űƒƕƐƄƏŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ

ŏ1RUPDOFXUYHFUHDWHVDEDVLFFXUYH
centered around hovering. Use it alongwith the normal pitch curve and adjust sothat up/down control at a constant engine
speed is easiest.

WARNING
When actually starting the engine andﬂying, always set the idle up condition
switch to OFF and start the engine in
the idling mode.

ŬƇƏƈŃƘƓŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƄƇƍƘƖƗƐƈƑƗ

ŏ6HWDQLGOHXSFXUYHWKDWPDLQWDLQVDconstant speed at all times, even during
operation which reduces the pitch
SHUIRUPHGLQÁLJKW&UHDWHDFXUYHPDWFKHG
to loop, roll, 3D, or other purposes and theidle up curve according to the performance.

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ

ŏ *URXSVLQJOH LWHP :KHQ \RX ZDQW WR
simultaneously enter the same settings toother functions, make the settings in thegroup mode. In this case, the same setting

contents are entered to the all conditions.
When you want to set each condition
independently, make the settings after
selecting the single mode (Initial setting).

181 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƈƛƄƐƓƏƈƖ
7KHFXUYHVVKRZQEHORZDUHFUHDWHGE\XVLQJWKH
SRLQW FXUYH W\SH DQG LQSXWWLQJ WKH GDWD RI WKH 
SRLQWV  ORZ VLGH    FHQWHU  
 KLJK  VLGH DW HDFK FRQGLWLRQ 7KH\ DUH)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FXUYH FUHDWLRQ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.
Idle-up 2 Curve

Ɣ7KURWWOH&XUYH ([DPSOH
Normal Curvecreated by reducing the number of points on the
OLQH WR :KHQ DFWXDOO\ FUHDWLQJ D FXUYH HQWHUWKHGDWDVSHFL¿HGSHUWKHDLUFUDIW RUWKHUHIHUHQFHYDOXH Idle-up 1 Curve

Throttle servo speed setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)ŷƋƕƒƗƗƏƈŃūƒƙƈƕŃƗƕƌƐ
The Throttle Hover trim setup screen can be called from the Throttle curve setup screen.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

The Throttle Hover function trims the throttle near
WKHKRYHULQJSRLQW1RUPDOO\XVHLWZLWKKRYHULQJ
conditions. Changes in rotor speed accompanying
FKDQJHV LQ WKH WHPSHUDWXUH KXPLGLW\ DQG RWKHUÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFDQEHWULPPHG$GMXVWWKHWKURWWOH
VRWKDWURWRUURWDWLRQLVPRVWVWDEOH0RUHGHOLFDWH
trimming is also possible by using this function
DORQJZLWKWKH+RYHU3LWFKIXQFWLRQŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ:KHQXVLQJWKHKRYHULQJ QRUPDO FRQGLWLRQ
only, switch the group mode to the single
mode (initial setting) and make the settings.
ŏ7DS>,1+@ 21LVGLVSOD\HGŏ6HOHFWWKHDGMXVWPHQWNQRE
Selection example: RDŏ 7KH WULP RSHUDWLRQ PRGH 0RGH &HQWHU
Normal) can be selected.
Center mode: Maximum rate of change
near center by center trim operation(recommended)
Normal mode: Normal trim (horizontal
movement trim) operation.
ŏ7ULPDGMXVWPHQWUDQJH 5DQJH VHWWLQJ
When the value is made small, trim acts only
near the center.
ŏ 7KH WULP UDWH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG DQG WKHoperation direction can be set.

182 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Acceleration
7KLV IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG WR DGMXVW WKH SLWFK DQGthe throttle rise characteristic at acceleration/
deceleration operation. An acceleration function
ZKLFKWHPSRUDULO\LQFUHDVHVWKHSLWFKDQGWKURWWOH
operations at throttle stick acceleration/deceleration
operation can be set.
Example of acceleration function use
ŏ:KHQ XVHG DW SLWFK WKH DFFHOHUDWLRQ
function is effective when you want toquicken the response of the fuselage at 3DÁLJKWÁLSHWF
When used, high pitch temporarily exceeds
maximum pitch, but immediately returns tomaximum pitch.

ŏ 6HOHFW >$FFHOHUDWLRQ@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
When using thisfunction, Tap [INH].
(ON is displayed.)

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

To next page
1/2 : Pitch
2/2 : Throttle
Operation up to thisrange will initiate
acceleration.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Act position
The rate the angle
increases.

Current position

The return time after operation (Damping)can be set.
（First return）1 〜 100（Slow return）（Acceleration doesn't function as 0.）ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ $FFHOHUDWLRQ FDQ EH VHW DW ERWK VHWWLQJ
at acceleration (high) and setting at
deceleration (low).
(The operation point is displayed on agraph.)
ŏ $FFHOHUDWLRQUDWHVHWWLQJ 5DWH
ŏ 7KH UHWXUQ WLPH DIWHU RSHUDWLRQ 'DPSLQJ 
can be set.

ŏ 7 K H  R S H U D W L R Q  S R L Q W  D W  D F F H O H U D W L R Qand deceleration can be set. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration is
performed.
Note: When using the acceleration function,
since the pitch stroke is large, make yoursettings so there is no binding of your linkage.

183 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Throttle hold

Example of use

This function sets the throttle cut position for
autorotation. The throttle position can also be set toan idling position. Setting of these 2 positions can
EHVHOHFWHGE\VZLWFK7KLVDOORZVXVHIRUVZLWFKLQJ
during training.

ŏ 6HOHFW >7KURWWOH KROG@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

ŏ 6LQFH WKURWWOH KROG KDV  PRGHV &XW  DQG(Idle), using it in the Idling mode during
training and in the Cut mode when
stopping the engine at contest, etc. isconvenient.
Note: When throttle hold is set to ON in the normal
condition, throttle hold acts and the throttle servo
is deactivated. Always set throttle hold to ON in thehold condition.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
Current position
Set to the engine
stop position.

Set to the idling
position.

Hold position

Engine cut setting

Engine idle settingŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑŃƓƕƈƆƄƘƗƌƒƑƖ

ŏ2SHUDWLRQPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Manual mode(Manual): The throttle holdfunction is operated by switch operation
only.
Auto mode(Auto): The throttle hold function
operation is linked to the throttle stick
position.
Auto position setting: When the auto mode isselected, the throttle position (auto position)
can be selected. Move the throttle stick to
the position you want to set and tap thescreen. (Auto position is displayed.)ŏ+ROGSRVLWLRQDGMXVWPHQW
Throttle Hold (Cut) sets the throttle cut
position. Adjust it so that the carburetor is fully
closed.
Throttle Hold (Idle): Make this adjustment tomaintain idling for training. Adjustments canbe made based on the throttle curve idle
position.
ŏ7KH WKURWWOH VHUYR RSHUDWLQJ VSHHG FDQ EH
adjusted. (Speed)ŏ 7KURWWOH FXW RU WUDLQLQJ IXQFWLRQ FDQ EH
switched by hold function selector switch.

WARNING
When starting the engine, conﬁrm thatthe idle up condition and throttle holdcondition are OFF.

184 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash mixing

Example of use

7KHVZDVKPL[IXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRFRUUHFWWKHVZDVKSODWH LQ WKH DLOHURQ UROO  GLUHFWLRQ DQG HOHYDWRUF\FOLFSLWFK FRUUHVSRQGLQJWRHDFKRSHUDWLRQRI
each condition.
$GMXVWPHQW E\ LQGHSHQGHQW FXUYH IRU DLOHURQ
HOHYDWRU DQG SLWFK RSHUDWLRQV LV SRVVLEOH 7KHRSHUDWLRQFDQEHVPRRWKO\DGMXVWHGE\FDOOLQJXSWKH ³&XUYH VHWXS´ VFUHHQ E\ WDSSLQJ WKH PL[LQJ
item that corresponds to the mixing and direction
ZKLFKQHHGVFRUUHFWLRQŏ$VDQH[DPSOHXVHVZDVKPL[LQJWRFRUUHFW
undesirable tendencies in the roll direction.
ŏ )RU D FRQGLWLRQ ZKLFK XVHV $LOHURQ WR
Elevator, set this function to ON. Whenraising the nose at a right roll, when theRate B side is input and the right aileron is
operated, the elevator moves to the downside. Tune by adjusting the Rate. For rightroll, adjust to the rate A side.

ŏ 6HOHFW >6ZDVK PL[LQJ@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.
Condition group/single
mode selection (Gr. /Sngl)

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ 7DS >,1+@  21 LV
displayed.)ŏ:KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKHVDPHFRQWHQWVDW
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ7KHFRUUHFWLRQUDWHFDQEHVHWE\FXUYHŏ $VZLWFKFDQEHVHW
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

185 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Throttle mixing
7KLV IXQFWLRQ FRUUHFWV VORZLQJ RI HQJLQH VSHHG
FDXVHG E\ VZDVK SODWH RSHUDWLRQ GXULQJ DLOHURQ
or elevator operation. The method of applying
FORFNZLVH RU FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH WRUTXH ZKHQ
pirouetting can also be corrected.
$Q DFFHOHUDWLRQ IXQFWLRQ ZKLFK WHPSRUDULO\increases the throttle side correction rate relative torapid stick operation can also be set.
ŏ 6HOHFW >7KURWWOH PL[LQJ@ DW WKH PRGHO
menu and call the setup screen shown
below.

:KHQ FRUUHFWLRQ LV QHFHVVDU\ WDS WR WKH PL[LQJ
item corresponding to the mixing that needs
correction and tap the screen to call the curve setup
VFUHHQDQGWKHQFRUUHFWWKHVORZLQJ
Setting exampleŏ $LOHURQ WR 7KURWWOH DSSOLHV D ORDG WR WKHengine and corrects slowing of theengine speed when the aileron stick was
operated. Engine racing can be adjusted
independently at the right aileron and left
aileron by Rates A and B.
"CTRM" : The correction
rate maximum when
the throttle stick iscentered.
"Linear" : Correction
applied for the entire
throttle range.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting*For a description of the curve setting method,
see the description at the back of this manual.

<Acceleration function setting>ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ 7DS >,1+@  21 LV
displayed.)ŏ:KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKHVDPHFRQWHQWVDW
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ7KHFRUUHFWLRQUDWHFDQEHVHWE\FXUYHŏ$VZLWFKFDQEHVHW
When [--] is set, the swash mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap to
the [--] item and tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

ŏ $FFHOHUDWLRQ FDQ EH VHW IRU ERWK VHWWLQJV
(Left) and (Right)
ŏ$FFHOHUDWLRQUDWHVHWWLQJ 5DWH
ŏ 7KH UHWXUQ WLPH 'DPSLQJ  DIWHU RSHUDWLRQ
can be set.
ŏ7KHRSHUDWLRQSRLQW $FWSRVLWLRQ ZKHQWKH
correction rate is increased and decreased
can be set independently. When an
operation point is exceeded, acceleration
operation is performed.

186 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Pitch → Needle
7KLVPL[LQJLVXVHGZKHQWKHHQJLQHLVHTXLSSHG
ZLWK QHHGOH FRQWURO RU RWKHU IXHODLU PL[WXUHDGMXVWPHQW$QHHGOHFXUYHFDQEHVHW
$Q DFFHOHUDWLRQ IXQFWLRQ ZKLFK WHPSRUDULO\increases needle operation at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set.
The rise characteristic of the needle servo atacceleration and deceleration operation can be
DGMXVWHG

ŏ 6HOHFW >3LWFKń1HHGOH@ DW WKH PRGHO PHQX DQGcall the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Mixing curve setting*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

Normally, use [Point] type.

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ 7DS >,1+@  21  LV
displayed.)ŏ:KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKHVDPHFRQWHQWVDW
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ $QHHGOHFXUYHFDQEHVHWŏ $VZLWFKFDQEHVHW
When [--] is set, the mixing function is
operated by merely selecting the condition.
When setting an [ON]/[OFF] switch, tap
to the [--] item. Tap the screen to call theselection screen and set the switch and its
ON position.

< Acceleration function setting>ŏ $ F F H O H U D W L R Q  F D Q  E H  V H W  D W  E R W Kacceleration (high) and deceleration (low).
ŏ7KHDFFHOHUDWLRQUDWH UDWH DQGWKHUHWXUQ
time after operation (damping) can be set.
ŏ $ Q  R S H U D W L R Q  S R L Q W  $ F W  S R V L W L R Q  D Wacceleration and deceleration can be set.
When an operation point was exceeded,
acceleration operation is performed.

187 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Pitch → Rudder (Revolution mixing)
8VH WKLV PL[ ZKHQ \RX ZDQW WR VXSSUHVV WKHUHDFWLRQWRUTXHJHQHUDWHGE\PDLQURWRUSLWFKDQG
VSHHG FKDQJHV GXULQJ SLWFK RSHUDWLRQ$GMXVW VR
that the nose does not move in the rudder direction.
$Q DFFHOHUDWLRQ IXQFWLRQ ZKLFK WHPSRUDULO\increases the correction rate at throttle stick
acceleration/deceleration operation can be set. The
mixing rate at acceleration/deceleration can be set.

+RZHYHUZKHQD*<6HULHVRURWKHUKHDGLQJKROGJ\URLVXVHGVLQFHFRUUHFWLRQLVSHUIRUPHGE\WKH
J\URthis mix is not used. If this function is used
ZKHQWKHJ\URRSHUDWLRQPRGHLVWKH$9&6PRGH
WKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQZLOOFKDQJH

ŏ6HOHFW>3LWFKń5XGGHU@at the model menu
and call the setup
screen shown.
● Mixing curve setting
Normally, use [Point] type.

*For a description of thecurve setting method,
see the description at
the back of this manual.

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ 7DS >,1+@  21 LV
displayed.)ŏ:KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKHVDPHFRQWHQWVDW
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ$PL[LQJFXUYHLVVHW

<Normal condition mixing curve><Idle up condition mixing curve>

The mixing curve rate starts from a smallvalue.
For a rotor with a clockwise operation
direction (polarity), when pitch was
operated at the plus side, set so thatmixing is in the clockwise direction. First,
trim at hovering and then adjust theneutral position.
1. Adjustment between slow and hovering
Repeatedly hover from take off and land
from hovering at a constant rate matched
to your own rhythm, and adjust the pitch
so the nose does not deflect when thethrottle is raised and lowered.
2. Throttle high side (climbing and diving fromhovering)
Repeat climbing and diving from hovering
at a constant rate matched to your own
rhythm and adjust the pitch so that thenose does not deflect when the throttle israised and lowered.

Set the mixing rate so that the rudder
direction at high-speed flight is straightahead. Adjust for each condition used.

<Acceleration function setting>ŏ$FFHOHUDWLRQRSHUDWLRQFDQEHSHUIRUPHG
for both setting at acceleration (High)and setting at deceleration (Low).
ŏ$FFHOHUDWLRQUDWHVHWWLQJ 5DWH
ŏ7KHUHWXUQWLPHDIWHURSHUDWLRQ 'DPSLQJ 
can be set.
ŏ $Q RSHUDWLRQ SRLQW $FW SRVLWLRQ  DW
acceleration and deceleration can be set
independently. When an operation point
was exceeded, acceleration operation is
performed.

188 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶGyro[Helicopter]

7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGWRDGMXVWJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\7KH
VHQVLWLYLW\ DQG RSHUDWLRQ PRGH 1RUPDO PRGH
$9&6PRGH FDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ
7KH J\UR VHQVLWLYLW\ FDQ EH VZLWFKHG ZLWK HDFKFRQGLWLRQRUWKHVZLWFK VHQVLWLYLWLHV&RPSDWLEOHZLWKD[LVJ\UR &*< ŏ 6HOHFW >*\UR@ DW WKHmodel menu and callthe setup screen.

Gyro（RUD)
setting

Note: [Gyro] [Gyro2] [Gyro3] Default function[Gyro]: CH6(FASSTest12CH) CH5(Other system type)[Gyro2] : &+
[Gyro3] : &+Always set to [--] both (control) and (trim) for
the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in
the Linkage menu.

Gyro2（AIL)
settingGyro3（ELE)
setting
Tapping these willpull up the detailed
selection screen foreach.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Rate1 Gyro type andgain
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

Rate2 Gyro type andgain
Rate3 Gyro type andgain

When using Rate2/Rate3, make it
INH → ON or OFF.
Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)
Use this when you wantto adjust sensitivity via
VR, etc., and not onscreen data entry. Tap "-", select "VR", etc., andthen tap the value toadjust. (Won't operate
when value is "0".)The ON/OFF switchof gyro is chosen.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustmentŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
ŏ :KHQ XVLQJ WKLV IXQFWLRQ 7DS >,1+@  21  LV
displayed.)ŏ :KHQ\RXZDQWWRVHWWKHVDPHFRQWHQWVDW
other conditions, select the group mode.
When you want to set the selected condition
only, select the single mode (initial setting).
ŏ 7KUHH UDWHV FDQ EH VZLWFKHG IRU HDFK
condition. (Rate 1/Rate 2/Rate 3)ŏ $ÀQHWXQLQJ95FDQEHVHW

189 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶUsage example #1: Using gyro for only the rudder and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro : CH5
For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch. The gyro sensitivity adjustment connector connects to 6ch.

ŏ 6HOHFW >*\UR@ DW WKHmodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let you
select either Normal or
AVCS.

Because thesensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Set gain of a rudder

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

Usage example #2: Using 3-axis gyro CGY750 and adjusting sensitivity for each condition＊ Gyro gain channel
Gyro RUD : CH5 For the FASSTest12CH, Gyro/RUD is 6ch.
Gyro2 AIL : CH9
Gyro3 ELE : CH10
For the CGY750, simply connect the S.BUS; functions do not need to be set.
(For the FASSTest12CH, change Gyron/RUD to 6ch.)

ŏ 6HOHFW >*\UR@ DW WKHmodel menu and callthe setup screen.

This is all that is needed
for use in this case.

Tapping here will let
you select either Normal
or AVCS for each of thethree axes.

Set gain of a rudder

Set gain of an aileronSet gain of an elevator

Because thesensitivity is switched(Sngl) per condition,
Rate 2 and Rate 3 are
not used.

Because sensitivity changes forhovering and idleup, perform
switchover for each condition andadjust sensitivity.

190 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor:KHQ XVLQJ D )XWDED JRYHUQRU WKLV IXQFWLRQ LV
XVHGWRVZLWFKWKH530RIWKHKHOLFRSWHU VKHDG
8SWRUDWHVFDQEHVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ*The governor is used by connecting the governor speed
VHWWLQJFKDQQHOWR&+ LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ :KHQXVLQJDQLQGHSHQGHQWJRYHUQRU>21@>2))@VZLWFKFRQQHFWWKH$8; >21@>2))@ FRQQHFWRURIWKHJRYHUQRUWR&+ LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ DQGVHWWKHVZLWFKWR&+ *RYHUQRU 
DWWKH)XQFWLRQPHQXRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQX:KHQXVLQJWKH)XHO0L[WXUHIXQFWLRQWKHPL[WXUHVHUYR
is controlled from the governor. When transmitting the
PL[WXUHFXUYHGDWDIURPWKHWUDQVPLWWHUWRWKHJRYHUQRUWKH
JRYHUQRU$8; PWUP FRQQHFWRUPXVWEHFRQQHFWHGWR&+
LQLWLDOVHWWLQJ DQGJRYHUQRUVLGHVHWWLQJSHUIRUPHG6HHWKH
governor instruction manual.
Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] for[Governor] and [Governor 2] of the Function menuof the Linkage menu.

ŏ 6HOHFW >*RYHUQRU@ DW WKH PRGHO PHQX
and call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

RPM adjustment
Fine tuning VR settings

Unit display selection:[%] [rpm]

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
Ɣ$FWLYDWHWKHPL[LQJ
When using this function, Tap [INH]. (ON isdisplayed.):KHQ WKH IXQFWLRQ LV VHW 212)) DW WKH JRYHUQRU VHWXSVFUHHQWKHJRYHUQRUUSPVHWWLQJFKDQQHOHQGSRLQWVHUYRWUDYHODQGOLPLWSRLQWDUHQRZLQLWLDOL]HG:KHQFKDQJHGIURP,1+WR$&7 21 WKHVHUYRWUDYHOLV
LQLWLDOL]HGWRDQGWKHOLPLWSRLQWLVLQLWLDOL]HGWR
:KHQ RSHUDWLRQ LV FKDQJHG WR ,1+ DW DOO FRQGLWLRQV WKHVHUYR WUDYHO LV LQLWLDOL]HG WR  DQG WKH OLPLW SRLQW LV
LQLWLDOL]HGWR

Ɣ530DGMXVWPHQW
Tap to the rate item.
 $GMXVWWKHUSPXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons.
 ,QLWLDOYDOXH USP
 $ G M X V W P H Q W  U D Q J H   2 ) )    a      2 ) ) 
700~3500rpm)*When the value is tapped reset to the initial value.

Ɣ8QLWGLVSOD\VHOHFWLRQ
 7DS WR WKH 81,7 LWHP >@ >USP@  6HOHFW WKH
unit.

191 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Ɣ'LSOD\PRGHVHOHFWLRQƔ)LQHWXQLQJ95VHWWLQJV:KHQ >USP@ PRGH LV VHOHFWHG DERYH VHWWLQJ WKH GLVSOD\mode can be selected.
7KHUHLVQRFKDQJHLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURXWSXWHYHQZKHQWKH
0RGHLVFKDQJHG&DOLEUDWLRQVKRXOGEHSHUIRUPHGYLDWKH
governor.
,QRUGHUWRXVHWKH*RYHUQRUIXQFWLRQRIWKH7,=683(5
it is necessary to change the settings on the governor for the
ORZVLGHUSPPRGH

When the Mode of the Governor screen's
model menu is changed, the change is also
indicated on-screen.

Tap to the [--] item and tap the screen toaccess the selection screen. Select thecontrol.
)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH VZLWFK VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.

Tap to the rate item.
 $GMXVW WKH WULP UDWH XVLQJ WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆʆʆEXWWRQV ,QLWLDOYDOXH USP
 $GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa
:KHQWKHVFUHHQLVWDSSHGIRURQHVHFRQGWKHVHQVLWLYLW\LV
reset to the initial value.

Tap the screen to return to the cursor mode.

main rotor R.P.M.

The chart below indicates themode percentage and thecorresponding RPM.
3900rpm
3500rpm
2700rpm
2500rpm
2100rpm2000rpm
1500rpm

1000rpm

700rpm0%50% : neutral 100% 110%main rotor R.P.M. setting channel travel

192 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Gyro setting
The T16IZ SUPER has the same functions as the
GPB-1.
7KH&*<&*<5FDQEHVHWXSIURPWKH
T16IZ SUPER screen by connecting to the T16IZ
683(56RPHIXQFWLRQVFDQEHVHWZLUHOHVVO\&*<5QHHGVWREH9HUa8SGDWH&*<5

A. Wired connection: Advanced settings (all functions same as GPB-1)
T16IZ SUPER
CGY755/CGY760R

Notes,IWKH7,=683(5DQGJ\URDUHQRWFRQQHFWHG
the gyro setting value cannot be changed.

● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4 V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors otherthan "RPM" and "P.BOX".

P.BOX

S.I/F

(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)CGY Connection Cable (included with gyro)

B. Wireless tunings: Gyro tunings can be made wirelessly. (Limited items)
T16IZ SUPER
CGY755/CGY760R

Notes:KHQ XVLQJ WKH ZLUHOHVV WXQLQJ IXQFWLRQ VHWthe telemetry function to ACT.
7KH ZLUHOHVV WXQLQJ FDQ EH )$667HVW RU

7)+66

S.BUS2 Receiver
Do not set during ﬂight. Make settings when
the aircraft is on the ground and the motorand engine are stopped.

For CGY755(For CGY760R Use other receiver)

Wireless Tunings function list
-FLT. TUNE
Base Gain: Gyro base gain setting
CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting
Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority AileronCnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator
EXPO.: Exponential
FLT. Styl: Flight style
ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation-SWH. BASIC
SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment
PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment
SWS. Ring- Governor BasicGOV Gain: Governor gain
L Lmt. L rpm : Low limit hovering RPM
L Lmt. H rpm : Low limit idling RPM-Flight Tune Expert
HeadHld A : Head hold aileron
StopTune A : Stop tune aileron
HeadResp: Head Response
HeadHld E: Head hold elevator
StopTune E : Stop tune elevator-Rudder Expert
EXP. AVCS: Rudder exponential AVCS
EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential NORMAL
CNT. DlIn: Control delay in
CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
ANG: Pirouette speed
Tail Resp: Tail response

193 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

SETTING
A. Wired connection: Advanced settings

1

CAUTIONBe sure to connect and disconnect the CGY760R/CGY755 and
T16IZ SUPER connection cable with the power off.

1. Select "Gyro setting" on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

*If "CRSF" is ON in the system type of the linkage
menu, "Gyro setting" cannot be selected.
* At this time, if Gyro is not connected to T16IZ SUPER by wire,
the EQ ID screen appears.

2
When "GY Settings Transfer" isselected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ SUPER is written to the gyro.

2. Select "Start"

Select "Start" This will download
the gyro data to the T16IZ SUPER.

3

To basic menu
To expert menu
To receiver
3. Home screen is displayed◆ When copying data from Gyro A to Gyro B

Connect the gyro A to the T16IZ SUPER and press [Start]. (Enter the data of A into T16IZ SUPER)

If you press Start here, the B data will be written
to the T16IZ SUPER and the A data will be lost.

Connect Gyro B to T16IZ SUPER and press [GY Settings Transfer]. (Put data on A into gyro B)

194 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

SETTING
B. Wireless tunings
Before making Wireless tunings, it is necessary to download the setting data from the gyro to the T16IZ SUPER via a wired
connection.

First, wired connection

T16IZ SUPER

CGY755/CGY760R● Connect the receiver battery (3.5 to 8.4 V) to
one of the "AIL" to "S.B2" connectors otherthan "RPM" and "P.BOX".
(Do not connect to "RPM" and "P.BOX".)

P.BOX
S.I/F
CGY Connection Cable (included with gyro)

2

1

When "GY Settings Transfer" isselected, the gyro setting data saved
in T16IZ SUPER is written to the gyro.

2. Select "Start"
This will download the gyro data to the T16IZ SUPER.

1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

Next, Wireless tunings
Once the gyro data is stored in the T16IZ SUPER, if it is the same gyro, there is no need to make a wired connection from thesecond time on. If you want to use another gyro, you need to reconnect the cable and download the data.
To conﬁgure the Wireless tunings, set two consecutive
free channels to use for Wireless tunings in SBUS Basic
4/4.

Linkage menu → Function
Example using 13CH and 14CH

Set Control and Trim to NULL ( -- ).

2 consecutive free channels

12

1. Select “Gyro setting” on the last page of
Helicopter Model Menu

2. Select "Start"

34

3. Select "Wireless Tuning"

4. Items that can be set wirelessly are displayed
Check that the gyro to be
set matches the EQ ID.

195 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Home Screen

Home Screen Display
2QWKHKRPHVFUHHQEDVLFLQIRUPDWLRQVXFKDVVZDVKW\SH
J\UR RSHUDWLRQ PRGH VHQVLWLYLW\ DQG JRYHUQRU 21  2))
HQJLQHRSHUDWLQJWLPHHWFDUHGLVSOD\HG

Condition number
With switch operation from the transmitter, several parameters can be switched by
setting up to 5 types of data. If you set the condition switch to the channel having
the AFR function of the transmitter and set the point for each ﬂight condition with the
AFR point curve, it can also be linked with the ﬂight condition switch.
• When either the DG1 or DG 2 switch is selected, the following options are available.

For functions that can set conditions inthis manual, mark Cond is written.

Function Menu of your transmitter (DG1). Assigning DG1 to a switch or ﬂight mode allows theuse of two separate values for the condition selectable parameters.

Ｃond1 (Condition 1)●SWS.Rate●PIT.Rate●SWS.Ring●FLT.Styl

Switch DG1●Cnt.AuthAI●Cnt.AuthEL●EXPO●ELE.Comp●HeadHld A●HeadHld E●StpTune A●StpTune E●HeadResp●BaseGain AI EL●CYC.Rt●GOV.Gain●L Lmt.H rpm●L Lmt.L rpm

Ｃond2 (Condition2)●SWS.Rate●PIT.Rate●SWS.Ring●FLT.Styl●Cnt.AuthAI●Cnt.AuthEL●EXPO●ELE.Comp●HeadHld A●HeadHld E●StpTune A●StpTune E●HeadResp●BaseGain AI EL●CYC.Rt●GOV.Gain●L Lmt.H rpm●L Lmt.L rpm*Indicates when the setup style is "3D".

Switch Channel Rate
-100%

-35%

0%

35%

Cond1

100%

Cond2

Narrow
NeutralWide• If you set a condition switch channel, using the AFR function on that channel set a flat point
curve for each flight condition. Then you can utilize all 5 flights conditions.

Switch Channel Rate
Neutral
-100%

Cond1

-75%

-25%

Cond2

0%

25%

Cond3

75%

Cond4

100%

Cond5

100%
0%

Swash plate type
Displays the swash plate type set in"SWH. BASIC" menu.

-100%

Set the point curve with AFR for each ﬂight condition of the transmitter.

Battery voltage
Displays the voltage of thereceiver battery connected
to CGY.

Gyro operation mode /Gyro gain
Displays "AVCS" or "Normal" operation
mode and gyro gain of aileron (roll),elevator (pitch) and rudder (yaw) axis.

Governor ON / OFF

Roll and Elevator rate maximum display

Indicates the ON / OFF switch status of thegovernor function. When "ON" is displayed, thegovernor function is activated.

This screen displays the maximum roll rate and maximum elevator rate recorded during ﬂight. Data is reset when the power isturned off. If you want to check the maximum rate, leave the power on after ﬂight. Press and hold rate button to reset the display.

RPM display
The maximum RPM of the engine or rotor head RPM
memorized by the governor during operation is displayed.
Data is reset when the power is turned off. If you want tocheck multiple times during the ﬂight, leave the power onafter ﬂight. Press and hold RPM button to reset the display.

Engine running time
Displays the running time of the engine. Up to 9,999
hours are displayed.
Press and hold time button to reset the display. The
operation time is stored in memory even when the
power is turned off until it is reset.

196 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Home Screen
Home Screen

Basic menu screen◆ )OLJKW7XQH（$LOHURQ(OHYDWRU）◆ Swash Basic（Swash）◆ Rud Basic（Rudder）◆ Gov Basic（Governor）◆6%86%DVLF
Expert menu screen◆ Swash Detail（Swash）◆)OLJKW7XQH([SHUW（Aileron）◆5XGGHU([SHUW（Rudder）◆*RYHUQRU([SHUW（Governor）

Receiver screen◆ ,QWHUQDO5[◆5)W\SH197 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Basic Menu
$VWKHQDPHVXJJHVWVWKLVPHQXDOORZVFKDQJHVWRWKHEDVLFVHWWLQJVRI&*<
0DNHVXUHWRVHWHDFK"%$6,&0(18".
Basic menu screen◆ )OLJKW7XQH（$LOHURQ(OHYDWRU）◆ Swash Basic（Swash）◆ Rud Basic（Rudder）◆ Gov Basic（Governor）◆6%86%DVLF

198 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

S.BUS Basic Menu
The "SBUS BASIC" screen is accessed via the "%$6,&0(18" screen. Set the CH for each function according to the transmitter to be used.
$Q\XQXVHGIXQFWLRQVVKRXOGEHVHWWR,1+ ,QKLELWHG )RUH[DPSOHLIWKH*DLQ$(DQG*DLQ58'UHPRWHJDLQIXQFWLRQVDUHQRWJRLQJWREHXVHGWKHQVHWWKHPWR>,1+@7KH&*<5&*<ZLOOWKHQDOORZ\RXWRPDNHJDLQDGMXVWPHQWVZLWKLQWKHUHVSHFWLYHPHQXWARNING
Always verify that the S.BUS function assignments match your transmitter’s function(in the FUNCTION menu) assignments. If any
changes are made within the transmitter function assignments, then it will also be necessary to make the changes within the S.BUS
function assignments. To change the channel,
CGY and T16IZ SUPER must be connected.

The channel of each function
can be changed.

ELE2 channel Servo Type(If you want to use the ELE2 port for purposes other than swash.)This selects the ELE2 servo types. There are three types of the servo
driving frequency selection, AN:70 Hz, DG285 Hz, and 760 μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285 Hz mode but someof other brands of servos do not support DG:285 Hz mode. In this case,select the proper servo driving frequency per the manufacturer’s speciﬁcations.
If you select H4-00 or H4-45 with 4 servo swashes, cannot set this ELE2
port servo type. In that case, select all swash servo types in SWH basic
servo type.
Setting: AN:70 Hz /DG:760 μS /DG:285 Hz Initial setting: DG:285 Hz

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type ofservo you are using. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the
servo. Incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control during
ﬂight.

S. BUS connection: Condition on change channel
Using the methodology described previously, determine the "Cond CH #" andset the condition change channel of the transmitter. In this example, DG1 is theconditional change channel.

As with the ﬂight condition function of the transmitter, it is possible to utilize
pre-determined settings, each activated by a switch or switches on thetransmitter. By setting the condition switch on the channel with the AFR
function of the transmitter and setting the point for each ﬂight condition with
the AFR point curve, you can switch the condition of CGY760R/CGY755 inconjunction with the ﬂight condition switch of the transmitter.

This resets the S.BUS channel assignments back to the defaults.

2 consecutive free channels

Wireless channel
The wireless channel uses two consecutive channels. For example, if CH13
is set to "# 1", CH14 is automatically set to "# 2". Therefore, when using thisfunction, two consecutive free channels are required for the transmitter. It is notpossible to use a channel assign that is used for another function.

CAUTIONBe sure to check the operation for all conditions 1 to 5 before ﬂying.
The setting of "wireless CH" is possible only when the transmitterand the CGY are powered off and the CGY is turned on.
Be sure to connect and disconnect the CGY and T16IZ SUPER connection cable with the power off.

199 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Basic
7KLVPHQXLVXWLOL]HGWRSHUIRUPWKHEDVLFVHWXSRIVZDVKPRWLRQ"SWH. BASIC" screen from the "%$6,&0(18" screen.
7KH&*<5&*<LVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKHIROORZLQJVL[W\SHVVZDVKSODWHWARNING
Do not connect the servo to the gyros until you select the
servo type in the "SWH. BASIC" menu.
*If the servo type is incorrect, it is possible to damage the servos or CGY.

The green display is the current state.

(1) Setup style
3D mode contains a proven set of parameters which are good for not
only 3D but also F3C flying. F3C Mode and L.SCALE (Large scalemodel) Mode are for unique or special tuning types only.
*When the style is changed, setting of AIL/ELE/RUD is re-initialized anddefaults are changed.
L.SCALE: Initial parameter mode corresponding to a large machine with a
total length of 2.5 m or more.

(2) Gyro Set Dir: Mounting direction
Set the roll axis, pitch axis, yaw axis according to the mounting directionof CGY. When the LED on the Gx side ﬁnishes blinking, please turn the
power off and on again to conﬁrm that it is working properly.
Setting: 1 ~6 Initial setting: 1

WARNING
If you do not turn the power back on after changing "Gyro Set Dir", the gyro
will not operate properly, there is a risk of crashing.

Gyro Set Dir--- 4
Gyro Set Dir--- 1

CGY755 has no antenna

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

Gyro Set Dir--- 5

Gyro Set Dir--- 2
AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------N
RUD --------N

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------N
RUD --------R*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown inthe ﬁgure.

Gyro Set Dir--- 3

AIL ----------N
ELE ---------R
RUD --------R

Gyro Set Dir--- 6*Depending on the type of mounting plate,
it is also possible to mount as shown inthe ﬁgure.

AIL ----------R
ELE ---------R
RUD --------N(3) Servo Type
This selects the swash servo types. There are four types or modes of the servo driving
frequency selection, AN:70 Hz, DG:95 Hz, DG:140 Hz, DG285 Hz, and 760 μS. All Futaba
digital servos can be operated with fastest DG:285 Hz mode but some of other brands ofservos do not support DG:285 Hz mode. In this case, select the proper servo driving frequency per the manufacturer’s speciﬁcations.
Setting: AN:70 Hz /DG:95 Hz /DG:140 Hz /DG:760μS /DG:285 Hz
Initial setting: DG:285 Hz

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type of servo you areusing. Incorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo. Incorrect setting may
also result in a loss of control during ﬂight.

200 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Basic(4) SWASH Type: Swash change to plate type
Select the swash plate type. When you change the setting, other data is
initialized.
Setting: H-1 / H3-120 / H3-140 / H3-90 / H4-00 / H4-45

Initial setting: H3-120

WARNINGAll of the swash plate parameters are reset when the swash plate
type is changed. Doing so eliminates any possible errors or malfunctions within the system. After changing the swash plate type,
Please proceed through the entire setup process once again before
attempting to ﬂy the model.

FRONT

H3-140H3-120
PIT
PIT

H3-90
AIL

AIL
PIT

ELE

ELE

ELE

H-1

H4-45

H4-00
ELE
PIT

AIL

ELE

AIL
PIT

AIL

ELE2

PIT

ELE2

AIL

ELE

AIL --------------------Aileron servo
ELE ----------------- Elevator servo
PIT ---------Collective pitch servo
ELE2 ---- Second elevator servo

Your transmitter should be reset to the default settings and the swash plate
type selected with the transmitter should be set to "H-1" or single servo
mode. All CCPM mixing is set up and handled in the CGY, and the transmitter functions should not be used. Before starting model set-up, be sure thatall dual rates, pitch curve, and endpoint values are set to 100/100.

Swash Type

H-1

(5) Servo Dir #: Servo direction #Using different servo combinations will create the proper swash plate servo
movement in electronic CCPM models (eCCPM). In the H3-xx swash
mode, three of the swash servos directions are changed by pressing theServo Dir #. Choose the combination number which produces level swash
plate travel with a collective pitch input from the transmitter. There are 8
combination choices for the H3-xx swash mode. On H4-xx swash mode,
there are 16 combination choices. After selecting the combination number,aileron, elevator, pitch, and 2nd elevator servo parameters are automatically set.
Note: Occasionally the aileron or elevator function directions are reversed
even though collective pitch direction is correct. In this case, use the "SWS.
Dir parameter on the following screen (4/6) to ﬁx this later.

201 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Basic(6)AIL, ELE, PIT. Ntr:
Servo neutral adjustment
Adjust the neutral position of the swash servo (aileron, elevator, pitch,second elevator). The second elevator (ELE2) is displayed only when theswash type is H4-xx.
Setting ranges: +240 ~ -240 Initial value: 0(7) SWS. Dir: Swash direction settingThis selects the aileron, elevator and collective pitch direction. Reverse
the direction when the stick movement and swash movement are opposite. Each time you press the +/- button, the polarity switches.

(8) SWS. Rate: Rate adjustment*The current condition number of CGY is displayed.
*The setting with "C#" display can be set for each condition.
1. Use the "C#" button to select the condition number.
2. Next, adjust value of the condition selected by the r a t ebutton.

For functions that can set conditions inthis manual, mark Cond is written.

Cond

The Swash Rate settings are used to set a known base cyclic throw for the
gyro to calculate the compensations and gain scale. This value does not
represent the total cyclic throw, but rather shows the gyro a known point
for the gyro to understand the helicopters geometry. It is important to notethat one setting applies to both roll and pitch axes; they are not individually
adjusted.
(DUAL RATES MUST BE 100)
-Suggested amount of base cyclic pitch*800 size – 10 degrees*700 size – 9 degrees*600 - 550 size – 8 degrees*500 size – 7 degrees*450 and below- 6 degrees
Setting ranges: 0 ~100% Initial value: 50%(9) PIT. Rate: Rate adjustment

Cond

The [PIT.Rate] is the amount of collective pitch travel allowed. A goodstarting range for Sport, 3D and F3C is +/-10 to +/-12 degrees.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100 Initial value: 50%(10) SWS. Ring

Cond

This parameter is used to set the total maximum of cyclic throw as well as
limit the swash travel to prevent binding of the swash plate servos when thecontrol stick is moved toward a corner (for example, full right and full aft cyclic).
Setting ranges: 50 ~100% Initial value: 130%(11) AGy. Dir: Aileron (roll) Gyro direction
EGy. Dir: Elevator (pitch) Gyro direction
This parameter controls which direction the CGY (roll / pitch axis) willcompensate when the helicopter rolls (pitches). Pick the helicopter up
and roll the helicopter to the right. The CGY should compensate by adding left cyclic to the swash plate. (Pick the helicopter up and rotate thenose of the helicopter downward. The CGY should compensate by adding
aft cyclic to the swash plate.)
If the CGY compensates in the wrong direction, then it will be necessary
to reverse the compensation direction setting.

WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
ﬂight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will rollor pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.
Be sure to set this aileron motion direction and elevator motion direction
so that F/F mixing (Ele Comp and Rud. F/F menu) works effectively. Also,
please perform this operation after setting the direction of operation.

(13) STK. Dir ELE: Elevator operation(12) STK. Dir AIL: Aileron operation

Load the direction of elevator into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Up" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the elevator stick fully to the up. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the operation direction of elevator is memorized.

Load the direction of Aileron into the gyro.
[Setting method] Touch the "Right" button to enter the setting mode.
"Sure?" Is displayed. Operate the Aileron stick fully to the right. If you
touch the [Yes] button, the operation direction of Aileron is memorized.

WARNING
Verify that the CGY compensates in the correct direction before
ﬂight. If the compensation direction is incorrect the model will rollor pitch uncontrollably even before it leaves the ground.

202 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Basic(14) Pit. High: Pitch high memorizing
This parameter saves the full positive collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. High" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the high. Touch the “Pit. High” rate
button again. ”Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The fullpositive pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

(15) Pit. Zero: Pitch zero memorizing
This parameter saves the zero collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Zero" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick to 0 degree pitch. Touch the “Pit. Zero” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The zero
pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

(16) Pit. Low: Pitch low memorizing
This parameter saves the full negative collective pitch point into the CGY.
[Setting method] Touch the "Pit. Low" rate button to enter the setting
mode. Operate the throttle stick fully to the low. Touch the “Pit. Low” rate
button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch the [Yes] button. The full
negative pitch signal will be saved to the CGY.

203 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）)OLJKW WXQH VHWV FRQWURO RI KHOLFRSWHU UROO DLOHURQ  DQG SLWFK HOHYDWRU  D[LV )/7
781(VFUHHQIURPWKH%$6,&0(18VFUHHQ

(1) Base. Gain: Gyro base gain setting

Cond

This sets the Cyclic Gyro Base Gain. If the Rotor Head Gain (Rot HD Gn)
Channels are set to "INH" within the CGY "SBUS.BASIC" menu, then the
remote transmitter gain adjustment is not available. Thus the actual working gain for the cyclic gyros is set by using the "Base Gain" button within
this parameter.
Set to 100, a transmitter Gain value of 100% will display 100% on thisparameter. If a pilot is in need of more gain, base gain can be increased toallow the gain on the CGY to be higher than 100%.
Note: If using a 6 CH or less "Base Gain" is equivalent to the rotor headgain and can be adjusted manually on the gyro instead of via the transmitter.
Setting ranges: 0 ~150% Initial value: 100%(2) CYC. Rt: Cyclic rate setting

Cond

Cyclic rate sets the maximum Cyclic rate sets the maximum roll and ﬂip
rate (d/s) as limited by the model’s ability to reach that set rate. Flip androll rates are set together with this single parameter.
Setting ranges: 10 ~500 d/s Initial value: 300 d/s

204 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）(3) Cnt. AuthAIL: Control Authority Aileron

Cond

Aileron Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try toachieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize to the "CYC. Rt" value; alower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when making rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression themodel is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%
Initial value: Cnt. AuthAIL = 40%(4) Cnt. AuthELE: Control Authority Elevator

Cond

Elevator Control Authority changes the rate at which the gyro will try toachieve the set "CYC. Rt". A higher value will create a quicker accelerated
reaction to a stick input to reach and stabilize at the "CYC. Rt" value; alower value will reach the desired "CYC. Rt" slower and accelerate slower
to the desired angular rate.
Note: Setting this value too high could lead to a jerky feeling when making rapid stick corrections, a value too low will give you the impression themodel is not following the pilot’s stick inputs. Values of between 20-60 are
the suggested range for most helicopters.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%
Initial value: Cnt. AuthELE = 40%(5) EXPO.: Exponential

Cond

Tune the exponential as desired to change the feel of the cyclic controls
around center stick. Negative values soften control feel; Positive values
increase sensitivity.
Note: that any exponential present in the TRANSMITTER adds to the value
set in the CGY.
Setting ranges: -100 ~0~+100% Initial value: -20%

(6) FLT. Styl: Flight style

Cond

Increasing this value will create a more robotic reaction to the stick, leaving
the pilot with the impression that the model is locked into in a position after
an input. It will also tend to have a more calculated feeling when making
inputs.
-Lowering the value will make the model feel more ﬂuid and easy to rotate withthe stick input. The model will feel a little more lively during faster cyclic movements and direction changes.
Setting ranges: 0 ~+100 n Initial value: +50 n

205 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flight Tune（Aileron / Elevator Basic settings）

Note: To effectively operate the next "ELE Comp"(elevator correction), make sure to set "Pit High", "PitZero", "Pit Low" on the "SWASH BASIC" menu.

(7) ELE. Comp: Elevator pre compensation

Cond

A helicopter that has a head that rotates clockwise, will exhibit a tendency
whereby the nose will be pulled towards the disk with positive blade pitch.
Conversely, the helicopter will push the nose away from the rotor disk during negative pitch inputs. In an instance of a slower servo set-up or larger(heavier) rotor blades, a small amount of elevator pre compensation may
be needed to keep the nose of the helicopter ﬂat at all times during collective pitch changes. In most cases with helicopter high-speed servos
and standard 3D rotor blades, this function is not needed. If you do noticea slight tendency for the nose to try to rise or fall with collective input, increasing "ELE Comp" will reduce this behavior.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100%

Initial value: 0%(8) HP. Auth.: High pitch authority
When a rotor blades angle of attack is increased, the rotor blade becomesless reactive, in turn the helicopter might not feel as reactive at high pitch
angles. If you want to increase the reaction of the cyclic during loaded andhigh pitch maneuvers, "HP. Auth" will increase control authority and can beused to make the helicopter feel more linear under loading. Some helicopters with direct link CCPM may use this to increase stability at high collective pitch ﬂying as well. If a helicopter feels good for normal ﬂying, but not
the same during loaded situations, "HP. Auth" can be used to make it feel
more linear. If "HP. Auth" is set very high, the helicopter will feel more aggressive at high pitch than around neutral.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100% Initial value: HP. Auth = 0%

206 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder BasicIn the "Rudder Basic"PHQX\RXPDNHWKHEDVLFVHWWLQJRIWKHUXGGHUJ\UR
WARNING"Rudder Basic" screen from the "%$6,&0(18" screen.

The servo type parameter within the CGY mustmatch the type of servo you are using. Incorrect
settings may damage the CGY or the servo. An
incorrect setting may also result in a loss of control
during ﬂight.

(1) Servo Type
Select the appropriate setting for the tail rotor servo.
Setting: Analog /DG:1520 /DG760
Initial setting: DG:1520
DG 1520: BLS254, BLS257, S9254, S9257
DG 760: BLS276SV, BLS251SB, BLS251, S9256, S9251(2) Gyro. Dir: Gyro direction

WARNING
Do not connect the tail rotor servo to the gyro until the
servo type has been selected. Operating the servo using theincorrect setting may damage the CGY or the servo.
Do not operate with the linkage connected until the "Srv.
Limit" function correctly sets the servo limit point. If theservo operates beyond the linkage operating range, there is adanger of either the servo or helicopter being damaged.

This parameter controls which direction the CGY (yaw axis) will compensate when the helicopter rotates. Hold the tail rotor linkage over the linkage ball on the servo, pick the helicopter up by the main shaft and rotate
the mechanics counter-clockwise. The CGY should compensate by adding
clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades. If the CGY compensates byadding counter-clockwise rotation pitch to the tail rotor blades, then it will
be necessary to reverse the Compensation Direction setting by pressingthe "Gyro Dir".
Setting value: Normal /Reverse

Initial value: Normal(3) Work Mode: Gyro working mode
The available choices are CMT, Normal or AVCS. The CMT mode will allow
you to select either AVCS or Normal mode via the transmitter. In Normal
mode the gyro will always operate in Normal Rate Mode, and when AVCS
is selected, it will always operate in AVCS Mode.
Setting: CMT /Normal /AVCS

Initial setting: CMT(4) GY. Gain: Gyro base gain settingThis parameter sets the base gain of the gyro. This can be used to adjust
the gain % if your actual transmitter gain does not match the gain on the
CGY correctly.
Setting ranges: 0 ~150% Initial value: 100%

(5) Srv. Limit: Limit setting

WARNING
When using the CGY for the ﬁrst time, or when making mechanical changes involving throw, you must check and set the servo limits
again to prevent binding.

When the CGY is in the "Srv.Limit" parameter mode, the gyro will no longer operate and the tail servo will always center when the tail rotor stick
is released. Always exit the setup functions before attempting to ﬂy themodel. Before each ﬂight, always ensure that the gyros are operating andcompensating in the correct direction. The Servo Limit parameter within
the CGY is used to set the mechanical limits for the tail rotor servo. To
obtain the best performance it is recommended to set the limit in the CGY
to 100% for both directions and then adjust the servo arm length to set themechanical endpoints. After that has been completed, use the servo limit
parameter to make small adjustments that could not be made mechanically. Values between 90% and 110% are considered optimal.
[ Setting method ]Operate the rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to set. Touchthe button that is lit in green to set the limit. Do the same for the other side.

207 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor Basic
7KLVPHQXVHWVWKHJRYHUQRU¶VIXQGDPHQWDOIXQFWLRQV7KHPHQX6HUYROLPLWSRLQWVHWWLQJPXVWEHVHW¿UVW

Note: When using the governor function, be sure
to make each setting of "Governor Basic".

"Governor Basic" screen from the "%$6,&0(18" screen.

Note: After completing the linkage of the throttle,
be sure to set the "Servo limit point setting" ﬁrst,
and then set the other functions.

(1) Governor: Governor active
Set the governor operation mode of CGY. The initial setting is "ACT (active)"
where, as the designation implies, the governor is active. If you do not want
to use governor, select "INH (Inhibit)".
Setting: ACT (Active) / INH (Inhibit)

Initial setting: ACT(2) Gear Ratio:
Input the main rotor gear ratio by pushing the "Gear Ratio" button to selectthe desired working mode.
Setting ranges: 1.00 ~ 50.00 t

Initial value: 8.00 t

Notes:• If the gear ratio is not properly set, theset speed and actual engine speed will
be different.
• The gear ratio should be given in thehelicopter instruction manual. If thehelicopter instruction manual does notgive the gear ratio, calculate the gear
ratio as follows:Enginenion gear
N2

Rotor
main gear
N1

Gear ratio = N1/N2
Carry values less than 1/1000 to thenext whole number.

(3) Pole Num.: Pole number(4) Servo Type
Select the throttle servo type. Digital servos offer the best response.
Setting: Analog /DG:1520

Initial setting: Analog

WARNING
The servo type parameter within the CGY must match the type ofservo you are using. Incorrect settings may damage the CGY or the
servo. An incorrect setting may also result in the loss of control during
ﬂight.

This parameter is used when using a direct phase sensor attachment to abrushless motor lead. Input the motor pole count as speciﬁed by the brushless motor manufacturer. When using any revolution sensor other than adirect phase sensor type, set the pole number to 2 p.
Note: For nitro use, set to 2 p.
Note: The input signal range of the CGY is 0.0 v - 3.0 v. Exceeding this voltage range may cause damage to the CGY.
Setting ranges: 2 -24 P

Initial value: 2 P(5) RPM set.: RPM setting
Setting the main rotor RPM. This is calculated by engine revolution withthe gear ratio of the main shaft.
When the rotation speed can be set with the governor mixing function of
the transmitter, it is necessary to ﬁrst match the display rpm value of 1-2-3
of "RPM Set" with the display rpm value of the transmitter.
Setting ranges: off /700 ~ 4,000 rpm Initial value: 1,000 rpm*To set lower than 1,000 rpm, set "Low. Revo" of "Governor Expert" menu to 700rpm.

208 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor Basic(6) Stick sw.: Stick switch
The governor can be activated by throttle stick position.
[Setting method] Touch the "Stick SW" button to enter the setting mode.
Operate the throttle stick to the position where you want to turn Governor
ON. Touch the “Stick SW” button again. “Sure?” Is displayed. If you touch
the [Yes] button, the ON position is memorized. This stick switch function isalways enabled when the next "ON / OFF sw" is "INH" or the "Governor ON /OFF switch is not set by S.BUS setting.
When governor is turned on and oﬀ by transmitter throttle stick
The data is set so that the governor can beturned on and off with the transmitter throttle
stick position. The following describes this operation.

(Governor operating point)
Set speed• Throttle stick over set point and more than 60%
ONof set rotation speed.

The stick is at, or beyond the set point andis 60% of the rotation
100% speed value of the governor.

*This is the setting value of "Gov. On. Revo: Governor ON revolution setting".
• Throttle stick held at the set point or more ReON
mains.

(8) BAT F/S: Battery fail safe
When the receiver battery voltage becomes equal to or less than "BFS.
Volt" set in the "Governor Expert" menu, the battery fail safe function is activated, the governor function is turned OFF, and the throttle servo moves
to the set position.
When Battery Fail Safe is enabled, items for setting the throttle servo position are displayed. The setting method is the same as "Stick sw", so pleaserefer to this section of the manual for information on setting this function.
If the battery voltage is lower than the set voltage of the "Battery F/
S" for about 3 seconds, the Gx (gyro) LED of the CGY solid red light.
When "Battery F/S" is set to "ACT" in "GOV BASIC", the servo is ﬁxed
to the throttle position set by "Battery F/S". When the throttle stick is
set to the slowest position, the "Battery F/S" function is temporarily
canceled. However, after 30 seconds, the "Battery F/S" function is
activated again and the servo is locked. When the "Battery F/S" operates, quickly landing and stopping the helicopter, please charge thebattery.

• Throttle stick position is below the set point selected.
OFF

Set point or less0%(OFF at slow side)

When idle up• When the throttle curve is set at idle up, and when the throttle output is over the set
value (initial value: 30%), the governor will always and remain ON even if the stick islowered to the bottom.

 212))VZ*RYHUQRURQRৼVZLWFK
This parameter allows the user to turn the governor on or off via a switch
on the transmitter. Choose INH if you do not want to use it.
When turning on /oﬀ governor with switch
Select the ON / OFF switch channel with "GOV sw channel" on "SBUS BASIC"
menu.
Setting the switch to the ON position turns on, or enables thegovernor. The following describes this operation.
• Switch set to on position and engine running at 60% or moreONof set speed• Throttle stick set to maximum slow position

ON

Governor can be turnedon and off by a switch.

WARNING• Switch set to off position

When using the CGY for the ﬁrst time, or when making changes inthe throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.

When you activate the switch, the direction setting of the switch is displayed.
Select the switch ON / OFF direction (Normal / Reverse).

OFF

WARNING
When using the CGY for the ﬁrst time, or when making changes inthe throw of a servo and its linkage, always perform the limit setting
operation.

(9) Lim. set: Servo limit point setting
Servo limit point setting deﬁnes the overall travel range for the throttle servo. It is fundamental for governor operation and must be set prior to otherfunctions. Servo limits must also be reset when the throttle linkage or trim
are changed.
How to set the servo limit point:
Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button to enter the setting mode. Set the transmitter’s
throttle stick to the idle position. Touch the “Lim.Set Id” button again. The
limit of idle will be saved to the CGY. The cursor will move to "Lim. Set Hi".
Set the stick to the full high position. Touch the “Lim.Set Hi” button again.
The limit of high will be saved to the CGY. If the setting data is not normal(servo operation amount is 50% or less), "Err" is displayed. In this case,check the transmitter setting and repeat this procedure once again.

(10) Limit Test: Check the set limit point
Check the set limit point. Press "Idle" or "High" to move the servo to each
limit point. Press “End” to end the test.

209 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor Basic(11) SenseTyp: Sensor type
Select the type of governor sensor.
Nitro (BPS-1 backplate; Magnet Type)
1:1 Magnet "1:1 Magn" (Magnet type applied to helicopter part that turns at
the same RPM as the main rotor)
HPoleEP: For Electric motors 8 poles and above
LPoleEP: For electric motors 6 poles.

(12) GOV Gain: Governor gain

Cond

Governor Gain. If the value of the Governor Gain is set too low, the helicopter's RPM will ﬂuctuate with collective and cyclic pitch changes. Conversely, if the number is too high, the RPM itself will ﬂuctuate and surge
during ﬂight.
Setting ranges: 1 ~100%
Initial value: Nitro = 40%, 1:1Magn = 60%, HPoleEP= 30%, LPoleEP = 10%(13) L Lmt. L rpm / H rpm: Low limit RPM

Cond

Low RPM Limit sets the minimum amount of throttle that the governor willcommand during an over-speed situation. Too low of value the engine
could shut off or not recover power quickly enough during the next collective movement. If the value is set too high, the governor will not control
overspeed when the rotor head is unloaded.
Use:
L Lmt. L rpm: For RPMS of 700-1700
L Lmt. H rpm For RPMS of 1701-4000
Setting ranges: L Lmt. L rpm = 0 ~80%, L Lmt. H rpm = 10 ~80%
Initial value:
L Lmt. L rpm = 25%, L Lmt. H rpm = 45%(14) SBUS2 rpm out: RPM display on transmitter
When displaying the rpm with the telemetry function, set it to ACT.
Setting: ACT (Active) / INH (Inhibit)

Initial setting: INH(15) SBUS2 rpm Slot: RPM display on transmitter
Set the slot number of the telemetry rotation sensor registered on thetransmitter side.
This must be set so that no slots overlap one another.

(16) Rev. Sensor: Revolution sensor testingThis menu is utilized to ensure that the revolution sensor is functioning properly.
In order to test the sensor, do NOT start the engine. Instead, we recommend turning the engine over by hand or the utilization of a starter. To prevent inadvertent
ignition of the engine, do NOT use a glow plug igniter when turning the engine over.
The numerical values on the left side of the display are the current value. The right side of the display indicates the maximum sensor value. The output level needs
to be more than 60% for correct governor operation. Also, when using the backplate sensor, the signal level of the backplate sensor varies depending on the rotation speed (3,000 rpm or more is the detectable rotation speed).
By the telemetry function, the number of revolutions read by the governor sensor can be displayed on the monitor of the transmitter. In order to be able to display, activate the telemetryrotation sensor (SBS-01RM) on the transmitter and set the gear ratio to 1.00.
Note: It can not be used when the transmitter is FASSTest 12 CH system.

210 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Expert Menu
7KLVPHQXHQDEOHVWKHXVHUWRIXUWKHUUH¿QHWKHJ\URDQGJRYHUQRUVHWWLQJVExpert Menu

◆ Swash Detail（Swash）◆)OLJKW7XQH([SHUW（Aileron・(OHYDWRU）◆5XGGHU([SHUW（Rudder）◆*RYHUQRU([SHUW（Governor）

211 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder Expert
7KHUXGGHU([SHUWPHQXDOORZVIRUIXUWKHUUH¿QHPHQWRIWKHWDLOURWRUJ\URSHUIRUPDQFH5XGGHU([SHUWVFUHHQIURPWKH(;3(570(18'VFUHHQ

(1) RUD Ntr: Rudder servo neutral settingThis parameter is used to set the neutral position of the rudder servo. Position the rudder servo arm as perpendicular as possible to the tail rotor
pushrod prior to making adjustments with this parameter.
Setting ranges: -240 ~0 ~+240

Initial value: +0(2) EXP. AVCS / EXP. NORM: Rudder exponential
This parameter sets the feel of the tail rotor control around center. Whenset to [0] the control curve is linear. Using a [+] value the tail rotor will be
more sensitive around neutral conversely, using a [-] value will soften the
feeling around neutral. The RUD EXP parameter in your transmitter canalso be used to tune the tail rotor to a desired feeling.
Setting ranges: -100 ~0 ~+100% Initial value: AVCS = -20%, NORM = -20%
Sports = AVCS -60% / NORMAL -40%, 3D = AVCS -20% / NORMAL -20%>

212 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder Expert(3) CNT. DlIn: Control delay inThis parameter sets the delay as you move the stick from neutral towardleft or right. Larger values result in a softer tail rotor feel off center. Thisparameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. Follow these same procedures to adjust the tail rotor feel in the
opposite direction.
[ Setting method ]Move the transmitter Rudder stick right or left in the direction you want to
set. Touch the green button to enter the setting mode and set the delay
amount. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges: 0 ~ 20 n

Initial value: 15 n(4) CNT. DlOut: Control delay out
This parameter sets the delay when the stick is returned back to the neutral position. This parameter is useful to tune how aggressively the tailrotor stops following a pirouette. The higher the value, the softer the stop.
This parameter must be adjusted individually for LEFT and RIGHT tail rotor
commands. The setting method is the same as "CNT. DlIn", so please referto the information above.
Setting ranges: 0 ~ 20 n

Initial value: 12 n(5) ANG: Pirouette speed
This parameter adjusts the maximum pirouette speed of the tail rotor thatthe gyro will allow at 100% dual rate.
Setting ranges: 100 ~999 dInitial value: = 720 d,

213 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Rudder Expert(6) F/F.Rate U / F/F.Rate D: F/F mixing rate
Feed Forward mix is used to counteract sudden increases in torque from the
motor during fast collective pitch changes. If you notice a tail kick, using (rightrudder on Clockwise rotor disk, left rudder on CCW) F/F mixing can be tuned
to reduce the tail kick. The mixing amount can be individually set for high pitch
side (U) and low pitch (D) side with zero pitch as the center.
Setting ranges: -100 ~0~+100%

Initial value: +0%(7) ACC Gain: F/F mixing acceleration gain
In low head speed situations where a lot of F/F Mixing might be needed,
acc. gain boosts the input and removes it immediately after to help cure thesudden change in torque, but it does not allow the large tail rotor input toalter the axial behavior of the helicopter.
Setting ranges: 0 ~200%

Initial value: 0%(8) Tail Resp: Tail response(9) RESET : Rudder gyro data reset

The goal is to match the response between the helicopter tail response and the
gyro control. This feature is utilized to do so. 1 is the fastest response. Generally, if the tail response is slow or the servo's speed is slow, setting the tailresponse setting late will increase the gyro sensitivity and improve the control
performance. Also, if the response setting is delayed, the power consumption of
the servo will be reduced. However, if the response setting is too late, the operation cannot keep up with high-speed operation of the helicopter.

This resets the "Rudder Expert" setting back to the defaults.

Setting ranges: 1 ~5

Initial value: 1

214 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Flight Tune Expert（Aileron/Elevator Gyro Expert Setting）
The "Flight Tune Expert"PHQXVDOORZIXUWKHUUH¿QHPHQWRIF\FOLFJ\URSHUIRUPDQFH"Flight Tune Expert" screen
from the "(;3(570(18'" screen.
(1) HeadHld A / HeadHld E: Head hold aileron / elevator

Cond

This features is used to adjust the heading hold aspect of the gyro control.
If the helicopter is not holding angle or cyclic control rates, increasing theheading hold gain will improve holding the helicopter at a certain angle andimprove the cyclic rate consistency. If this is set too high you could see an
oscillation on that axis. Lowering the heading hold below default would be
used if the transmitter gain is reduced and a consistent oscillation is still
not ﬁxed during ﬂight.
Setting ranges: 0 ~200%

Initial value: 80%(2) StopTune A : Stop tune aileron

Cond

Cyclic stop tuning on the aileron axis. If the helicopter continues to coast
after an after an ail roll, lowering "StpTune A" will create a harder stop action
to remove the coasting. If the helicopter bounces on the aileron axis after anaileron control input, increasing "StpTune A" will reduce this bounce.
Setting ranges: 0 ~250%

Initial value: 80%(3) StopTune E: Stop tune elevator

Cond

Cyclic stop tuning on the elevator axis. If the helicopter, after an elevator
ﬂip, continues to coast, lowering "StopTune E" will create a harder stop
action to remove the coasting. If the helicopter continues to coast after anelevator ﬂip, lowering the "Stop tune E" will reduce this bounce.
Setting ranges: 0 ~250%

Initial value: 80%(4) HeadResp: Head Response

Cond

Head Response matches the gyro control speed to that which the helicopter is capable of reacting. In a standard helicopter a Head Responseof 1 should always be used, but on some scale applications, or uniquely
designed rotor heads, increasing head response might be needed to cureover correction of the gyro.
Setting ranges: 1 ~10

Initial value: 1(5) DeadBand: Dead band
Transmitter control dead band. If you are noticing inconsistent swash platedrift or poor initialization it could be poor transmitter potentiometer resolution. If you have to increase this value beyond 10.0, it is best to checkcalibration on your transmitter.
Setting ranges: 0 ~25

Initial value: 4.0(6) RESET : FLT tune data reset
This resets the "FLT.Tun" setting back to the defaults.

215 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Detail
7KHVZDVKGHWDLOVHWWLQJLVXVHGWRNHHSWKHVZDVKSODWHOHYHODWKLJKDQGORZFROOHFWLYHSLWFKWRF\FOLFLQWHUDFWLRQVDQGF\FOLF
pitch to collective pitch interactions. "6ZDVK'HWDLO" screen from the "(;3(570(18'" screen.
(1) PIT

AIL: collective pitch

aileron mixing rate

Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that theswash plate is traveling ﬂat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%(2) PIT

Initial value: 100%

ELE: collective pitch

elevator mixing rate

Going from MID to HIGH and MID to LOW collective pitch check that theswash plate is traveling ﬂat throughout the entire range.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%(3) PIT

Initial value: 100%

ELE2: collective pitch

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the pitch to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rates canboth be adjusted individually for both full high and low collective positions.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%

Initial value: 100%

(4) AIL

collective pitch mixing rate

PIT: aileron

At the middle collective pitch, check that during right to left and left to rightaileron action the swash plate is staying level on both the elevator and collective pitch axis. If the swash plate is rising or falling with aileron inputs.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%(5) AIL

Initial value: 100%

ELE: aileronelevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the aileron to elevator mixing rate. The rate can be
adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting is only
available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%(6) AIL

Initial value: 100%

ELE2: aileron

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the aileron to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted for left and right directions individually. Note: This setting
is only available if the H4-45 swash mode has been selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%

216 ‫ڀ‬Initial value: 100%ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Detail(7) ELE

PIT: elevator

collective pitch mixing rate

During back and forward elevator inputs at middle collective, check if theswash plate is raising or lowering during the input.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150% Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 100%(8) ELE

AIL: elevator

aileron mixing rate

While moving the elevator back and forth at middle collective, check tomake sure the aileron axis is staying level.
[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: This setting can not be used when H4-00 swash mode is selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150% Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 100%(9) ELE

ELE2: elevator

2nd elevator mixing rate

This parameter adjusts the elevator to 2nd elevator mixing rate. The rate
can be adjusted separately for up and down directions individually.
Note: This setting is only available if the H4-xx swash mode has been
selected.
Setting ranges: 30 ~150%

Initial value: 100%

(10) AIL High / AIL Low: Linkage compensation aileron
At HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash plate isstaying level on the elevator and collective axis when using aileron inputs.
If the swash plate is rising or falling:[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/right; high/left; low/right; low/left
Setting ranges: 0 ~100% Initial value: 0%(11) AIL Dir: Compensation direction of the aileron
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compensation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting: +/-217 ‫ڀ‬Initial setting: +ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Swash Detail(12) ELE High / ELE Low: Linkage compensation elevator
At both the HIGH pitch and LOW pitch check to make sure that the swash
plate is staying level on the aileron and collective axis when using elevator
inputs. If the swash plate is rising or falling:[Setting method] Operate the transmitter stick in the direction you want to
set. Touch the button lit in green to enter the setting mode and adjust the
mixing rate. Do the same for the other side.
Note: check all four directions: high/back; high/forward; low/back; low/forward.
Setting ranges: 0 ~ 100% Initial value: 0%(13) ELE Dir: Compensation direction of the elevator
If the above Data (+/-) correction from 0-100 is NOT in the correct compensation direction, change the value from [+] or [-].
Setting: +/-Initial setting: +(14) Speed Comp: Speed compensation
In 120 degrees CCPM all servos do not travel the same distance on elevator input. Having previously set the ELE-PIT and ELE-AIL parameters, if
during rapid movement of the elevator axis the swash plate is not staying
level, use the "Speed Comp" button to match all servo speeds. Note: a (+will slow the Aileron/Pitch Servo – will reduce speed comp on Aileron/Pitch
Servo).
Setting ranges: 0 ~100% Initial value: H3-120 = 50%, except H3-120 = 0%(15) SWASH Rot: Swash rotation
Using the "SWASH Rot" button, electronically add rotor head phasing to
the swash plate controls. If possible, it is recommended to use mechanicalphasing adjustment, but if the rotor head does not allow this and you feelthat the model is NOT ﬂying axially on each control input, this parametercan be used to adjust the pure reaction of each axis in ﬂight. (Typically advanced phasing on clockwise rotor disk and a slight clockwise increase inswash plate alignment vs rotor axle are needed to create an axial reaction.
The opposite is true for a counterclockwise rotor disk model.)Setting ranges: -90 deg ~+90 deg Initial value: +0 deg(16) RESET : Swash detail data reset
This resets the "Swash Detail" setting back to the defaults.

218 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor Expert
7KLVPHQXVHWVWKH*RYHUQRU([SHUWSDUDPHWHUVDOORZLQJWKHXVHUWRIXUWKHUUH¿QHWKHJRYHUQRUVHWWLQJV*RYHUQRU([SHUWVFUHHQIURPWKH(;3(570(18'VFUHHQ
(1) Work Mode: Governor working mode
Sets the governing type mode.
- GOVERNOR (Governor Mode) – RPM is entirely controlled by the GOV
once it has engaged. The GOV will do whatever it takes to hold a constant
RPM throughout ﬂight.
- Rev. Lmt (Limiter Mode) – Throttle control follows the throttle curves toadvance the throttle position during flight, but controls the RPM during
throttle reduction by not letting the RPM overspeed past the set RPM.
When the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, the menu (5) "THR. Mode" should be
set to Tx.Curve mode.
Setting: GOVERNOR /Rev. Lmt

Initial setting: GOVERNOR(2) Revo Disp: Governor working modeThis enables the user to display either the desired rotor RPM or the Engine
RPM accordingly.
Setting: Rotor /Engine

Initial setting: Rotor(3) F/F. Cyclic: Feed Forward from Cyclic
Increasing the value will add throttle with cyclic commands to aid in RPM
stability.
Setting ranges: 0 ~100% Initial value: 0%(4) Yaw. Comp: Governor working mode
Yaw compensation allows the governor to more rapidly correct for changes
in power demands of the model resulting from yaw input. Set the mode tomatch the gyro installation direction. Select from: CW/TOP, CW/BOTM,
CCW/TOP, CCW/BOTM.
Note: if the user has selected the governor only mode, this parameter isinhibited.
Revolution ﬂuctuation in the case of pirouettes
The governor detects the rpm via the revolution sensor mounted in theengine section. During a pirouettes, the helicopter itself rotates, so that its
pirouettes speed is added (reduced) to the engine speed. Therefore, themain rotor speed will ﬂuctuate accordingly. Since the CGY has a gyro, it canaccurately measure the pirouette speed. The yaw rate correction is thus
determined by a combination of gyro function and governor function.
CW: clockwise rotor direction
CCW: counter clockwise rotor direction
TOP: Gyro top/name emblem facing up
BOTM: Gyro top/name emblem facing down
Setting: CW/TOP, CW/BOTM, CCW/TOP, CCW/BOTM

Initial setting: CW/TOP(5) THR. Mode: Throttle data modeThis parameter selects the throttle input operation.
Optimize:
CGY sets the throttle input signal to optimum. There is no need to consider
the throttle curve setting on the transmitter.
Fixed:
This is the suggested mode for use with electric motors. This setting ensuresthat there is a ﬁxed throttle input as is related to the helicopter revolution.
Tx.Curve:
If this mode is selected, the CGY uses the exact throttle input from the transmitter. As such, the throttle curve setting on the transmitter is required.
Note: when the Rev.Lmt mode is selected, this mode should also be selected.
Setting: GOVERNOR /Rev. Lmt

219 ‫ڀ‬Initial setting: GOVERNORŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Governor Expert(6) Revo. Up Dly: Revolution change up delay
How quickly the RPM changes when increasing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and ﬂight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Setting ranges: 2 ~40 Frm

Initial value: 8 Frm(7) Revo. Dn Dly: Revolution change down delay
How quickly the RPM changes when reducing RPM between two different
RPM conditions and ﬂight modes. A higher number slows the RPM change
rate; a lower value speeds up the RPM change rate.
Setting ranges: 2 ~40 Frm

Initial value: 10 Frm(8) Start Dly: Start delay
How quickly the RPM stabilizes to the set RPM from when the GOV isturned ON. A higher value slows down the spool up rate; a lower value
speeds up the spool up rate.
Setting ranges: 2 ~20 Frm

Initial value: 5 Frm(9) Gov. On. Revo: Governor ON revolution settingThis parameter tells the governor at what percentage of the set rpm it is tobecome active. The default value is 60%. In this case, the governor will not
engage until the engine rpm reaches 60% of the set rpm. If you feel thatthe time for governor engagement is too slow, decrease the value to 50 ~55%. The starting time will be faster.
Setting ranges: 50 ~90%

Initial value: 60%(10) BFS. Volt: Battery F/S voltage settingThis parameter sets the battery fail safe and low battery alarm voltage
levels, or thresholds. Set the proper voltage as determined by the battery type. The battery characteristics are different depending on cell type/chemistry.
Suggested setting voltages are as follows.
• 4 cells NiCd or NiMH (Normal: 4.8 v) = 3.8 v• 2 cells LiFe (Normal: 6.6 v) = 6.0 ~6.2 v• 2 cells LiPo (Normal: 7.4 v) = 7.2 ~7.4 v(11) Low. Revo: Low revolution settingThis value is set to assign the lowest possible governing RPM. If the RPM isbelow, or can not reach this RPM, the governor will not engage. Select between either 1,000 rpm or 700 rpm. It corresponds also to a helicopter with arotor speed of 1,000 rpm or less, such as a large gas machine.
Setting: 700 /1,000 rpm

Initial setting: 1000 rpm(12) RESET : Governor expert data reset
This resets the "Governor Expert" setting back to the defaults.

220 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŰŲŧŨůŃŰŨűŸŃŋŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŌ
7KH GHGLFDWHG PL[HV HWF XVDEOH ZKHQ
multicopter model type is selected are displayed
LQWKLV0RGHOPHQXIXQFWLRQVVHFWLRQ

These dedicated mixes can be set for each
IOLJKWFRQGLWLRQDVUHTXLUHG:KHQ\RXZDQWWR
XVHWKHV\VWHPE\VZLWFKLQJWKHVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQ E\ VZLWFK RU VWLFN SRVLWLRQ XVH WKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV
8SWRFRQGLWLRQVFDQEHXVHG

ŰƒƇƈƏŃƐƈƑƘŃŋŰƘƏƗƌƆƒƓƗƈƕŌŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑƖŃƗƄƅƏƈ
Servo monitor

Displays the servo test and operation position

Condition selectFlight conditions addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming, and condition delay can be set.

AFR

Sets the angle and curve of all the operation functions.

Dual rate

D/R curve which can be switched with a switch, etc. can also be added.

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10 mixes can be used for each condition.

Gyro

Used to switch gyro sensitivity

221 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Condition selectFlight condition's addition, deletion, copy, condition renaming,and condition delay can be set. [All model types]

7KHIXQFWLRQVLQWKH0RGHOPHQXFDQEHXVHGE\VZLWFKLQJWKHVHWWLQJVRIXSWRIOLJKWFRQGLWLRQVE\XVLQJWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWRDGGÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV$GGFRQGLWLRQVDVUHTXLUHG
:KHQ\RXGRQRWZDQWWRXVHWKH&RQGLWLRQVHOHFWIXQFWLRQWKLVVHWWLQJLVXQQHFHVVDU\,QWKLVFDVH
XVHWKHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDVVLJQHGDWLQLWLDOVHWWLQJŏ6LQFHVZLWFKLQJE\VWLFNDQGOHYHUSRVLWLRQLQ
addition to ordinary toggle switch, is possible
as the flight condition selector switch, thisfunction can be linked with other operations.
ŏ $ &RQGLWLRQ 'HOD\ IXQFWLRQ FDQ EH VHW
Unnecessary fuselage motion generated
when there are sudden changes in the servo

positions and when there are variations in
the operating time between channels duringcondition switching can be suppressed. The
delay can be set for each channel.
When setting the delay function at theswitching destination condition, therelated function changes after a delay
corresponding to the set amount.
ŏ :KHQ PXOWLSOH FRQGLWLRQV ZHUH VHW WKHLU
operation priority can be freely changed.
ŏ 7KH FRQGLWLRQ QDPH FDQ EH FKDQJHG 7KH
selected condition name is displayed on
the screen. When a condition has been
added, give it a name which can be easilyFRQÀUPHG

ŏ6HOHFW>&RQGLWLRQVHOHFW@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
Currently selected condition name

Conditions List

Condition Renaming

Condition Addition

1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to rename in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Rename] button.
3. Enter the new name from the
keyboard which appears on
the screen.
4. When the keyboard [Condition
name] key is tapped, the newname is registered.

1. When the [Add] button is tapped, theCondition Select screen appears.
2QO\WKHQXPEHURIEXWWRQVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH
FRQGLWLRQVZKLFKFDQEHDGGHGDUHGLVSOD\HG
2. Select the desired conditions by tapping
the buttons.
*The selected conditions are added to Conditions/LVW
3. Tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen.
4. Select the switch to be used in condition
switching.
(See "Switch selection method" at the endof this manual for selection method
details.)
5. The "Condition1" data for the added
conditions is copied.

222 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Currently selected condition name

The ON/OFF switch ofcondition is chosen.

Conditions List

Condition Copy

Condition Remove

1. Tap the [Copy] button. The Copy screen
appears.
2. Select the condition by tapping the buttonof the copy source conditions.
3. Next, select the condition by tapping the
copy destination condition.
4. Tap the [Copy] button.
5. When the [Yes] button is tapped, the datais copied. (To abort copying, tap the [No]button.)1. Select the condition bytapping the condition you
want to reset in Conditions
List.
2. Tap the [Remove] button.
3. When the [Yes] button istapped, the condition isreset. (To abort resetting, tap
the [No] button.)● Group/single mode switching (Gr./Sngl)(For a description of the operation
method, see the description at theback of this manual.)

Last condition has
the highest priority

Priority change
1. Tap the condition whose
priority you want to change
in Conditions List.
2. Change the priority with thepriority [ ] or [ ] button. (Thelast condition has the highest
priority.)*The initial setting condition
cannot be moved. It has thelowest priority.

Condition delay setting
1. Switch to the condition you want to set.
2. Tap the Delay button of the channel you
want to set.
3. Use the value input buttons to set the delay.
ŏ,QLWLDOYDOXH
ŏ$GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa PD[LPXPGHOD\

223 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶAFR

The angle and curve of each operation function can be set. [All model types]$)5 IXQFWLRQ LV XVHG WR DGMXVW WKH WKURZ DQGRSHUDWLRQ FXUYH RI WKH VWLFN OHYHU DQG VZLWFKIXQFWLRQVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ

7KLVLVQRUPDOO\XVHGDIWHU(QG3RLQWKDVGH¿QHG
WKHPD[LPXPWKURZ:KHQPL[LQJLVDSSOLHGIURP
RQH FKDQQHO WR DQRWKHU FKDQQHO ERWK FKDQQHOVFDQEHDGMXVWHGDWWKHVDPHWLPHE\DGMXVWLQJWKH
operation rate through the AFR function.
ŏ 2SHUDWLRQ FXUYH DGMXVWPHQW 7KUHH W\SHV
of curves (EXP1, EXP2, and Point) can beselected. A maximum 17 points curve can beused for the point curve type. (Initial setting:
9 points) The number of points can also be
increased and decreased and curves fromcomplex curves to simple curves can beused.
ŏ2SHUDWLRQVSHHGDGMXVWPHQW7KHRSHUDWLRQ
speed of each function when the function
is operated (including at flight condition
switching) can be adjusted. The function
operates smoothly at a constant speed
corresponding to the set speed.

When D/R is turned ON, the display willshow "D/R----", and the rudder angle (rate)and EXP can be set when D/R is ON.

ŏ6HOHFW>$)5@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQGFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
Curve select
EXP1, EXP2, Point curve

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Curve selectSeparately ⇔ Combination(Left and rightsymmetricalcurve.)
Left/right, Up/down, overall
adjustment at Rate A andRate B● Operation curve setting(For a description of the setting method, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)

Function selection
1. When the function select button is tapped, a selection screen appears.
2. Select the function you want to set at the selection screen.

● Group/single mode switch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information, see thedescription at the back of this manual.)● Servo speed setting(For a description of the setting
method, see the description at
the back of this manual.)

224 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Dual rate'5FXUYHVZKLFKFDQEHVZLWFKHGE\VZLWFKHWF
FDQ EH DGGHG7KH FXUYH FDQ EH DGMXVWHG E\ WKHAFR function.
ŏ 8SWRUDWHVFDQEHDGGHGIRUHDFK
condition.
ŏ '5LVVHWIRUHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGLVQRW
UHÁHFWHGDWRWKHUFRQGLWLRQVŏ '5DWWKHWRSRIWKH'5OLVWKDVSULRULW\ŏ6HOHFW>'XDOUDWH@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX
The ON/OFF switch ofdual rate is chosen.

Activate the D/R function
by tapping the [INH] .

Rate, EXP settings
are on AFR function

When the function select button
is tapped, a selection screen
appears.
Select the function you want to
set at the selection screen.

● Setting rudder angle, EXP
On this D/R screen you can set functions andswitchover switches. Rudder angle (rate) and EXP
settings are performed on the AFR screen when
the D/R switch is ON.

225 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Program. mixes

Program mixing which can be freely customized. Up to 10
mixings can be used for each condition. [All model types]

Programmable mixing may be used to correct
XQGHVLUHGWHQGHQFLHVRIWKHDLUFUDIWDQGLWPD\DOVREHXVHGIRUXQXVXDOFRQWUROFRQ¿JXUDWLRQV0L[LQJ
PHDQV WKDW WKH PRWLRQ RI D FRPPDQG FKDQQHOFDOOHGWKHPDVWHULVDGGHGWRWKHPRWLRQRIWKH
PL[HGFKDQQHOFDOOHGVODYH
<RXPD\FKRRVHWRKDYHWKH0DVWHUVWULPDGGHGWR
WKH6ODYHFKDQQHOUHVSRQVHLI\RXGHVLUH 7ULPVHWWLQJ  7KH PL[LQJ FXUYH FDQ EH FKDQJHG VR
that the undesired tendencies can be corrected
H൵HFWLYHO\E\VHWWLQJWKH(;3(;33RLQWPRGHV

2൵VHWW\SHPL[LQJDSSOLHVD¿[HGR൵VHWRUSUHVHW
to the programmed channel servo operation andmay control up to four circuits simultaneously.
7KH3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJLQFOXGHVDSRZHUIXOOLQN
IXQFWLRQZKLFKDOORZV3URJUDPPDEOHPL[LQJWREH
OLQNHGZLWKWKHVSHFLDOPL[LQJIXQFWLRQVRUZLWKother programmable mixing functions. The link
IXQFWLRQFDQEHVHWXSIRU0DVWHUDQG6ODYHFKDQQHO
individually.

ŏ7DSWKH>3URJPL[HV@EXWWRQLQWKH0RGHOPHQXWRFDOO
the setup screen shown below.
ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX● Group/single modeswitch (Gr./Sngl)(For more information,
see the description
at the back of thismanual.)After this function is
activated, the masterand slave function
names (or oﬀset mixing)
are displayed.

Mixing/Oﬀset modeswitch● Operation curve setting(For a description of thesetting method, see thedescription at the back ofthis manual.)

Activate the function bytapping the [INH] .

Trim mode setting ON/OFF.

The ON/OFF switch ofprog. mixes is chosen.

Fine tuning trim
setting

Master function(or Stick, Switch, Dial)
is chosen.

The on time (start/stoptime) can be set up to 4
seconds. It is useful for
landing gear control of thejet or scale plane, etc.

Slave function is chosen.
Servo speed setting

226 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƐƈƗƋƒƇƖ
ŏ*URXSVLQJOHPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Activating functions for only the selectedconditions:
1. Tap the [Gr] button and switch to the [Sngl ]mode.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQWKH*U
and Sngl modes.

1. To turn the trim mode ON/OFF, tap the Trim
button on the screen.
:KHQPL[LQJLQFOXGHVPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHWWKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>21@:KHQPL[LQJGRHVQRWLQFOXGHPDVWHUVLGHWULPVHW
WKH7ULPEXWWRQWR>2))@(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>21@
DQG>2))@
7KLVLVH൵HFWLYHZKHQWKHPDVWHUFKDQQHOLVVHWE\)XQFWLRQŏ0L[LQJPRGHVHOHFWLRQ
Using the offset mode:
1. Tap the Mode button and switch to theOffset mode.

ŏ0L[LQJFXUYHW\SHVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the curve type selection button of thecurve type you want to use to display theselection screen. Then, select the curve youwant to use.

(DFK WLPH WKH EXWWRQ LV WDSSHG LW WRJJOHV EHWZHHQ WKH0L[LQJDQG2൵VHWPRGHV)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH FXUYH VHWWLQJ PHWKRG VHH WKHdescription at the back of this manual.

ŏ0L[LQJVHWXSVFUHHQVHOHFWLRQ
1. Tap the button of the mixing you want to
set. The mixing setup screen is displayed.
Activate the function.
2. Activate the function by tapping the [INH]button.

ŏ)LQHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJ
1. When using the curve fine tuning function,
tap the [--] button of the Fine Tuning item tocall the <Switch> screen and then select thelever, VR, etc. you want to use.

(DFKWLPHWKLVEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQ>,1+@
DQG>212))@ŏ0L[LQJ 212)) VZLWFK VHWWLQJ DQG 212))
direction switching$Q 212)) VZLWFK LV QRW VHW HYHQ ZKHQ WKH IXQFWLRQ LV
activated.

1. When you want to turn mixing ON/OFF byswitch, tap the [--] button to call the <Switch>
screen and then select the switch and its ON
direction.
)RU D GHVFULSWLRQ RI WKH VHOHFWLRQ PHWKRG VHH >6ZLWFK
VHWWLQJPHWKRG@DWWKHEDFNRIWKLVPDQXDO)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH¿QHWXQLQJWULPVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHH
the description at the back of this manual.

ŏ6HUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJ
1. When setting the servo speed, tap the speed
button. The Servo speed setup screen isdisplayed.
)RUDGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHVHUYRVSHHGVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHHWKH
description at the back of this manual.
2IIVHW PL[LQJ FKDQJHV WKH VSHHG 8VH WKH 6SHHG ,Q DQG6SHHG2XWEXWWRQVWRUHDGMXVWWKHVSHHG
 7KHPL[LQJVZLWFKFDQVHWDGHOD\ZLWKDGLIIHUHQWUDWHDW
starting and stopping.
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVLQDFWLYHZKHQDPL[LQJVZLWFKLVQRWVHW

ŏ0DVWHU FKDQQHO VHWWLQJ H[FHSW RIIVHW W\SH
mixing)1. Tap the Master button to call the Function
menu and select the master channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVWDSSHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 
0DVWHUFKDQQHOFRQWUROFDQEHVHWWRVWLFN95DQGRWKHUVLPSOHWUDYHOVZKLFKGRQRWLQFOXGH(QGSRLQW$)5'5
PL[LQJVHWWLQJHWF,QWKLVFDVHGLVSOD\WKH)XQFWLRQ+:!VFUHHQE\WDSSLQJWKH>6WLFN6ZLWFK'LDO@EXWWRQDQG
then select master channel side control.

ŏ6ODYHFKDQQHOVHWWLQJ
1. Tap the Slave button to call the Function
menu and select the slave channel.
2. To link this mixing with other mixing, tap the"Link" button.
(DFKWLPHWKHEXWWRQLVSUHVVHGLWWRJJOHVEHWZHHQPL[LQJ
GLUHFWLRQDQGDQG2)) QROLQN 

ŏ7ULPPRGH212))VHWWLQJ

227 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶGyro
7KLVIXQFWLRQLVXVHGZKHQD)XWDED*<6HULHV
J\URLVXVHGWRVWDELOL]HWKHDLUFUDIW VDWWLWXGH7KH
VHQVLWLYLW\DQGRSHUDWLRQPRGH 1RUPDOPRGH*<
PRGH FDQEHVZLWFKHGZLWKDVZLWFK
ŏ7KUHHUDWHV 5DWH5DWH5DWH FDQEH
switched.
ŏ8SWRD[HV *\UR*\UR*\UR FDQEH
simultaneously controlled.

*Initial setting does not assign a sensitivity channel. Use the)XQFWLRQPHQXRIWKH/LQNDJHPHQXWRDVVLJQWKHVHQVLWLYLW\FKDQQHO *\UR*\UR*\UR  XVHG WR D YDFDQW FKDQQHObeforehand.
6HW>&RQWURO@DQG>7ULP@RWKHUWKDQ)XQFWLRQWR>@ŏ6HOHFW>*\UR@DWWKHPRGHOPHQXDQG
call the setup screen shown below.
Tapping this will change INH to either ON or OFF
and enable operation. Adjustment of the threerates (sensitivity) and switching between Normaland AVCS is possible.

ŏ5HWXUQWR0RGHOPHQX

Condition group/
single mode selection(Gr. /Sngl)

The ON/OFF switch of
gyro is chosen.
The operation mode
(AVCS/NOR) andsensitivity of the 3axes Gyro/Gyro2/
Gyro3 can be set.

3 rate (gyro gain)
adjustment

ŏ7KUHHUDWHV 5DWH5DWH5DWH FDQEHXVHGTap to the [Rate] item. Adjust the rate.
ŏ:KHQXVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQ7DS>,1+@ŏ :KHQ D )XWDED *< J\UR LV XVHG ZKHQ >*<@ W\SH LV VHOHFWHG WKHsensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS and Normal modes.
ŏ:KHQVHWWLQJDVZLWFKWDSWKH6ZLWFKLWHPDQGWDSWKHEXWWRQWRFDOO
the selection screen, and then select the switch and set its ON direction.
(For a description of the switch selection method, see the description at
the end of this manual.)

228 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƒƐƐƒƑŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƘƖƈƇŃƌƑŃƉƘƑƆƗƌƒƑŃƖƈƗƘƓŃƖƆƕƈƈƑ
7KLVVHFWLRQGHVFULEHVWKHIXQFWLRQVRIWHQXVHGDWWKHIXQFWLRQVHWXSVFUHHQ5HIHUWRLWZKHQVHWWLQJ
each function.

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƙƄƏƘƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊ
7DSSLQJWKHYDOXHVHWWLQJEXWWRQVRQHDFKVFUHHQZLOOFDXVHYDOXHLQSXW
buttons to appear at the top of the panel.
Value input buttons display
at the top of the panel
Pressing and holding
a value will return it
to its default setting.
Large change
in value

Small change
in value

Large change
in valueŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƳƌƊƋƗŃƆƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑƖ
Group/single mode switching (Gr/Singl)

Condition delay setting:KHQ VHWWLQJ PXOWLSOH IOLJKW FRQGLWLRQVOLQNLQJWKHVHWWLQJFRQWHQWVZLWKDOOFRQGLWLRQVJURXSPRGH RUVHWWLQJLQGHSHQGHQWO\ VLQJOH
PRGH  FDQ EH VHOHFWHG 7KH PRGH FDQ EH
FKDQJHGDWWKH>*U@LWHPRQHDFKVHWXSVFUHHQ

8QQHFHVVDU\IXVHODJHPRWLRQJHQHUDWHGZKHQ
there are sudden changes in the servo position
DQG YDULDWLRQV LQ WKH RSHUDWLQJ WLPH EHWZHHQ
channels can be suppressed by using thecondition delay function of the condition selectIXQFWLRQ>&RQGLWLRQVHOHFW@
When the delay function is set at the
VZLWFKLQJ GHVWLQDWLRQ FRQGLWLRQ D GHOD\corresponding to that amount is applied and therelated functions change smoothly.

[Group/single mode switching][Setting method]
Tap

Tap

Tap
ŏ*URXSPRGH *U
The same setting contents are set to all
WKHÁLJKWFRQGLWLRQVŏ6LQJOHPRGH 6LQJO
Set this mode when the setting contents
are not linked with other conditions.

1. Switch to the condition you want to set
and tap the delay[ 0 (value)].
2. Set the delay using the " ▼▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ "ʆʆEXWWRQV
Initial value: 0
Adjustment range: 0~27 (maximum delay):KHQWKHYDOXHLVWDSSHGWKHGHOD\LVUHVHWWRWKHLQLWLDOYDOXH

229 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƲƑƈŃƗƘƑƌƑƊŃŹŵ
Operation mode selection*The operation modes which can beselected depend on the function.

VR selection

Rate adjustment(Fine tuning VR operation position)[Setting method]
1. Control selection
Tap the [Control] "--" button to call the<Hardware select> screen, and then selectthe switch and its ON direction.
2. Mode selection
Tap the [Mode] button, and then select themode ([LIN.], [ATL+], [ATL-], or [SYM.]).
3. Rate adjustment
Tap the [Rate] "value" button.
Set the rate using the " ▼ ▼ " " ▼ " " ▲ "ʆʆEXWWRQV[Fine tuning VR operation mode]>/,1@ 0 L [ L Q J  U D W H     D W  F H Q W H U  R I  9 5 When the VR is turned clockwise andcounterclockwise, the mixing rateincreases and decreases, respectively.
>$7/@0L[LQJ UDWH  DW OHIW HQG RI 95
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
>$7/@ 0L[LQJ UDWH  DW ULJKW HQG RI 95
When the VR is turned, the mixing rateincreases.
[SYM.] When the VR is turned to the left or
right of the neutral position, the mixing
rate increases.

 ,QLWLDOYDOXH $GMXVWPHQWUDQJHa
:KHQ WKH YDOXH LV WDSSHG WKH UDWH LV UHVHW WR WKH LQLWLDOYDOXH

LIN.

ATL+ ATL-

SYM.

After setting, press a HOME/EXIT button

230 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŲƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑƖŃƕƈƏƄƗƈƇŃƗƒŃƖƈƕƙƒŃƖƓƈƈƇ

Linear（First）
0 〜 27（Slowly）

In case of Linear

Servo speed setting
The servo speed at each function
RSHUDWLRQ LQFOXGLQJ IOLJKW FRQGLWLRQVZLWFKLQJ  FDQ EH DGMXVWHG7KH VHUYRV
operate smoothly at a fixed speed
corresponding to the set speed. The
RSHUDWLQJVSHHG ,QVLGH DQGUHWXUQVSHHG
2XWVLGH FDQEHVHWLQGLYLGXDOO\

In
Speed

Out
Speed

"Linear" mode: Used with functions
which hold the operation position of
the throttle and switch channel, etc.
[Setting method]
1. Select the mode ([Linear] or[Symmetry]). Each time the button istapped, it toggles between [Linear]and [Symmetry].

Out speed

Symmetry

6ZLWFKWKHRSHUDWLRQPRGHDFFRUGLQJWR
the set function.
"Symmetry" mode: Used with ailerons
and other self neutral functions.

In speed

In
Speed

In
Speed

Out
Speed

Out
Speed
In case of Symmetry

2. Tap the In or Out Speed button andset the servo speed.

In speed

Initial value: 0
Setting range: 0~27

Out speed

231 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŦƘƕƙƈŃƖƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƒƓƈƕƄƗƌƒƑ
7KLVVHFWLRQGHVFULEHVWKHVHWWLQJSURFHGXUHRIFXUYHVZKLFKDUHXVHGZLWKWKH$)5IXQFWLRQDQGHDFKmixing function.
ŦƘƕƙƈŃƗƜƓƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
)RXU W\SHV RI FXUYHV (;3 (;3 3RLQW DQG
6SOLQH FDQEHVHOHFWHG

Curve type selection
1. Tap the button of the curve type youwant to use.
*The curve type changes and the display
returns to the original screen.
[EXP1]: EXP1 curve[EXP2]: EXP2 curve[Point]: point curve[Spline]: spline curve

232 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƈƗƗƌƑƊŃƅƜŃƆƘƕƙƈŃƗƜƓƈ
:KHQWKHFXUYHW\SHLVVHOHFWHGDVGHVFULEHGDERYHDGMXVWPHQWLWHPVFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKHFXUYHW\SHDSSHDURQWKHVFUHHQ$GMXVWHDFKFXUYHDVGHVFULEHGEHORZ
EXP1/EXP2 curve adjustment

1. Tap to the [Offset] setting item.
2. Move the curve in the vertical direction
XVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆEXWWRQV
 ,QLWLDOYDOXH

(EXP1 curve):KHQWKHYDOXHLVWDSSHGWKHUDWHLVUHVHWWRWKHLQLWLDOYDOXH

8VLQJWKH(;3FXUYHLVH൵HFWLYHLQVPRRWKLQJVWDUWLQJRIWKHDLOHURQVHOHYDWRUUXGGHUHWF
(EXP2 curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

8VLQJWKH(;3FXUYHLVH൵HFWLYHLQHQJLQHULVH
and other engine control.
7KHFXUYHOHIWDQGULJKWUDWHV >5DWH$@>5DWH
%@ DQG(;3FXUYHUDWH >(;3$@>(;3%@ FDQ
EHDGMXVWHGLQGLYLGXDOO\ >(;3@IRU(;3The curve can also be offset horizontally>2൵VHW@ LQWKHYHUWLFDOGLUHFWLRQ
[Rate setting]
1. Tap to the [Rate A], [Rate B], [EXP A], or [EXP
B] setting item.
6HWWKHUDWHXVLQJWKHʈʈʈʆʆʆ
buttons
 ,QLWLDOYDOXH UDWH  (;3UDWH
 ,QLWLDOYDOXHGL൵HUVGHSHQGLQJRQIXQFWLRQ $GMXVWPHQW UDQJH a UDWH a (;3UDWH:KHQ WKH YDOXH LV WDSSHG WKH UDWH LV UHVHW WR WKH LQLWLDOYDOXH

[Offsetting the curve horizontally in thevertical direction]

233 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

3RLQWFXUYHVRUVSOLQHFXUYHVRIXSWRSRLQWV
FDQEHXVHG ,QLWLDOYDOXHSRLQWV 7KHVHW
SRLQWVFDQEHIUHHO\LQFUHDVHGGHFUHDVHGDQG
R൵VHW
Point addition method

5. Press "Rate" and use the up/down arrows toadjust the rate points up or down.

1.Open the screen of a mixing curve with thecurve function.

The kind of mixing curve

Point deletion method
8VHWKHPRYHEHWZHHQSRLQWVEXWWRQ>ł@
RU>ń@
DQGVHOHFWWKHSRLQW 7KHUHGSRLQWʄLVWKH
selected point.)

The red point（■）
moves (to green point)

2.Tap the "Position" button.
Move between
point
A red mark（ □ ）moves freely

2. Tap the [Remove] button. (The selected
SRLQWEHFRPHVDQRXWOLQHGSRLQWŌ8VHWKHPRYHEHWZHHQSRLQWVEXWWRQ>ł@
RU>ń@ *The point is deleted.
 7DS WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆ ʆʆ EXWWRQ DQGVHOHFW WKH SRVLWLRQ PDUN Ō  \RX ZDQW WR
add.
4. When the "Add" is tapped, the point is
added.（Ō）ń（ʄ）
 $QHZSRLQWLVFUHDWHG

234 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

Curve setting operation Spline curve
A smoother curve is made.
Setting method is same at spline and point.
Point

Spline8S WR  RU  SRLQWV FXUYH FDQ EH XVHGGL൵HUVZLWKIXQFWLRQ
Initial point number: 9 points (17 points
curve), 7 points (11 points curve)
7KH VHW SRLQWV FDQ EH IUHHO\ LQFUHDVHG GHFUHDVHG DQGR൵VHW

[Rate adjustment of each point]

1. Tap to theitemand select the point whose
rate you want to set.

Spline curve*The mark RQWKHFXUYHVKRZVthe currently selected point.

2. Tap to the [Rate]
item. And set
the rate using
WKH ʈʈ ʈ ʆʆʆEXWWRQV
The kind of mixing curve

Repeat steps 1 through 2 and adjust the
curve.

Point curve (Point) adjustment(Point)8S WR  RU  SRLQWV FXUYH FDQ EH
XVHG GL൵HUVZLWKIXQFWLRQ
Initial point number: 9 points (17points curve), 7 points (11 points
curve)*[Separ.] mode: Normal setting*[Comb.] mode: Creates a left and rightsymmetrical curve.

235 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŶƚƌƗƆƋŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƐƈƗƋƒƇ
7KHYDULRXVIXQFWLRQVXVHGLQWKH7,=683(5FDQEHVHOHFWHGE\VZLWFK7KHVZLWFK LQFOXGLQJZKHQVWLFNWULPOHYHURU95DUHXVHGDVDVZLWFK VHWWLQJPHWKRGLVFRPPRQWRDOOIXQFWLRQVŶƚƌƗƆƋŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƌƒƑ
:KHQDVZLWFKLVVHOHFWHGDWDPL[LQJIXQFWLRQHWFWKHVHOHFWLRQVFUHHQVKRZQEHORZLVFDOOHG

(Switch selection screen example)

Tap the chosen
switch.

źƋƈƑŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃƌƖŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƈƇ
6ZLWFK212))VHWWLQJLVSRVVLEOHDWHDFKSRVLWLRQ
1. When the ON/OFF "Set" position switch istapped after the switch was selected, thescreen shown below appears.

źƋƈƑŃƖƗƌƆƎŏŃƗƕƌƐŃƏƈƙƈƕŏŃƒƕŃŹŵŃƌƖŃ
ƖƈƏƈƆƗƈƇő
:KHQDVWLFNWULPOHYHURU95LVXVHGDVDVZLWFKWKHIROORZLQJPRGHVFDQEHVHOHFWHG

Next page

Normal or Alternate: Alternate switchingmode is available depending on mixing
function.
*When the button of each position is tapped,
it toggles between ON and OFF.
2. Tap the button and set to the ON position.
3. Close the screen by tapping [Hardware
select].

236 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ūƜƖƗƈƕƈƖƌƖŐƗƜƓƈŃƄƑƇŃƅƒƛŐƗƜƓƈŃƆƄƑŃƅƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗƈƇŃƌƑŃƄŃƋƄƕƇƚƄƕƈŃƖƈƏƈƆƗŃƖƆƕƈƈƑő
:KHQDVWLFNWULPOHYHURU95LVXVHGDVDVZLWFK WKHIROORZLQJPRGHVFDQEHVHOHFWHG

◆ Linear・Hysteresis mode

◆ Symmetry・Hysteresis mode

7KLVVHWWLQJPHWKRGVHOHFWVIXQFWLRQ212))EDVHG
RQWKHVHWSRLQW+\VWHUHVLV GHDGEDQG FDQEHVHW
WR21DQG2))7KH21DQG2))SRVLWLRQVFDQEHUHYHUVHGZLWKWKH5HYHUVHEXWWRQThe operation is the same as the linear hysteresis
PRGHEXWOHIWDQGULJKW XSDQGGRZQ RSHUDWLRQVDUH
V\PPHWULFDODERXWWKHQHXWUDOSRVLWLRQ)RUH[DPSOH
ZKHQ\RXZDQWWRVZLWFK'5ZLWKWKHDLOHURQVWLFNZKHQWKHVWLFNLVPRYHGWRWKHOHIWRUULJKW'5FDQ
EHWXUQHG21DWWKHVDPHOHIWDQGULJKWSRVLWLRQ◆ Linear・Box mode

◆ Symmetry・Box mode

7KLVPRGHWXUQVRQWKHVZLWFKZLWKLQDUDQJHRISRLQWV(DFKSRLQWFDQEHVHW7KH21DQG2))SRVLWLRQVFDQEHUHYHUVHGZLWKWKH5HYHUVHVZLWFK

7KHRSHUDWLRQLVWKHVDPHDVWKHOLQHDUER[PRGH
EXW OHIW DQG ULJKW XS DQG GRZQ  RSHUDWLRQ LV
symmetrical about the neutral position.

237 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

When shifting the ON/OFF point◆ Area Green：ON◆ Area Red：OFF◆ Area Yellow：Hysteresis (Dead band)

7KH212))DQGK\VWHUHVLV GHDGEDQG ERXQGDU\SRLQW WKHUH
DUHSRLQWVWRSDQGERWWRP SRVLWLRQFDQEHVKLIWHG212))LV
possible at a free position.

[ Setting method ]Reverse of ON/
OFF direction

1. Move the stick, etc. tothe point you want to shift
and touch the [ON/OFF]button. The boundary
points change.
Current stick position● Symmetry[ Setting method] → Box Type

1. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift upper side.
2. Touch the [Upper] button.
The boundary points
change.
3. Move the stick to the point
you want to shift lower side.
When Upper(Lower) is set, at thesame time, Lower(Upper) is also set.

4. Touch the [Lower] button.
The boundary points
change.

Hysteresis ：Hysteresis (dead band) can be set to ON and OFF● Symmetry[Setting method] → Linear Type

1. Move the stick to the off
point you want to shift andtouch the [OFF] button. The
off points change.
2. Move the stick to the on
point you want to shift andtouch the [ON] button. The
on points change.
When Upper (Lower) isset, at the same time,
Lower (Upper) is also set.

238 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ůƒƊƌƆŃƖƚƌƗƆƋŃŋŦƒƑƇƌƗƌƒƑŃƖƈƏƈƆƗŃƄƑƇŃŧŪŔŏŃŧŪŕŌ
7KHORJLFVZLWFKIXQFWLRQOHWV\RXWXUQRSHUDWLRQRQDQGR൵E\FRPELQLQJWZRVZLWFKHV)RULQVWDQFHWKH
FRQGLWLRQLVDFWLYDWHGZKHQVZLWFKHVDUHWXUQHGRQ
Logic mode
AND: When both switches are ON, thecondition is ON.
OR: When either switch is ON, the condition
is ON.
EX-OR: When the two switches are indifferent states, the condition is ON.

Switch mode selection
1. Tap to the [Mode] "Single" item.
(Logic switch setting screen)

Switch selection
1. Select the switch A and B.
Logic mode selection
1. Tap to the [Logic] item.
2. Select the logic mode.

239 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ųŦŃųƒƕƗ
7KHWUDQVPLWWHUFDQEHXVHGDVDJDPHFRQWUROOHUE\FRQQHFWLQJLWWRDFRPSXWHUZLWKD86%FDEOH 6RPHJDPHVFDQQRWEHXVHG

● PC PortTopŦƒƑƑƈƆƗƌƒƑŃƐƈƗƋƒƇŃŋƉƒƕŃźƌƑƇƒƚƖŌ
1. Connect the T16IZ SUPER PC port to yourPC with the USB cable included with theset.
2. When connecting for the first time, setup
will start. After the setup is complete, it canbe used as a game controller.

&KDQQHOVWRFDQEHXVHGZLWKD86%FRQQHFWLRQ2SHUDWLRQFRQ¿UPHGVLPXODWRUVRIWZDUH
・5HDO)OLJKW 8SGDWHWRWKHODWHVWYHUVLRQ・5HDO)OLJKW[ RealFlight setting method ]1. Connect T16IZ SUPER to your PC and start
Real Flight.
2. Select "Settings ..." from the "Simulation"menu of RealFlight to open the "Settings"
dialog.
   6 H W   ' H D G E D Q G  3 H U F H Q W D J H     R I"Controller" to 0.

4. Click the [OK] button to close the "Settings"
dialog.
5. Select "Select Controller ..." from the"Simulation" menu to open the "SelectController" dialog.
6HW3URÀOHWR)XWDEDDQGFOLFNWKH>(GLW@button.

240 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

7. If necessary, assign channels and makereverse settings. After setting, click the>6DYH$V@EXWWRQWRVDYHWKHSURÀOH

8. Click the [Close] button to return to the"Select Controller" dialog.
9. Click the [Calibrate] button to calibrate.
Set the stick, switch, dial, and lever to be
used in the neutral position, and press the[Next] button.

10. Operate the stick, switch, dial, andlever fully left and right or up anddown to enter the operating range.
After confirming that the correction iscomplete, press the [Finish] button to
return to the "Select Controller" dialog.

11. Click the [OK] button in the "SelectController" dialog to close the dialog.

241 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŸƓƇƄƗƌƑƊ
Your Futaba T16IZ SUPER transmitter programming can be updated easily online. Whenfunctions are added or improved, the update ﬁle can be downloaded from our website. Copy
the update files to the microSD card and then use the following procedure to update theprogram. Check our web site for the FAQ regarding updating for more information.
ŸƓƇƄƗƌƑƊŃƓƕƒƆƈƇƘƕƈ
Note: If the battery fully discharges during
program updating, updating will fail. When
WKH UHPDLQLQJ EDWWHU\ FDSDFLW\ LV  RU
less, always recharge the battery before
updating.
Note: The model data in the transmitter canbe used unchanged after updating, but tobe safe, back up the model data before
updating.

5. Insert the microSD card with "FUTABA" folderthat contained the update software into
the SD card slot on your T16IZ SUPER radiotransmitter.

1. Download the zip file of the update datafrom our website.

Futaba WEB
Installed microSD cardof the update ﬁle16IZ SUPER Update Zip ﬁleDownload

6. Turn on the transmitter power while pressing
down the "HOME/EXIT" button. The update
screen appears on the LCD display of your
T16IZ SUPER and the software update isstarted.

([WUDFWWKH]LSÀOHRQ\RXUFRPSXWHU

2

3. The "FUTABA" folder will be created on yourcomputer.
4. Copy the "FUTABA" folder into your microSD
card.

1
Press the HOME/EXIT switch and turn on
Copy the "FUTABA"
folder into your SD card.

Updating
Note: If the microSD card has already had"another FUTABA" folder before you make acopy, the "FUTABA" folder is OVERWRITTEN.

242 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

7. When the software update is completed,"Completed" message is shown on the LCD
display of your T16IZ SUPER. (Show below
picture.)Complete

8. Turn off the power switch of your T16IZ SUPERand remove the microSD card from the cardslot.

Possible Problems
When one of the error messages shown
below appears on the LCD screen your
T16IZ SUPER, the software update will not becompleted.

Don't absolutely remove the battery
and the microSD card from thetransmitter during the update.
There is a possibility that the transmitter
will be damaged.
Recovering a failed update
If you failed to update for any reason, it
may transmitter will not start.
In that case, please update againtransmitter in the following procedure.
1. Detach the battery from the transmitter.
2. Insert the microSD card that contained
WKHXSGDWHÀOHVWRWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
3. Attach the battery to the transmitter
while pressing down the "HOME/EXIT"
button.
4. The update will start.
Even after the above steps, if thetransmitter fails to update or does notstart, please have it serviced.

"Low battery."
Software update is postponed becauseof low battery. Retry the software updateafter the battery is recharged.

8SGDWHÀOHQRWIRXQG
7KH7,=683(5FDQQRWÀQGWKHXSGDWHÀOHon the microSD card. Check to be sure all
the update files have been copied onto
the microSD card.

%URNHQÀOH
The T16IZ SUPER detects the update file
HUURU7KHXSGDWHÀOHPD\EHEURNHQRUIRU
another transmitter.

"Write error."The software update procedure is stopped
for an unknown reason. Contact your local
service center when this error message
appears on the LCD screen of your T16IZ
SUPER.

243 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ

ŷŔŗŶŪŒũŻŐŕŕŒŷŔŕŮŃ‫ ڀ‬ŷŔřŬŽŃŶŸųŨŵŃŰŲŧŨůŃŧŤŷŤŃŦŲűŹŨŵŶŬŲű
7KHPRGHOGDWD RQO\ODWHVWYHUVLRQ RI76*);7.FDQEHFRSLHGWR7,=683(5PLFUR6'FDUGLVUHTXLUHG7KHPRGHOGDWDRI7,=683(5FDQQRWEHFRSLHGWR76*);7.
8VHDQ6'FDUGFRQYHUVLRQDGDSWHU QRWLQFOXGHG WRLQVHUWDPLFUR6'FDUGLQWRWKH76*);7.

[Model data conversion method]
1. Attach a microSD card that contains model
data of T14SG/FX-22/T12K to the SD slot of a
T16IZ SUPER.
2. Turn on the power switch, and the Data
Converter should run.

3. The converter shows a list of model data inthe card. Select a model data that you wantto convert and push "CONVERT" → "Yes" key,
and the converter should begin convertingdata.
4. If the convert succeeds, the converter willshow the following message. The converted
data are copied to the internal memory of
the T16IZ SUPER. Hence, if the T16IZ SUPERdoes not have available space in its internal
memory, converts must fail.

5. The converter can accept model data
made by T14SG/FX-22/T12K with the latest
software only. If you try to convert model
data made by old version software, theconverter must fail to convert and show
the following error message. If this message
is shown, do the following procedure to
update the model data in order to avoid
this limitation.

D )LUVWXSGDWHD76*);7.WRWKHODWHVWVRIWZDUH
E  /RDG WKH PRGHO GDWD ZKLFK IDLOHG WR FRQYHUW LQWR WKH76*);7. ZLWK WKH ODWHVW VRIWZDUH DQG WKHmodel data should be updated to the latest format.
F 6DYHWKHXSGDWHGPRGHOGDWDWRDPLFUR6'FDUGG  5HWU\ WR FRQYHUW WKH XSGDWHG PRGHO GDWD RQ D 7,=SUPER.
:KHQPLFUR6'FDUGFDQQRWEHUHFRJQL]HGLWPD\EHDEOH
WREHXVHGLILWUHIRUPDWVE\6'IRUPDWWHUR൵HUHGIURP6'
Association.
6'IRUPDWWHULVGRZQORDGDEOHIURP6'$VVRFLDWLRQKWWSVZZZVGFDUGRUJCAUTION
After finishing data copy, be sure to
perform a complete check of operation
with the model to be used.
Check well all the directions of operation
and all the operation switches.

244 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶThis product uses the following open source software.
■ Google Noto Fonts
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version 1.1. This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/
OFL----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation eﬀorts of academic
and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others. The OFL allows
the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modiﬁed and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works,
can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts andderivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document
created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS"Font Software" refers to the set of ﬁles released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source ﬁles, build
scripts and documentation. "Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s). "Original Version" refers to thecollection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s). "Modiﬁed Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or
substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, andsell modiﬁed and unmodiﬁed copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modiﬁed Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modiﬁed Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above
copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable
metadata ﬁelds within text or binary ﬁles as long as those ﬁelds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modiﬁed Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding CopyrightHolder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modiﬁed Version, except
to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.
5) The Font Software, modiﬁed or unmodiﬁed, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any otherlicense. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.
TERMINATIONThis license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENTSHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONTSOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

)87$%$&25325$7,21
+REE\5DGLR&RQWURO%XVLQHVV&HQWHU6DOHV 0DUNHWLQJ'HSDUWPHQW
<DEXWVXND&KRVHLPXUD&KRVHLJXQ&KLEDNHQ-DSDQ
7(/)$;
)87$%$&25325$7,21 

245 ‫ڀ‬ŪŲŃƗƒŃŷŤťůŨŃŲũŃŦŲűŷŨűŷŶ